2. 《窟八偈经》义释的注释显示巴利原文
2. Guhaṭṭhakasuttaniddesavaṇṇanā
7 在第二偈中:“有情”即执著。“在窟中”即是在身体中。由于身体是贪等猛兽的栖息之处,所以称为“窟”。“被众多所遮盖”:被众多已生起的贪等烦恼所遮盖,这一句说明的是内在的束缚。“住立”:指以贪等烦恼的方式而住立。“沉入迷醉处”:“迷醉处”指的是欲乐功德,因为在这里,诸天与人变得迷醉,深深地沉入其中;这一句说明的是外在的束缚。“因为那种人远离了远离”:那种状态的人,对于三种远离(身远离、心远离、依远离)是远离而不接近的。什么原因呢?“因为世间的欲确实难以断除”:意思是说,世间的欲不容易断除,因此他远离了远离。显示巴利原文
7. Dutiye – sattoti laggo. Guhāyanti kāye. Kāyo hi rāgādīnaṃ vāḷānaṃ vasanokāsato ‘‘guhā’’ti vuccati. Bahunābhichannoti bahunā rāgādikilesajātena abhicchanno. Etena ajjhattabandhanaṃ vuttaṃ. Tiṭṭhanti rāgādivasena tiṭṭhanto. Mohanasmiṃ pagāḷhoti mohanaṃ vuccati kāmaguṇo. Ettha hi devamanussā muyhanti tesu ajjhogāḷhā hutvā; etena bāhirabandhanaṃ vuttaṃ. Dūre vivekā hi tathāvidho soti so tathārūpo naro tividhāpi kāyavivekādivivekā dūre , anāsanne. Kiṃkāraṇā? Kāmā hi loke na hi suppahāyāti yasmā loke kāmā suppahāyā na honti, tasmāti vuttaṃ hoti.
所谓“已经说过有情”,就如“有情、人、摩奴”等说法,是曾经说过的。接下来应当说明“窟”:或为身,或为窟……乃至……或为罐,这些词的连接方式是这样的:或是身,或是窟……乃至……或是罐。其中,“身”:如“可厌之物的聚集处,故名为身”等,在之前的《念处论》中已经说过。“窟”:因可作为贪等猛兽的栖息之处,故称为窟;也有人说,因具有覆藏的作用,故称为窟,正如“远行独行,无有形身,住于窟中”等经句所说。“肉身”:因被贪等烦恼烧灼,故称为肉身,正如“舍去那人身”等所说。“疑惑”:因会引发放逸,故称为疑惑,正如“这腐朽的疑身必将碎裂,生命终归于死”等所说。“船”:因……显示巴利原文
Sattoti hi kho vuttanti ‘‘satto, naro, mānavo’’ti evamādinā nayena kathitoyeva. Guhā tāva vattabbāti guhā tāva kathetabbā. Kāyoti vātiādīsu ayaṃ tāva padayojanā – kāyo iti vā guhā iti vā…pe… kumbho iti vāti. Tattha kāyoti ‘‘kucchitānaṃ āyoti kāyo’’tiādinā heṭṭhā satipaṭṭhānakathāyaṃ vuttoyeva. Rāgādivāḷānaṃ vasanokāsaṭṭhena guhā, ‘‘paṭicchādanaṭṭhenā’’tipi eke. ‘‘Dūraṅgamaṃ ekacaraṃ, asarīraṃ guhāsaya’’ntiādīsu (dha. pa. 37) viya. Rāgādīhi jhāpanaṭṭhena deho ‘‘te hitvā mānusaṃ deha’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.332 thokaṃ visadisaṃ) viya. Pamattakaraṇaṭṭhena sandeho ‘‘bhijjati pūtisandeho, maraṇantañhi jīvita’’ntiādīsu (dha. pa. 148) viya. Saṃsāre sañcaraṇaṭṭhena nāvā ‘‘siñca bhikkhu imaṃ nāvaṃ, sittā te lahumessatī’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 369) viya. Iriyāpathassa atthibhāvaṭṭhena ratho ‘‘ratho sīlaparikkhāro, jhānakkho cakkavīriyo’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 5.4) viya. Accuggataṭṭhena dhajo ‘‘dhajo rathassa paññāṇa’’ntiādīsu (jā. 2.22.1841) viya.
「蚁丘」(vammiko):以作为虫类群体的住处这一意义,称为蚁丘。正如在“比丘!蚁丘,这是对这座四大所造之身的称号”(《中部》1.251)等经文中所说的那样。就像外在的蚁丘依于四种原因而被称为「蚁丘」:一是吐出(vamati),二是被吐出的(vantaka),三是吐出所堆积的(vantussaya),四是被吐出的唾液所粘合(vantasinehasambaddha)。因为这个蚁丘会吐出蛇、獴、鼠、壁虎等各种小动物,所以叫蚁丘。因为它是由白蚁吐出的,所以叫蚁丘。因为白蚁吐出后,用嘴和喙搬运尘粉堆积起来,高达齐腰,甚至高达一人,所以叫蚁丘。因为被白蚁吐出的唾液粘液所黏合,即使天上下七天七夜的雨,它也不会散坏;在热季时,从中取一把土,用手捏压,会有粘液渗出来;像这样,被吐出的粘液所黏合,所以叫蚁丘。同样地,这个身体也是如此:正如“从眼流出眼垢”等说法那样,它会排出各种不净物和污秽,因此是蚁丘。佛陀、独觉佛、诸漏尽者,由于耗尽了对这个有身的爱乐而舍离了身体,所以它是圣者们所吐弃的,因此也是蚁丘。再者,这个身体由三百骨节竖立,筋腱连结,肉充填涂抹,湿皮包裹,肤色装饰,以此迷惑众生;这一切全部都是圣者们所吐弃的,所以它是‘吐出所堆积的’(vantussaya),也是蚁丘。如同“渴爱产生人,他的心随之流转”(《相应部》1.55-57)所说,这个身体由渴爱所生,被圣者们已吐弃的渴爱粘液所连结,所以它是‘被吐出的唾液所粘合’(vantasinehena sambaddho),也是蚁丘。又比如,蚁丘内部有各种小动物就在那里出生,大小便,因病躺卧,死后掉落。这样,那个蚁丘就成了它们的产房、厕所、病房和坟墓。同样地,即使是刹帝利豪门等等的身体,不要认为‘这是被守护、被装扮、有大威德者的身体’,实际上,依止皮肤而生的众生、依止肉而生的众生、依止筋腱而生的众生、依止骨而生的众生、依止骨髓而生的众生,像这样按种类计算约有八十类虫群数以千计,就在这身体内部出生,大小便,因病苦不安而躺卧,死了的就掉落。这样,这个身体也就成了那些众生的产房、厕所、病房和坟墓,因此被称为「蚁丘」。显示巴利原文
Kimikulānaṃ āvāsabhāvena vammiko ‘‘vammikoti kho, bhikkhu, imassetaṃ cātumahābhūtikassa kāyassa adhivacana’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.251) viya. Yatheva hi bāhirako vammiko, vamati vantako vantussayo vantasinehasambaddhoti catūhi kāraṇehi ‘‘vammiko’’ti vuccati. So hi ahinakulaundūragharagoḷikādayo nānappakāre pāṇake vamatīti vammiko. Upacikāhi vantakoti vammiko. Upacikāhi vamitvā mukhatuṇḍakehi ukkhittapaṃsucuṇṇena kaṭippamāṇenapi porisappamāṇenapi ussitoti vammiko. Upacikāhi vantakheḷasinehena ābaddhatāya sattasattāhaṃ deve vassantepi na vippakirīyati, nidāghepi tato paṃsumuṭṭhiṃ gahetvā tasmiṃ muṭṭhinā pīḷiyamāne sineho nikkhamati, evaṃ vantasinehena sambaddhoti vammiko. Evamayaṃ kāyopi ‘‘akkhimhā aggigūthako’’tiādinā nayena nānappakāraṃ asucikalimalaṃ vamatīti vammiko. Buddhapaccekabuddhakhīṇāsavā imasmiṃ attabhāve nikantipariyādānena attabhāvaṃ chaḍḍetvā gatāti ariyehi vantakotipi vammiko. Yehi cāyaṃ tīhi aṭṭhisatehi ussito nahārusambaddho maṃsāvalepano allacammapariyonaddho chavirañjito satte vañceti, taṃ sabbaṃ ariyehi vantamevāti vantussayotipi vammiko. ‘‘Taṇhā janeti purisaṃ, cittamassa vidhāvatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.55-57) evaṃ taṇhāya janitattā ariyehi vanteneva taṇhāsinehena sambaddho ayanti vantasinehena sambaddhotipi vammiko. Yathā ca vammikassa anto nānappakārā pāṇakā tattheva jāyanti, uccārapassāvaṃ karonti, gilānā sayanti, matā nipatanti. Iti so tesaṃ sūtigharaṃ vaccakuṭi gilānasālā susānañca hoti. Evaṃ khattiyamahāsālādīnampi kāyo ‘‘ayaṃ gopitarakkhito maṇḍitapasādito mahānubhāvānaṃ kāyo’’ti acintetvā chavinissitā pāṇā cammanissitā pāṇā maṃsanissitā pāṇā nahārunissitā pāṇā aṭṭhinissitā pāṇā aṭṭhimiñjanissitā pāṇāti evaṃ kulagaṇanāya asītimattāni kimikulasahassāni antokāyasmiṃyeva jāyanti, uccārapassāvaṃ karonti, gelaññena āturitāni sayanti, matāmatā nipatanti. Iti ayampi tesaṃ pāṇānaṃ sūtigharaṃ vaccakuṭi gilānasālā susānañca hotīti ‘‘vammiko’’ti saṅkhaṃ gato.
「城」:以可爱与不可爱境生起之义而称为城,正如“萨迦耶城”等所说。「巢」:为病等之巢穴、栖息处,故称为巢,正如“病之巢,易碎者”(《法句》148)等所说。「小屋」:以结生时之住处为义,故为小屋,正如“进入此五门小屋”(《长老偈》125)等所说。「瘤」:依腐烂之性而为瘤,正如“诸比丘!此所谓病,诸比丘!此所谓瘤,诸比丘!此所谓箭,乃是对此身之称号”(《增支部》9.15)等所说。「罐」:以坏灭之义而为罐,正如“了知此身如罐”(《法句》40)等所说。「这是对此身的称号」:此为上述四大所造、诸可厌法聚集处之称号,意为“何以名为身”。「在窟中」:即在身体之中。「有情」:即粘着。「遍粘」:以显色贪等种种方式,而成种种粘着。「著」:以形态贪的方式而著。显示巴利原文
Manāpāmanāpapatanaṭṭhena nagaraṃ ‘‘sakkāyanagara’’ntiādīsu viya. Rogādīnaṃ nīḷabhāvena kulāvakabhāvena nīḷaṃ ‘‘roganīḷaṃ pabhaṅgura’’ntiādīsu (dha. pa. 148) viya. Paṭisandhiyā nivāsagehaṭṭhena kuṭi ‘‘pañcadvārāyaṃ kuṭikāyaṃ pasakkiyā’’tiādīsu (theragā. 125) viya. Pūtibhāvena gaṇḍo ‘‘rogoti bhikkhave, gaṇḍoti bhikkhave, salloti bhikkhave, kāyassetaṃ adhivacana’’ntiādīsu (a. ni. 9.15) viya. Bhijjanaṭṭhena kumbho ‘‘kumbhūpamaṃ kāyamimaṃ viditvā’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 40) viya. Kāyassetaṃ adhivacananti etaṃ vuttappakāraṃ catumahābhūtamayassa kucchitadhammānaṃ āyassa adhivacanaṃ, kathananti attho. Guhāyanti sarīrasmiṃ . Sattoti allīno. Visattoti vaṇṇarāgādivasena vividho allīno. Saṇṭhānarāgavasena āsatto. Tattheva ‘‘subhaṃ sukha’’nti gahaṇavasena laggo. Attaggahaṇavasena laggito. Palibuddhoti phassarāgavasena amuñcitvā ṭhito. Bhittikhileti bhittiyaṃ ākoṭitakhāṇuke. Nāgadanteti tatheva hatthidantasadise vaṅkadaṇḍake. Sattanti bhittikhile laggaṃ. Visattanti nāgadante laggaṃ. Āsattanti cīvaravaṃse laggaṃ. Lagganti cīvararajjuyā laggaṃ. Laggitanti pīṭhapāde laggaṃ. Palibuddhanti mañcapāde lagganti evamādinā nayena yojetabbaṃ.
「粘着的同义词」:即特别说明粘着之义。「遮盖」:被上述种种烦恼所覆盖。因烦恼一再生起,一层又一层被遮盖,故为「遍遮」。「覆」:被遮蔽。「蔽」:被阻挡。「蒙」:散布而遮盖。「封」:如以容器覆于锅口,紧密包裹。「覆藏」:被掩蔽。「倒覆」:如脸朝下倒置。其中,「遮盖」犹如被草、树叶等所遮盖;「遍遮」犹如横截河流的拦水坝;「覆」犹如阻断人流行进道路的屏障。显示巴利原文
Lagganādhivacananti visesena allīyanakathanaṃ. Channoti vuttappakārehi kilesehi chādito. Punappunaṃ uppattivasena uparūpari channoti ucchanno. Āvutoti āvarito. Nivutoti vārito. Ophutoti avattharitvā chādito. Pihitoti bhājanena ukkhalimukhaṃ viya paliguṇṭhito. Paṭicchannoti āvaṭo. Paṭikujjitoti adhomukhaṃ ṭhapito. Tattha tiṇapaṇṇādīhi chāditaṃ viya channo. Ucchanno nadiṃ āvaraṇasetu viya. Āvuto janasañcaraṇamaggāvaraṇaṃ viya.
“以慢被系缚”:以种种我慢与过慢,于种种所缘上被系缚而安住。“以见被执取”:以六十二种邪见被执取,即被触摸而抓取。“以掉举而致散乱”:因心不能安住于所缘,而令心达到散乱。“以疑而致不决定”:因对三宝等的疑惑,而不能达致决定。“以随眠而致坚固”:以难以去除、未被破坏的随眠烦恼,达到并安住于坚固。显示巴利原文
Vinibaddho mānavasenāti nānāvidhena mānātimānavasena nānāvidhe ārammaṇe baddho hutvā tiṭṭhati. Parāmaṭṭho diṭṭhivasenāti dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhīnaṃ vasena parāmaṭṭho āmasitvā gahito. Vikkhepagato uddhaccavasenāti ārammaṇe asantiṭṭhanavasena cittavikkhepaṃ patto upagato. Aniṭṭhaṅgato vicikicchāvasenāti ratanattayādīsu kaṅkhāsaṅkhātāya vicikicchāya vasena sanniṭṭhānaṃ appatto. Thāmagato anusayavasenāti dunnīharaṇaappahīnānusayavasena thirabhāvaṃ patto upagato hutvā tiṭṭhati.
“依色”:以渴爱与邪见为依止,趋近色而取为所缘。“识住立时住立”:在那所缘上,以色为所缘的识,于安住时即安住。“以色为所缘,以色为依处”:即以色为所缘、为攀缘,并以此为依处。“被喜浇灌”:识被带有喜悦的渴爱之水所浇灌。“增长”:达到增大的状态。“繁茂”:以速行心的方式,向上达到繁茂。“广大”:以彼所缘心的方式,达到广大。显示巴利原文
Rūpūpayanti taṇhādiṭṭhūpayavasena rūpaṃ upagantvā ārammaṇaṃ katvā. Viññāṇaṃ tiṭṭhamānaṃ tiṭṭhatīti tasmiṃ ārammaṇe rūpārammaṇaṃ viññāṇaṃ tiṭṭhantaṃ tiṭṭhati. Rūpārammaṇaṃrūpapatiṭṭhanti rūpameva ārammaṇaṃ ālambitvā rūpameva patiṭṭhaṃ katvā. Nandūpasecananti sappītikataṇhodakena āsittaṃ viññāṇaṃ. Vuddhinti vuddhibhāvaṃ. Virūḷhinti javanavasena uparito virūḷhibhāvaṃ. Vepullanti tadārammaṇavasena vepullaṃ.
“Atthi rāgo”等:这些都是贪的同义词。因染着,故称为“rāgo”(贪);因喜悦,故称为“nandī”(喜);因渴求,故称为“taṇhā”(渴爱)。“Patiṭṭhitaṃ tattha viññāṇaṃ virūḷhanti”:那里的识已安住、已繁茂,意思是:由于令业生起速行,具备牵引结生的能力,因此说识已安住且已繁茂。“Yattha”:指三界轮回中的处所。或者,在前面所有词句中,此“yattha”皆为处所义。“Atthi tattha saṅkhārānaṃ vuddhīti”:这是针对那位安住于果报轮回的人,针对未来成为轮回之因的诸行而说。“Yattha atthi āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbattīti”:在那里,未来会有后有的再生。于此应知:第一经是就粘着色等所缘而说;第二经是就喜悦同一所缘而说;第三经是就识安住的方式而说;第四经是就四种食、善与不善识安住而说。显示巴利原文
Atthirāgotiādīni lobhasseva nāmāni. So hi rañjanavasena rāgo, nandanavasena nandī, taṇhāyanavasena taṇhāti vuccati. Patiṭṭhitaṃ tattha viññāṇaṃ virūḷhanti kammaṃ javāpetvā paṭisandhiākaḍḍhanasamatthatāya patiṭṭhitañceva virūḷhañca. Yatthāti tebhūmakavaṭṭe bhummaṃ. Sabbattha vā purimapade etaṃ bhummaṃ. Atthi tattha saṅkhārānaṃ vuddhīti idaṃ imasmiṃ vipākavaṭṭe ṭhitassa āyatiṃ vaṭṭahetuke saṅkhāre sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yattha atthi āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbattīti yasmiṃ ṭhāne āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbatti atthi. Tattha purimasuttaṃ rūpādiārammaṇalagganavasena vuttaṃ, dutiyasuttaṃ tadevārammaṇaṃ abhinandanavasena vuttaṃ, tatiyaṃ viññāṇapatiṭṭhānavasena vuttaṃ, catutthaṃ catubbidhaāhāravasena, kusalākusalaviññāṇapatiṭṭhānavasena vuttanti ñātabbaṃ.
“Yebhuyyena”:即大多数、通常。“Muyhanti”:陷入愚痴。“Sammuyhanti”:更强烈地迷。“Sampamuyhanti”:以一切方式迷。或者,缘于色所缘而迷,缘于声所缘而更强烈迷,缘于触所缘而以一切方式迷。“Avijjāya andhīkatā”:被无明所盲,即对于八处无知的无明,令其成为盲目。或读作“Gatā”,意为已进入盲目的状态。“Pagāḷho”:已进入。“Ogāḷho”:向下进入。“Ajjhogāḷho”:更深入地、遍满地进入。“Nimuggo”:头朝下沉入。或又可以说:因眼触而进入(Ogāḷho),因耳触而深入(Ajjhogāḷho),因意触而沉没(Nimuggo)。又或者,远离善士交往者为进入,远离正法修习者为深入,远离法随法行者为沉没。显示巴利原文
Yebhuyyenāti pāyena. Muyhantīti mohaṃ āpajjanti. Sammuyhantīti visesena muyhanti. Sampamuyhantīti sabbākārena muyhanti. Atha vā rūpārammaṇaṃ paṭicca muyhanti, saddārammaṇaṃ paṭicca sammuyhanti, mutārammaṇaṃ paṭicca sampamuyhanti. Avijjāya andhīkatāti aṭṭhasu ṭhānesu aññāṇāya avijjāya andhīkatā. ‘‘Gatā’’ti vā pāṭho, andhabhāvaṃ upagatāti attho. Pagāḷhoti paviṭṭho. Ogāḷhoti heṭṭhābhāgaṃ paviṭṭho. Ajjhogāḷhoti adhiogāhitvā avattharitvā visesena paviṭṭho nimuggoti adhomukhaṃ hutvā paviṭṭho. Atha vā dassanasaṃsaggena ogāḷho. Savanasaṃsaggena ajjhogāḷho. Vacanasaṃsaggena nimuggo. Sappurisasaṃsaggavirahito vā ogāḷho. Saddhammasevanavirahito vā ajjhogāḷho. Dhammānudhammapaṭipattivirahito vā nimuggo.
“远离”(viveka):指远离的状态,或远离的区分。“三种”(tayo):这是数量的限定。“身远离”:即身体上的远离,离开、不共处。心远离等也是如此的方式。在这里,“比丘”:于此教法中,因观察轮回中的怖畏,故称比丘。“远离的”:即空旷,少声音、少喧闹的意思。正是就此,《分别论》中说:“‘远离的’:即使坐卧处相近,若未被在家众与出家众充满,因此是远离的。”(《分别论》526)在此处睡眠、安坐,故称为“坐卧具”,这是对床、椅等的代称。因此他说——显示巴利原文
Vivekāti vivitti, viviccanaṃ vā viveko. Tayoti gaṇanaparicchedo. Kāyavivekoti kāyena vivitti, vinā apasakkanaṃ. Cittavivekādīsupi eseva nayo. Idha bhikkhūti imasmiṃ sāsane. Saṃsāre bhayaṃ ikkhanato bhikkhu. Vivittanti suññaṃ, appasaddaṃ appanigghosanti attho. Etadeva hi sandhāya vibhaṅge ‘‘vivittanti santike cepi senāsanaṃ hoti, tañca anākiṇṇaṃ gahaṭṭhehi pabbajitehi, tena taṃ vivitta’’nti (vibha. 526) vuttaṃ. Seti ceva āsati ca etthāti senāsanaṃ, mañcapīṭhādīnametamadhivacanaṃ. Tenāha –
“坐卧具:床是坐卧具,椅是坐卧具……蒲团也是……枕头也是……精舍也是……半坡屋也是……殿堂也是……楼阁也是……茅舍也是……岩洞也是……山洞也是……树下也是……竹丛也是……凡是比丘们休息之处,这一切都是坐卧具。”(《分别论》527)显示巴利原文
‘‘Senāsananti mañcopi senāsanaṃ, pīṭhampi… bhisipi… bibbohanampi… vihāropi… aḍḍhayogopi… pāsādopi… aṭṭopi… māḷopi… leṇampi… guhāpi… rukkhamūlampi… veḷugumbopi… yattha vā pana bhikkhū paṭikkamanti, sabbametaṃ senāsana’’nti (vibha. 527).
再者,精舍、半坡屋、殿堂、楼阁、岩洞——这些称为精舍坐卧具。床、椅、蒲团、枕头——这些称为床椅坐卧具。地毯、皮片、草席、叶席——这些称为敷物坐卧具。凡是比丘们休息之处,则称为处所坐卧具。如此,坐卧具有这四种,这一切都包含在“坐卧具”一词中。显示巴利原文
Api ca vihāro aḍḍhayogo pāsādo hammiyaṃ guhāti idaṃ vihārasenāsanaṃ nāma. Mañco pīṭhaṃ bhisi bibbohananti idaṃ mañcapīṭhasenāsanaṃ nāma. Cimilikā cammakhaṇḍo tiṇasanthāro paṇṇasanthāroti idaṃ santhatasenāsanaṃ nāma. Yattha vā pana bhikkhū paṭikkamanti, idaṃ okāsasenāsanaṃ nāmāti evaṃ catubbidhaṃ senāsanaṃ hoti. Taṃ sabbampi senāsanaggahaṇena gahitameva.
然而,这里为了显示适合那位犹如飞鸟、心向四方的比丘的坐卧具,故说“阿兰若、树下”等。其中,“阿兰若”:依比丘尼戒而说:“出到界外门柱之外,凡此一切皆为阿兰若。”(《分别论》529)但“名为阿兰若的坐卧具,最远为五百弓之距离”(《律藏·巴拉基嘎》654),这才是适合此比丘的。其相状在《清净道论·头陀支解说》中有说。“树下”:任何有清凉荫蔽的、僻静的树下。“山”:即山岩。在那里,于池塘处用水等作务已毕,坐在清凉的树荫下,眺望四方,被凉风吹拂,心便得专一。“山涧”:其中“ka”意为水,即被水冲裂之处,亦即被水流冲裂的山地,也就是所谓的河岸或河湾。在那里,有如同银板般的沙地,头顶有如同宝石华盖般的丛林,有如同宝石柱般的水流淌。进入这样的山涧,饮水,使身体清凉,堆起沙,铺上粪扫衣,坐下修习沙门法,心便得专一。“岩窟”:指两山之间,或者在一座山之中如同隧道般的大洞穴。冢间的相状则在《清净道论》中有说。显示巴利原文
Idha panassa sakuṇasadisassa cātuddisassa bhikkhuno anucchavikasenāsanaṃ dassento ‘‘araññaṃ rukkhamūla’’ntiādimāha. Tattha araññanti ‘‘nikkhamitvā bahi indakhīlā sabbametaṃ arañña’’nti (vibha. 529) idaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ vasena āgataṃ. ‘‘Āraññakaṃ nāma senāsanaṃ pañcadhanusatikaṃ pacchima’’nti (pārā. 654) idaṃ pana imassa bhikkhuno anurūpaṃ. Tassa lakkhaṇaṃ visuddhimagge dhutaṅganiddese (visuddhi. 1.31) vuttaṃ. Rukkhamūlanti yaṃkiñci santacchāyaṃ vivittaṃ rukkhamūlaṃ. Pabbatanti selaṃ. Tattha hi udakasoṇḍīsu udakakiccaṃ katvā sītāya rukkhacchāyāya nisinnassa nānādisāsu khāyamānāsu sītena vātena bījiyamānassa cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti. Kandaranti kaṃ vuccati udakaṃ, tena dāritaṃ, udakena bhinnaṃ pabbatapadesaṃ. Yaṃ ‘‘nadītumba’’ntipi ‘‘nadīkuñja’’ntipi vadanti. Tattha hi rajatapaṭṭasadisā vālukā hoti, matthake maṇivitānaṃ viya vanagahanaṃ, maṇikhandhasadisaṃ udakaṃ sandati. Evarūpaṃ kandaraṃ oruyha pānīyaṃ pivitvā gattāni sītāni katvā vālukaṃ ussāpetvā paṃsukūlacīvaraṃ paññapetvā nisinnassa samaṇadhammaṃ karoto cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti. Giriguhanti dvinnaṃ pabbatānaṃ antaraṃ, ekasmiṃyeva vā umaṅgasadisaṃ mahāvivaraṃ. Susānalakkhaṇaṃ visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.34) vuttaṃ.
“林野”:指越过了村界、人们不用之处,那里既不耕种也不播种。因此说:“林野,这是对远方坐卧具的代称”等(《分别论》531)。“露天”:即无覆盖之处。然而,若有意愿,可在此处搭衣棚而住。“草堆”:即稻草堆。从大草堆中取出稻草,作成如同岩洞般的住所,或放置在灌木丛等之上,然后坐在下面修习沙门法。对于这一切,说为“身远离而住”等。他独自一人,决意经行,即使经行转起,如此而住。其中,“他行”:即从事威仪。“他转”:即发起威仪的转起。“他护”:即守护威仪。“他持”:即维持。“他住”:即令维持。显示巴利原文
Vanapatthanti gāmantaṃ atikkamitvā manussānaṃ anupacāraṭṭhānaṃ yattha na kasanti na vapanti. Tenevāha ‘‘vanapatthanti dūrānametaṃ senāsanānaṃ adhivacana’’ntiādi (vibha. 531). Abbhokāsanti acchannaṃ. Ākaṅkhamāno panettha cīvarakuṭiṃ katvā vasati. Palālapuñjanti palālarāsiṃ. Mahāpalālapuñjato hi palālaṃ nikkaḍḍhitvā pabbhāraleṇasadise ālaye karonti, gacchagumbādīnampi upari palālaṃ pakkhipitvā heṭṭhā nisinnā samaṇadhammaṃ karonti. Sabbametaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘kāyena vivitto viharatī’’tiādi. Eko caṅkamaṃ adhiṭṭhāti pavattayatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Iriyatīti iriyāpathaṃ vattayati. Vattatīti iriyāpathavuttiṃ uppādeti. Pāletīti iriyāpathaṃ rakkhati. Yapetīti yapayati. Yāpetīti yāpayati.
“证入初禅者”:即具足善禅那者。“心远离诸盖”:这是为了显示:在近行时心虽已远离诸盖,但唯有在安止中才称为极远离,故说“证入初禅者的心远离诸盖”。对于证入第二、第三、第四禅那者,依寻、伺、喜、乐、苦而远离,其理亦然。“从色想”:即依善、异熟、唯作而有的十五种色界禅那之想。“从有对想”:即由眼等根与色等境的接触而生起的善、不善异熟,亦即所谓“双五识”所摄的有对想。“从种种想”:即于种种所缘中转起的四十四种欲界想。心远离,成为空。显示巴利原文
Paṭhamaṃjhānaṃ samāpannassāti kusalajjhānasamaṅgissa. Nīvaraṇehi cittaṃ vivittanti upacārena nīvaraṇehi vivittampi samānaṃ antoappanāyaṃ suṭṭhu vivittaṃ nāma hotīti dassetuṃ ‘‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpannassa nīvaraṇehi cittaṃ vivittaṃ hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Eseva nayo vitakkavicārapītisukhadukkhehi dutiyatatiyacatutthajjhānāni samāpannānanti. Rūpasaññāyāti kusalavipākakiriyavasena pañcadasannaṃ rūpāvacarajjhānānaṃ saññāya. Paṭighasaññāyāti cakkhurūpādisaṅghaṭṭanena uppannāya kusalākusalavipākavasena dvipañcaviññāṇasaṅkhātāya paṭighasaññāya ca. Nānattasaññāyāti nānārammaṇe pavattāya catucattālīsakāmāvacarasaññāya ca cittaṃ vivittaṃ hoti suññaṃ hoti.
“证入空无边处者”:此处,无其边际故为无边;虚空无边际,故为虚空无边;虚空无边本身即是空无边。此空无边,以依处义作为其处所——对于此禅那及其相应法,犹如诸天的天处,故称为空无边处。这是破除遍相后、以虚空为所缘的禅那之名称。证入彼空无边处者,即证入善或唯作禅那者。“从色想”:以想为首,指色界禅那及其所缘。因为色界禅那亦被称为“色”,如“有色者见色”等(《无碍解道》1.209)所说;其所属缘亦被称为“外色,见好丑”等(《无碍解道》1.209)。因此,此处“对于色之想,即为色想”,如此以想为首,这是色界禅那的称谓。若说“于色有此想”,即是色想,意即以色为名。应知,这也是对以地遍等为差别的所属缘的称谓。由此,依善、异熟、唯作而有十五种色想,称为禅那的色想;依地遍等而有八种,称为所缘的色想。显示巴利原文
Ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ samāpannassāti ettha nāssa antoti anantaṃ, ākāsaṃ anantaṃ ākāsānantaṃ, ākāsānantameva ākāsānañcaṃ, taṃ ākāsānañcaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena āyatanamassa sasampayuttadhammassa jhānassa devānaṃ devāyatanamivāti ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ, kasiṇugghāṭimākāsārammaṇajhānassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Taṃ ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ samāpannassa kusalakiriyajhānaṃ samāpannassa. Rūpasaññāyāti saññāsīsena rūpāvacarajjhānato ceva tadārammaṇato ca. Rūpāvacarajjhānampi hi ‘‘rūpa’’nti vuccati ‘‘rūpī rūpāni passatī’’tiādīsu (paṭi. ma. 1.209), tassa ārammaṇampi ‘‘bahiddhā rūpāni passati suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇānī’’tiādīsupi (paṭi. ma. 1.209). Tasmā idha rūpe saññā rūpasaññāti evaṃ saññāsīsena rūpāvacarajjhānassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Rūpe saññā assāti rūpasaññaṃ, rūpamassa nāmanti vuttaṃ hoti. Evaṃ pathavīkasiṇādibhedassa tadārammaṇassa cetaṃ adhivacananti veditabbaṃ. Etāya kusalavipākakiriyāvasena pañcadasavidhāya jhānasaṅkhātāya rūpasaññāya. Etāya ca pathavīkasiṇādivasena aṭṭhavidhāya ārammaṇasaṅkhātāya rūpasaññāya.
“从有对想”:由眼等诸根与色等诸境的撞击而生起的想,名为有对想;这是对色想等的称呼。如其所说:“其中,什么是有对想?色想、声想、香想、味想、触想,这些称为有对想。”(《分别论》603)它们即是善异熟五种、不善异熟五种,因此称为有对想。显示巴利原文
Paṭighasaññāyāti cakkhādīnaṃ vatthūnaṃ rūpādīnaṃ ārammaṇānañca paṭighātena samuppannā saññā paṭighasaññā, rūpasaññādīnaṃ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘tattha katamā paṭighasaññā? Rūpasaññā saddasaññā gandhasaññā rasasaññā phoṭṭhabbasaññā, imā vuccanti paṭighasaññāyo’’ti (vibha. 603). Tā kusalavipākā pañca akusalavipākā pañcāti etāya paṭighasaññāya.
“种种想”:即于种种行境中转起之想,或指种种之想。如《分别论》中分别所说:“其中,何等为种种想?即未入定者,或具意界、具意识界者之想、了知、了知性,这些名为种种想。”(《分别论》604)此即此处所说的种种想。未入定者,其想属于意界、意识界所摄,于色、声等种种不同、种种自性之行境中转起。且此想包括八种欲界善想、十二种不善想、十一种欲界善异熟想、二种不善异熟想、十一种欲界唯作想,共四十四种想,皆为种种、种种自性、互不相似,故说为“种种想”,由此种种想。显示巴利原文
Nānattasaññāyāti nānatte gocare pavattāya saññāya, nānattāya vā saññāya. Yathāha – ‘‘tattha katamā nānattasaññā? Asamāpannassa manodhātusamaṅgissa vā manoviññāṇadhātusamaṅgissa vā saññā sañjānanā sañjānitattaṃ, imā vuccanti nānattasaññāyo’’ti (vibha. 604) evaṃ vibhaṅge vibhajitvā vuttā. Tā idha adhippetā. Asamāpannassa manodhātumanoviññāṇadhātusaṅgahitā saññā rūpasaddādibhede nānatte nānāsabhāve gocare pavattanti. Yasmā cesā aṭṭha kāmāvacarakusalasaññā, dvādasa akusalasaññā, ekādasa kāmāvacarakusalavipākasaññā, dve akusalavipākasaññā , ekādasa kāmāvacarakiriyasaññāti evaṃ catucattālīsampi saññā nānattā nānāsabhāvā aññamaññaṃ asadisā, tasmā ‘‘nānattasaññā’’ti vuttā, tāya nānattasaññāya.
“心远离”:证入空无边处者,其禅那心从所谓的色想、有对想、种种想中远离、分离、脱离。“识无边处”:即以此识为依处,故说为其处所,故称识无边处。这是以在虚空中转起的识为所缘的禅那之称谓。证入该禅那者,其心从上述的空无边处想中远离。显示巴利原文
Cittaṃ vivittaṃ hotīti ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ samāpannassa rūpasaññāpaṭighasaññānānattasaññāsaṅkhātāhi saññāhi jhānacittaṃ vivittaṃ hoti vinā hoti apasakkanaṃ hoti. Viññāṇañcāyatananti etadeva viññāṇaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena āyatanamassāti viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ, ākāse pavattaviññāṇārammaṇassa jhānassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Taṃ jhānaṃ samāpannassa vuttappakārāya ākāsānañcāyatanasaññāya cittaṃ vivittaṃ hoti.
“无所有处”:其中,说“无其所有”故为无所有,意即连最微细的破坏分也没有剩余。无所有的状态称为无所有性,这是空无边处识灭去的称谓。此无所有性以依处之义而为其处所,故为无所有处;这是以虚空中转起之识的灭去为所缘的禅那之称谓。证入无所有处者,其心从识无边处想中远离。显示巴利原文
Ākiñcaññāyatananti ettha pana nāssa kiñcananti akiñcanaṃ, antamaso bhaṅgamattampi assa avasiṭṭhaṃ natthīti vuttaṃ hoti. Akiñcanassa bhāvo ākiñcaññaṃ, ākāsānañcāyatanaviññāṇāpagamassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Taṃ ākiñcaññaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena āyatanamassāti ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ, ākāse pavattitaviññāṇāpagamārammaṇajhānassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Taṃ ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ samāpannassa tāya viññāṇañcāyatanasaññāya cittaṃ vivittaṃ.
“非想非非想处”:于此,首先为了说明:由于具有某种想,该处被称为“非想非非想处”,而那种想是依修行者而有的。因此,《分别论》中举出“非想非非想者”后,即解释说:“他作意无所有处为寂静,修习残余行所摄之定,因此称为非想非非想者。”其中,“作意为寂静”是指:他如此作意——“此定确实是寂静的,因为它以无所有为所缘而安住”,由于所缘寂静而将其作意为“寂静”。当安止于非想非非想处而坐时,其禅那心便从无所有处想中成为空。显示巴利原文
Nevasaññānāsaññāyatananti ettha pana yāya saññāya bhāvato taṃ ‘‘nevasaññānāsaññāyatana’’nti vuccati, yathāpaṭipannassa sā saññā hoti, taṃ tāva dassetuṃ vibhaṅge (vibha. 620) ‘‘nevasaññīnāsaññī’’ti uddharitvā taññeva ‘‘ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ santato manasi karoti, saṅkhārāvasesasamāpattiṃ bhāveti, tena vuccati nevasaññīnāsaññī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha santato manasi karotīti ‘‘santovatāyaṃ samāpatti, yatra hi nāma natthibhāvampi ārammaṇaṃ karitvā vasatī’’ti evaṃ santārammaṇatāya naṃ ‘‘santā’’ti manasi karoti. Taṃ nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ appetvā nisinnassa tāya ākiñcaññāyatanasaññāya jhānacittaṃ suññaṃ hoti.
“入流者”:即证得入流果者。“有身见”:即基于二十种事的有身见。“疑”:即于八处生起的疑惑。“戒禁取”:即执取“依戒清净,依誓愿清净”而生起的邪见。“见随眠”:未断除故,在相续中随眠的见随眠;以及疑随眠。“与彼一聚者”:指与有身见等共住一处者。这些烦恼为“烧灼、逼恼”,故名为“烦恼”;心因有身见等烦恼而远离、空无。此处“一聚”有两种:断一聚和俱生一聚。能导向恶趣的烦恼,只要未被入流道断除,便与见和疑共住于同一人之中,这称为断一聚。于十种烦恼中,此处仅提及见与疑;于随眠中,提及见随眠和疑随眠。其余能导向恶趣的贪、嗔、痴、慢、昏沉、掉举、无惭、无愧这八种烦恼,与见和疑一起构成断一聚,连同两种随眠,由入流道断除。或者,在以贪嗔痴等为首的一千五百种烦恼中,入流道断除见时,疑即与见一同断除;与见随眠、疑随眠一起,所有能导向恶趣的烦恼,皆以断一聚的方式断除。俱生一聚,则是指其余那些与见和疑在同一心中生起的烦恼。显示巴利原文
Sotāpannassāti sotāpattiphalaṃ pattassa. Sakkāyadiṭṭhiyāti vīsativatthukāya sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā. Vicikicchāyāti aṭṭhasu ṭhānesu kaṅkhāya. Sīlabbataparāmāsāti ‘‘sīlena suddhi, vatena suddhī’’ti parāmasitvā uppajjanakadiṭṭhi. Diṭṭhānusayāti appahīnaṭṭhena santāne anusayakā diṭṭhānusayā. Tathā vicikicchānusayā. Tadekaṭṭhehi cāti tehi sakkāyadiṭṭhiādīhi ekato ṭhitehi ca. Upatāpenti vibādhenti cāti kilesā, tehi sakkāyadiṭṭhiyādikilesehi cittaṃ vivittaṃ suññaṃ hoti. Ettha ‘‘tadekaṭṭha’’nti duvidhaṃ ekaṭṭhaṃ pahānekaṭṭhaṃ sahajekaṭṭhañca. Apāyagamanīyā hi kilesā yāva sotāpattimaggena na pahīyanti, tāva diṭṭhivicikicchāhi saha ekasmiṃ puggale ṭhitāti pahānekaṭṭhā. Dasasu hi kilesesu idha diṭṭhivicikicchā eva āgatā. Anusayesu diṭṭhānusayavicikicchānusayā āgatā. Sesā pana apāyagamanīyo lobho doso moho māno thinaṃ uddhaccaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappanti aṭṭha kilesā diṭṭhivicikicchāhi saha pahānekaṭṭhā hutvā dvīhi anusayehi saddhiṃ sotāpattimaggena pahīyanti. Rāgadosamohapamukhesu vā diyaḍḍhesu kilesasahassesu sotāpattimaggena diṭṭhiyā pahīyamānāya diṭṭhiyā saha vicikicchā pahīnā, diṭṭhānusayavicikicchānusayehi saha apāyagamanīyā sabbakilesā pahānekaṭṭhavasena pahīyanti. Sahajekaṭṭhā pana diṭṭhiyā saha vicikicchāya ca saha ekekasmiṃ citte ṭhitā avasesakilesā.
入流道断除五种心:四种与见相应心,以及一种与疑相应心。其中,断除两种与见相应、无行心时,与其俱生的贪、痴、掉举、无惭、无愧诸烦恼,即以俱生一聚的方式断除;断除两种与见相应、有行心时,与其俱生的贪、痴、昏沉、掉举、无惭、无愧诸烦恼,即以俱生一聚的方式断除;断除与疑相应心时,与其俱生的痴、掉举、无惭、无愧诸烦恼,即以俱生一聚的方式断除。心由此两种一聚烦恼而远离,即:道心远离、果心远离——不系属、脱离开来、成为空无。显示巴利原文
Sotāpattimaggena hi cattāri diṭṭhisahagatāni vicikicchāsahagatañcāti pañca cittāni pahīyanti. Tattha dvīsu diṭṭhisampayuttaasaṅkhārikacittesu pahīyamānesu tehi sahajāto lobho moho uddhaccaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappanti ime kilesā sahajekaṭṭhavasena pahīyanti, dvīsu diṭṭhisampayuttasasaṅkhārikacittesu pahīyamānesu tehi sahajāto lobho moho thinaṃ uddhaccaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappanti ime kilesā sahajekaṭṭhavasena pahīyanti, vicikicchāsahagatacitte pahīyamāne tena sahajāto moho uddhaccaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappanti ime kilesā sahajekaṭṭhavasena pahīyanti. Tehi duvidhekaṭṭhehi kilesehi cittaṃ vivittaṃ hotīti maggacittaṃ viviccati, phalacittaṃ vivittaṃ viyuttaṃ apasakkitaṃ suññaṃ hotīti attho.
一来者的粗欲贪结:指已变得粗重、因成为身门违犯之缘而粗大的结,即所谓淫欲贪结。因其系缚于欲有,故称为“结”。嗔恚结:即嗔恨结。因它于所缘上对抗违逆,故称为“嗔恚”。这些结以其强力而潜藏于相续中,故为随眠。细俱行:指已变得微细的欲贪结与嗔恚结,以及因未断除而潜藏于相续中的微细欲贪随眠与嗔恚随眠。与彼一聚者:即心因上述两类烦恼聚而远离、空无。显示巴利原文
Sakadāgāmissa oḷārikā kāmarāgasaññojanāti oḷārikabhūtā kāyadvāre vītikkamassa paccayabhāvena thūlabhūtā methunarāgasaṅkhātā saññojanā. So hi kāmabhave saññojetīti ‘‘saññojana’’nti vuccati. Paṭighasaññojanāti byāpādasaññojanā. So hi ārammaṇe paṭihaññatīti ‘‘paṭigha’’nti vuccati. Te eva thāmagataṭṭhena santāne anusentīti anusayā. Aṇusahagatāti sukhumabhūtā kāmarāgasaññojanā paṭighasaññojanā aṇusahagatā kāmarāgānusayā paṭighānusayāti appahīnaṭṭhena santāne anusayanavasena sukhumabhūtā kāmarāgapaṭighānusayā. Tadekaṭṭhehi cāti vuttatthehi duvidhekaṭṭhehi kilesehi cittaṃ vivittaṃ suññaṃ hoti.
阿拉汉:因已杀灭烦恼之敌,故得“阿拉汉”之名。色贪:即于色有的欲贪。无色贪:即于无色有的欲贪。慢:唯阿拉汉道所断的慢。同样,掉举、无明、慢随眠等,皆为阿拉汉道所断。其中,慢以高举为相,掉举以不寂静为相,无明以盲目为相。依色贪、无色贪而转起的,为有贪随眠。与彼一聚者:即与他们共住一处之烦恼。于外一切相:即依内心相续中之不善蕴而假立为“外”者,舍离内在而向外转起之一切行相。道心从这一切相中远离、无有、脱离;果心远离、不系属、脱离。显示巴利原文
Arahatoti kilesārīnaṃ hatattā ‘‘arahā’’ti laddhanāmassa. Rūparāgāti rūpabhave chandarāgā . Arūparāgāti arūpabhave chandarāgā. Mānāti arahattamaggavajjhā mānā eva. Tathā uddhaccaavijjāmānānusayādayo arahattamaggavajjhā. Etesu uṇṇatilakkhaṇo māno. Avūpasamalakkhaṇaṃ uddhaccaṃ. Andhabhāvalakkhaṇā avijjā. Rūparāgaarūparāgavasena pavattā bhavarāgānusayā. Tadekaṭṭhehi cāti tehi ekato ṭhitehi ca kilesehi. Bahiddhā ca sabbanimittehīti ajjhattacittasantāne akusalakkhandhe upādāya ‘‘bahiddhā’’ti saṅkhaṃ gatehi ajjhattaṃ muñcitvā bahiddhā pavattehi sabbasaṅkhāranimittehi maggacittaṃ viviccati vinā hoti apasakkati, phalacittaṃ vivittaṃ viyuttaṃ apasakkitaṃ hoti.
其中,随眠之无有应知有二种:依烦恼次第与依道次第。依烦恼次第:欲贪随眠与嗔恚随眠由第三道而无有,慢随眠由第四道,见随眠与疑随眠由第一道,有贪随眠与无明随眠唯由第四道。依道次第:见随眠与疑随眠由第一道而无有,欲贪随眠与嗔恚随眠由第二道而减弱,由第三道而完全无有,慢随眠、有贪随眠与无明随眠由第四道而无有。心远离:即广大心与出世间心于烦恼中空无、虚无之义。显示巴利原文
Tattha kilesapaṭipāṭiyā maggapaṭipāṭiyā cāti dvidhā anusayānaṃ abhāvo veditabbo. Kilesapaṭipāṭiyā hi kāmarāgānusayapaṭighānusayānaṃ tatiyamaggena abhāvo hoti, mānānusayassa catutthamaggena, diṭṭhānusayavicikicchānusayānaṃ paṭhamamaggena, bhavarāgānusayāvijjānusayānaṃ catutthamaggeneva. Maggapaṭipāṭiyā pana paṭhamamaggena diṭṭhānusayavicikicchānusayānaṃ abhāvo hoti, dutiyamaggena kāmarāgānusayapaṭighānusayānaṃ tanubhāvo, tatiyamaggena sabbaso abhāvo, catutthamaggena mānānusayabhavarāgānusayāvijjānusayānaṃ abhāvo hoti. Cittavivekoti mahaggatalokuttaracittānaṃ kilesehi suññabhāvo, tucchabhāvoti attho.
「依远离」:指名为烦恼、蕴、行的诸依的空寂状态。为说明「依」,先道出:「依者,即烦恼等」。贪等生起后,于彼人折磨、逼恼,故为烦恼;色等五蕴是执取的所缘;由执取所生的福行、非福行、不动行,亦为依。「不死」:无彼称为「死」的坏灭,故为不死;因是烦恼毒的对治,如药一般,故亦名不死。渴爱于轮回的胎、趣、再生、识住、有情居中缝合、编织,故称为「爱」(vāna);其中无彼爱,故为涅槃(nibbāna)。「住于远离身者」:指身已远离群体与喧闹杂处的人。「乐出离者」:指于出离——即从欲等出离的初禅等——生起欢喜、心倾向彼的人。「达最上清净者」:指已证得最殊胜清净、安住其果位的人。或有人释:「因无随烦恼而心清净,因从烦恼解脱而达最上清净。以镇伏断而心清净,以正断而达最上清净。」「无依者」:指已离诸依的人。「趣入非行者」:指弃舍诸行为所缘,以离行的涅槃为所缘而趣入的人。此中,「非行」亦即涅槃。显示巴利原文
Upadhivivekoti kilesakkhandhaabhisaṅkhārasaṅkhātānaṃ upadhīnaṃ suññabhāvo. Upadhiṃ tāva dassetuṃ ‘‘upadhi vuccanti kilesā cā’’tiādimāha. Rāgādayo yassa uppajjanti, taṃ upatāpenti vibādhentīti kilesā ca. Upādānagocarā rūpādayo pañcakkhandhā ca. Upādānasambhūtā puññāpuññaāneñjābhisaṅkhārā ca. Amatanti natthi etassa maraṇasaṅkhātaṃ matanti amataṃ, kilesavisapaṭipakkhattā agadantipi amataṃ. Saṃsārayonigatiupapattiviññāṇaṭṭhitisattāvāsesu saṃsibbati vinatīti taṇhā ‘‘vāna’’nti vuccati, taṃ tattha natthīti nibbānaṃ. Vivekaṭṭhakāyānanti gaṇasaṅgaṇikāya apagatasarīrānaṃ. Nekkhammābhiratānanti nekkhamme kāmādito nikkhante paṭhamajjhānādike abhiratānaṃ tanninnānaṃ. Paramavodānappattānanti uttamaparisuddhabhāvaphalaṃ pāpuṇitvā ṭhitānaṃ. ‘‘Upakkilesābhāvena parisuddhacittānaṃ, kilesehi muttabhāvena paramavodānappattānaṃ. Vikkhambhanappahānena parisuddhacittānaṃ, samucchedappahānena paramavodānappattāna’’nti evameke vaṇṇayanti. Nirūpadhīnanti vigatūpadhīnaṃ. Visaṅkhāragatānanti saṅkhārārammaṇaṃ cajitvā vigatasaṅkhāraṃ nibbānaṃ ārammaṇavasena upagatānaṃ. Visaṅkhāragataṃ cittanti etthapi hi nibbānameva ‘‘visaṅkhāra’’nti vuttaṃ.
「远离」:指种种意义上的遥远。「极远离」:极为遥远。「不近」:不在附近。「不在近侧」:不在同侧。「非极近」:并非绝对邻近。「远离之义」:即极远、已离去的意思。「那样者」:与其相似者。「那样住者」:以彼方式安住者。「那样类者」:属彼类型者。「那样份者」:属彼部分者。或有人释:「因执著于有身之窟,故为那样者;因被烦恼所覆,故为那样住者;因沉溺愚痴,故为那样类者;因依三种远离而处于远,故为那样份者。」显示巴利原文
Vidūreti vividhe dūre. Suvidūreti suṭṭhu vidūre. Na santiketi na samīpe. Na sāmantāti na ekapasse. Anāsanneti anaccantasamīpe. Vivekaṭṭheti atidūre, vigateti attho. Tādisoti taṃsadiso. Tassaṇṭhitoti tena ākārena ṭhito. Tappakāroti tena pakārena ṭhito. Tappaṭibhāgoti taṃkoṭṭhāsiko. Atha vā ‘‘attabhāvaguhāya laggabhāvena tādiso. Kilesehi channabhāvena tassaṇṭhito. Mohanasmiṃ pagāḷhabhāvena tappakāro. Tīhi vivekehi dūrabhāvena tappaṭibhāgoti evameke vaṇṇayanti.
「难断」:不易断除。「难舍」:不易弃舍。「难遍舍」:不能以一切方式舍弃。「难摧伏」:难以制伏、折服。「难解开」:难以解开、脱离。「难度」:不能超越。「极难度」:不能特别度脱。「难跨越」:难以越过。「难回转」:难以使其退转。或有人释:「其性难遍舍;如公牛肋皮,难摧伏;如龙索,难解开;如热季旷野沙漠,难度、极难度;如虎群所围森林,难跨越;如海中波浪,难回转。」显示巴利原文
Duppahāyāti sukhena pahātabbā na honti. Duccajjāti sukhena jahituṃ na sakkā. Duppariccajjāti sabbākārena jahituṃ na sakkā. Dunnimmadayāti nimmadaṃ amadaṃ kātuṃ na sakkā. Dubbiniveṭhayāti viniveṭhanaṃ mocanaṃ kātuṃ na sakkā. Duttarāti uttaritvā atikkantuṃ na sakkā. Duppatarāti visesetvā tarituṃ na sakkā. Dussamatikkamāti dukkhena atikkamitabbā. Dubbinivattāti nivattetuṃ dukkhā. Atha vā ‘‘pakativasena duppariccajjā. Goṇapatāsaṃ viya dunnimmadayā. Nāgapāsaṃ viya dubbiniveṭhayā. Gimhasamaye marukantāraṃ viya duttarā duppatarā. Byagghapariggahitā aṭavī viya dussamatikkamā. Samuddavīci viya dubbinivattāti evameke vaṇṇayanti.
8 如此,在证明了第一偈“因为那样的人,确实是远离的”之后,为进一步揭示这类有情的法性,而宣说了“以欲为因……”等偈。其中,“以欲为因”:即以渴爱为因。“被有乐所缚”:即被乐受等中的有乐所束缚。“他们难解脱”:指那些成为有乐所依的事物难解脱;或者,被束缚于彼处的、以欲为因的有情难解脱。“并非由他者得脱”:即他人亦不能令其解脱。这也是表明原因的说法。那些有情何以难解脱?因为他们不是可由他人令解脱的。若有情能解脱,应以自力解脱,此是其义。“后前亦期望”:即期望未来或过去的诸欲。“他们希求这些欲或他们欲”:即以强烈的渴爱,希求现在的这些欲,或过去、未来两种欲。应知此两句与“他们难解脱,并非由他者得脱”的关联。否则,期望与希求的他们做了什么,或成了什么,便不得明了。显示巴利原文
8. Evaṃ paṭhamagāthāya ‘‘dūre vivekā hi tathāvidho’’ti sādhetvā puna tathāvidhānaṃ sattānaṃ dhammataṃ āvi karonto ‘‘icchānidānā’’tiādigāthamāha. Tattha icchānidānāti taṇhāhetukā. Bhavasātabaddhāti sukhavedanādimhi bhavasātena baddhā. Te duppamuñcāti te bhavasātavatthubhūtā dhammā. Te vā tattha baddhā icchānidānā sattā duppamocayā. Na hi aññamokkhāti aññe ca mocetuṃ na sakkonti. Kāraṇavacanaṃ vā etaṃ. Te sattā duppamuñcā. Kasmā? Yasmā aññena mocetabbā na honti. Yadi sattā muñceyyuṃ, sakena thāmena muñceyyunti ayamassa attho. Pacchā pure vāpi apekkhamānāti anāgate atīte vā kāme apekkhamānā. Ime va kāme purime va jappanti ime vā paccuppanne kāme purime vā duvidhepi atītānāgate balavataṇhāya patthayamānā. Imesañca dvinnaṃ padānaṃ ‘‘te duppamuñcā na hi aññamokkhā’’ti imināva saha sambandho veditabbo. Itarathā apekkhamānā jappaṃ kiṃ karonti, kiṃ vā katāti na paññāyeyyuṃ.
“被有乐所缚”:于有中,乐为有乐;被彼有乐,即被乐味所缚而住。为进一步说明,故说“一种有乐——乐受”等。年轻的状态为青春。无病的状态为健康。命根的流转状态为生命。“利得”:即四种资具的获得。“名声”:即随从。“称赞”:即名誉。“乐”:即身心的乐。“可意色”:即令心愉悦增长的色。其余诸项,亦同此理。显示巴利原文
Bhavasātabaddhāti bhave sātaṃ bhavasātaṃ, tena bhavasātena sukhassādena baddhā hutvā ṭhitā. Taṃ bhājetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘ekaṃ bhavasātaṃ – sukhā vedanā’’tiādimāha. Yobbanabhāvo yobbaññaṃ. Arogabhāvo ārogyaṃ. Jīvitindriyassa pavattabhāvo jīvitaṃ. Lābhoti catunnaṃ paccayānaṃ lābho. Yasoti parivāro. Pasaṃsāti kitti. Sukhanti kāyikacetasikaṃ sukhaṃ. Manāpikā rūpāti manavaḍḍhanakā rūpā. Sesesupi eseva nayo.
“眼具足”:即眼的圆满。当对于“我的眼是圆满的,如同摩尼宫殿中打开的狮子窗格般显现”这样的乐味生起时,故说“眼具足”。耳具足等,亦同此理。“以乐受而乐缚……乃至……种种缚”:即以乐受而乐著于乐,乃至以种种方式被系缚。“遍缚”:即特别地、从最初便被系缚。“染著”:即紧密地投入所缘。“黏著”:即如糖块黏着在象牙柱上一般。此处未说者,应依“众生、著……”等处所说之理来理解。显示巴利原文
Cakkhusampadāti cakkhussa sampadā. ‘‘Mayhaṃ cakkhu sampannaṃ maṇivimāne ugghāṭitasīhapañjaraṃ viya khāyatī’’ti uppannaṃ sukhassādaṃ sandhāya ‘‘cakkhusampadā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sotasampadādīsupi eseva nayo. Sukhāya vedanāya sātabaddhā…pe… vibaddhāti vividhākārena baddhā. Ābaddhāti visesena ādito baddhā. Laggāti ārammaṇena saddhiṃ appitā. Laggitāti nāgadante phāṇitavārako viya laggitā. Yamettha ca avuttaṃ, taṃ satto visattotiādimhi vuttanayena gahetabbaṃ.
“并非由他得脱”:即不是依靠他人而得解脱。又或者,“那些有乐事难解脱”:那些成为有中乐味所依处的法,是难以从中解脱的。又或者,“众生由此难脱离”:众生正是从此有乐事中,难以被解脱。显示巴利原文
Na hi aññamokkhāti na parehi mokkhā. Te vā bhavasātavatthū duppamuñcāti bhave sukhassādavatthubhūtā dhammā te muñcituṃ dukkhā. Sattā vā etto dummocayāti sattā eva vā etasmā bhavasātavatthuto mocetuṃ dukkhā.
“难拔出”:要拔出是困难的。“极难拔出”:犹如堕入四周断崖的地狱坑中,想要将他向上拉出,极为困难。“难令起”:要使他站立起来,是困难的。“极难令起”:犹如要将极微细的有身安立在大地上,想将他扶起,极度困难。显示巴利原文
Duruddharāti uddharituṃ dukkhā. Dussamuddharāti samantato chinnataṭe narakāvāṭe patito viya uddhaṃ katvā uddharituṃ dukkhā. Dubbuṭṭhāpayāti uṭṭhāpetuṃ dukkhā. Dussamuṭṭhāpayāti sukhumaattabhāvaṃ pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhāpanaṃ viya ussāpetuṃ ativiya dukkhā.
“他们自身陷入泥沼”:犹如陷入深泥,乃至没过头顶,无法自主。“欲拔出其他陷入泥沼者”:对于另一同样陷没的人,想要抓住他的手或头,将其拉出并安立于干地,此事无法办到。“显然,准达啊”:这里的“so”(他)是指所描述的那类人。引出“谁”这一词后,意思是:准达啊,那个自身陷入泥沼的人,他可能拔出其他陷入泥沼者吗?其余文句的关联也应如此理解。“陷入泥沼”:即陷入深泥之中。准达,正如有人没顶陷入深泥,对于另一同样陷没的人,想要抓住其手或头而将其拉出,这情形不可能存在;因为没有那样的因缘,能让他将那人拉出后安立于干地。关于“未调伏者”“未律仪者”“未寂灭者”:这里,“未调伏者”是指因不修习调伏而未调伏;“未律仪者”是指因未修学律仪而尚无律仪;“未寂灭者”是指因烦恼未灭而尚未寂灭。像这样一个人,想要调伏他人、使他人修习调伏,想要律仪他人、使他人修学三学,想要寂灭他人、熄灭他人的烦恼——这是不可能存在的。显示巴利原文
Te attanā palipapalipannāti gambhīrakaddame yāva sīsato nimuggā na sakkonti. Paraṃ palipapalipannaṃ uddharitunti aparaṃ tatheva nimuggaṃ hatthe vā sīse vā gahetvā uddharitvā thale patiṭṭhāpetuṃ na sakkonti. So vata cundāti soti vattabbākārapuggalaniddeso. Tassa ‘‘yo’’ti imaṃ uddesavacanaṃ āharitvā yo attanā palipapalipanno, so vata , cunda, paraṃ palipapalipannaṃ uddharissatīti. Evaṃ sesapadesu sambandho veditabbo. Palipapalipannoti gambhīrakaddame nimuggo vuccati. Yathā, cunda, koci puriso yāva sīsato gambhīrakaddame nimuggo, parampi tatheva nimuggaṃ hatthe vā sīse vā gahetvā uddharissatīti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati. Na hi taṃ kāraṇamatthi, yena so taṃ uddharitvā thale patiṭṭhāpeyyāti. Adanto avinīto aparinibbutoti ettha pana anibbisevanatāya adanto. Asikkhitavinayatāya avinīto. Anibbutakilesatāya aparinibbutoti veditabbo. So tādiso paraṃ damessati nibbisevanaṃ karissati, vinessati tisso sikkhā sikkhāpessati. Parinibbāpessati tassa kilese nibbāpessati.
“无有其他任何人”:没有任何其他的补特伽罗有能力令其解脱。“以自力”:凭借自己的智慧之力。“以力”:凭借智慧力量。“以精进”:凭借与智慧相应的心所精进。“以男子力”:凭借步步迈向更高境地的大精进。显示巴利原文
Natthaññokocīti añño koci puggalo mocetuṃ samattho natthi. Sakena thāmenāti attano ñāṇathāmena. Balenāti ñāṇabalena. Vīriyenāti ñāṇasampayuttacetasikavīriyena. Purisaparakkamenāti paraṃ paraṃ ṭhānaṃ akkamanena mahantavīriyena.
“我将不能”:意为不能、做不到,或说将不努力去做。“为解脱”:为令其解脱。“疑”:存有疑惑的状态。“陶他咖啊”:呼唤语。“度越”:你应当度越。显示巴利原文
Nāhaṃ sahissāmīti ahaṃ na sahissāmi na sakkomi, na vāyamissāmīti vuttaṃ hoti. Pamocanāyāti pamocetuṃ. Kathaṃkathinti sakaṅkhaṃ. Dhotakāti ālapanaṃ. Taresīti tareyyāsi.
自己作的恶,由自己染污;
未由自己造作的恶业,便由自己而得清净。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Attanā hi kataṃ pāpaṃ, attanā saṃkilissati; Attanā akataṃ pāpaṃ, attanāva visujjhati; Suddhī asuddhi paccattaṃ, nāñño aññaṃ visodhaye’’ti. (dha. pa. 165; kathā. 743) –
此处意思是:若人自己造作了不善业,当他在四恶趣中承受痛苦时,便是自己染污了自己。反之,若人自己未曾作恶,无论他前往善趣还是恶趣,都由自己而得清净。善业名为‘清净’,不善业名为‘不清净’;这一切各各皆属自身所有,唯在造业的补特伽罗自身中成熟果报。一个补特伽罗不能使另一个补特伽罗清净——既不能令他清净,亦不能令他染污。这便是所说之义。显示巴利原文
Etthāyamattho – yena attanā akusalaṃ kammaṃ kataṃ hoti, so catūsu apāyesu dukkhaṃ anubhavanto attanāva saṃkilissati. Yena pana attanā akataṃ pāpaṃ, so sugatiñceva agatiñca gacchanto attanāva visujjhati. Kusalakammasaṅkhātā suddhi akusalakammasaṅkhātā ca asuddhi paccattaṃ kārakasattānaṃ attaniyeva vipaccati. Añño puggalo aññaṃ puggalaṃ na visodhaye neva visodheti, na kilesetīti vuttaṃ hoti.
「涅槃确实存在」:不死的大涅槃确实存在。「导向涅槃之道」:从前分的观开始,直到圣道。如来正是劝导者:我执持、安立而住。「如是受我训导、如是受我教诫者」:即被我如此训导、如此教诫的人。针对已发生的事而说,称为训导;针对尚未发生的事,例如说“你将来也会有一副铁骨”等来指示未来,则称为教诫。当面说也属训导,背后通过信使传达的也属教诫。说一次也是训导,反复说也是教诫。或者,训导本身即含摄教诫。「某些人」:指一部分人,即有些人。「成就究竟涅槃」:已超越名为尽灭的边际,故称“究竟”;此究竟又是诸行不再生起之处,故称“终尽”,因此是“究竟终尽”,意为绝对、永恒的尽头。他们成就、圆满此究竟涅槃。「不成就」:即不圆满、不获得。「于此我何为」:在这些情况下,“我做什么”,即我该做什么。「示道者」:就是指示修行之道的人,他开示、讲解。「若自行道,应得解脱」:如果我们自己依道修行,便能获得解脱。显示巴利原文
Tiṭṭhateva nibbānanti amatamahānibbānaṃ tiṭṭhatiyeva. Nibbānagāmimaggoti pubbabhāgavipassanāto paṭṭhāya ariyamaggo. Tiṭṭhāmahaṃ samādapetāti ahaṃ gaṇhāpetā patiṭṭhāpetā tiṭṭhāmi. Evaṃovadiyamānā evaṃ anusāsiyamānāti mayā evaṃ ovadiyamānā evaṃ anusāsiyamānā. Ettha uppanne vatthusmiṃ vadanto ovadati nāma, anuppanne vatthusmiṃ anusāsanto ‘‘ayasopi te bhavissatī’’tiādivasena anāgataṃ dassento anusāsati nāma. Sammukhā vadantopi ovadati nāma, parammukhā dūtasāsanaṃ vā pesento anusāsati nāma. Sakiṃ vadantopi ovadati nāma, punappunaṃ vadanto anusāsati nāma. Ovadanto eva vā anusāsati nāma. Appekacceti api ekacce, eketi attho. Accantaniṭṭhaṃ nibbānaṃ ārādhentīti khayavayasaṅkhātaṃ antaṃ atītanti accantaṃ, accantañca taṃ sabbasaṅkhārānaṃ appavattiṭṭhānattā niṭṭhañcāti accantaniṭṭhaṃ, ekantaniṭṭhaṃ, satataniṭṭhanti attho. Taṃ accantanibbānaṃ ārādhenti sampādenti. Nārādhentīti na sampādenti, na paṭilabhantīti attho. Ettha kyāhanti etesu kiṃ ahaṃ, kiṃ karomīti attho. Maggakkhāyīti paṭipadāmaggakkhāyī . Ācikkhati katheti. Attanā paṭipajjamānā muñceyyunti paṭipajjantā mayaṃ muñceyyuṃ.
「依过去(之色)」:即缘于过去。「如何生起回顾」:以何种方式产生观看、观察。「曾是这样形色」:以长短、粗细等特性,说明过去曾为如此种类、如此形色。「于彼处随入欢喜」:对于那个色所缘,正确地引入、导向渴爱。关于受等,也是如此。显示巴利原文
Atītaṃ upādāyāti atītaṃ paṭicca. Kathaṃ pure apekkhaṃ karotīti kena pakārena ikkhaṃ olokanaṃ karoti. Evaṃrūpo ahosinti dīgharassaaṇukathūlādivasena evaṃjātiko evarūpo abhaviṃ. Tattha nandiṃ samannānetīti tasmiṃ rūpārammaṇe taṇhaṃ sammā ānayati upaneti. Vedanādīsupi eseva nayo.
「这是我的眼」等,是依事物与所缘,显示渴爱的生起,故如此说。「如此是色」:意为“这样是色”。其中,「被欲贪所系缚」:在那些眼与色之中,有名为微弱的欲和名为强力的贪,被此欲贪所系缚、所黏著。「识」:指速行心。由于识被欲贪所系缚,所以说「识被欲贪所系缚故」:即那个速行识被欲贪系缚的状态。「彼于彼欢喜」:通过渴爱的力量,对此所缘产生欢喜。显示巴利原文
‘‘Iti me cakkhū’’tiādayo vatthuārammaṇavasena taṇhuppattiṃ dassento āha. Iti rūpātīti evaṃ rūpā iti. Tattha chandarāgapaṭibaddhanti tesu cakkhurūpesu dubbalasaṅkhāto chando ca balavasaṅkhāto rāgo ca, tena chandarāgena paṭibaddhaṃ allīnaṃ. Viññāṇanti javanacittaṃ. Chandarāgapaṭibaddhattā viññāṇassāti tassa javanaviññāṇassa chandarāgena baddhabhāvā. Tadabhinandatīti taṃ ārammaṇaṃ taṇhāvasena abhinandati.
「凡是他的那些」:即凡是属于他的。「过去」:指往昔。「共」:一起。「欢笑、言谈、嬉戏」:包括露齿而笑等欢笑,开口说话等言谈,以及身体嬉戏等游玩。「他味著彼」:他品味、感受、领受那种乐味。「他希求彼」:他渴望、期求那种乐味。「生起喜悦」:得到满足。显示巴利原文
Yānissatānīti yāni assa tāni. Pubbeti atīte. Saddhinti ekato. Hasitalapitakīḷitānīti dantavidaṃsādihasitāni ca, vacībhedaṃ katvā lapitāni ca, kāyakhiḍḍādikīḷitāni ca. Tadassādetīti taṃ assādayati assādaṃ vindati sādiyati. Taṃ nikāmetīti taṃ nikāmayati paccāsīsati. Vittiṃ āpajjatīti tuṭṭhiṃ pāpuṇāti.
「愿我成为」:即希愿我存在。「为了获得未曾得者」:为了证得尚未证得者。「心倾注」:将心安立。「以心的倾注为缘」:由心安立的因缘。显示巴利原文
Siyanti bhaveyyaṃ. Appaṭiladdhassa paṭilābhāyāti appattassa pāpuṇanatthāya. Cittaṃ paṇidahatīti cittaṃ ṭhapeti. Cetaso paṇidhānapaccayāti cittassa ṭhapanakāraṇā.
「以戒」:指以五戒等戒。「或以誓愿」:即受持头陀支。「或以苦行」:即精进策励。「或以梵行」:即远离淫欲。「或为天」:即具大神力的天界之王。「或为余天」:即那些天中的任意一位。显示巴利原文
Sīlena vāti pañcasīlādisīlena vā. Vatena vāti dhutaṅgasamādānena vā. Tapena vāti vīriyasamādānena vā. Brahmacariyena vāti methunaviratiyā vā. Devo vāti mahānubhāvo devarājā vā. Devaññataro vāti tesaṃ aññataro vā.
「他说」:指依功德而说。「种种说」:以种种方式而说。「极说」:以殊胜方式而说,或因加上了前缀而语意增强。显示巴利原文
Jappantāti guṇavasena kathentā. Pajappantāti pakārena kathentā. Abhijappantāti visesena kathentā, upasaggavasena vā vaḍḍhitaṃ.
9 如此,以第一首偈颂成立了「像这样的人实远离于远离」之后,再以第二首偈颂揭示这类人的法性,现在为了揭示那些人如何造作恶业,而说出「于诸欲贪染」等偈颂。显示巴利原文
9. Evaṃ paṭhamagāthāya ‘‘dūre vivekā hi tathāvidho’’ti sādhetvā dutiyagāthāya ca tathāvidhānaṃ dhammataṃ āvi katvā idāni tesaṃ pāpakaraṇaṃ āvi karonto ‘‘kāmesu giddhā’’ti gāthamāha.
这首偈颂的意思是:那些众生因受用渴爱而对诸欲「贪染」,因投入寻求等而「执迷」,因陷入迷乱而「昏昧」,因走向消尽、悭吝、不接纳佛陀等圣者的教言而「吝啬」,安住于身邪行等不正行中,临终时为死苦所逼,悲叹道:「从此处死后,我们将何去何从?」显示巴利原文
Tassattho – te sattā kāmesu paribhogataṇhāya giddhā, pariyesanādimanuyuttattā pasutā, sammohamāpannattā pamūḷhā, avagamanatāya macchariyatāya buddhādīnaṃ vacanaṃ anādiyatāya ca avadāniyā, kāyavisamādimhi visame niviṭṭhā, antakāle maraṇadukkhūpanītā, ‘‘kiṃsu bhavissāma ito cutāse’’ti paridevayantīti.
「贪著」:因欲贪而贪著。「执取」:由思惟之贪,怀期待而执取。「迷醉」:因欲爱而被迷醉所支配。「沉溺」:因欲乐而被完全覆盖、沉溺其中。「粘着」:因欲爱而粘着。「附着」:因欲热恼而合为一体。「系缚」:因欲想而被缠绕束缚。或者另一种解释:于见与见识上贪著;于频繁见面中执取;于交往行为中迷醉;于信赖行为中沉溺;于润泽交流中粘着;于成双配对的状态中附着;于不舍前后之中而被系缚。显示巴利原文
Giddhāti kāmarāgena giddhā. Gadhitāti saṅkapparāgena paccāsīsamānā hutvā gadhitā. Mucchitāti kāmataṇhāya mucchāparetā. Ajjhosannāti kāmanandiyā adhiosannā ajjhotthaṭā. Laggāti kāmasinehena allīnā. Laggitāti kāmapariḷāhena ekībhūtā. Palibuddhāti kāmasaññāya āvaṭṭitā. Atha vā ‘‘diṭṭhidassane giddhā. Abhiṇhadassane gadhitā. Saṃsaggakiriyasmiṃ mucchitā. Vissāsakiriyasmiṃ ajjhosannā. Sinehavaḷañjasmiṃ laggā. Dvayaṃdvayasamāpattimhi laggitā. Aparāparaṃ amuñcamānā hutvā palibuddhā’’ti evameke vaṇṇayanti.
「寻求」:指期待。「探寻」:指寻觅。「遍求」:以一切方式渴望、希求。或者另一种解释:对于已见的所缘,以“净或不净存在、不存在”而寻求;对于净不净的所缘,现前确认后,为了受用而令其成为可爱,这样探寻;以心的力量寻求,以精进的力量探寻,以作用的力量遍求。他们缘于这两种欲,向下驰流而游行,因此称为「依彼而行的人」。他们多数、大量地增长、转起那些欲,因此称为「多彼的人」。他们以尊重心重视那些欲,因此称为「重彼的人」。他们倾向、低就于那些欲而住,因此称为「趋彼的人」。他们正向那些欲而住,因此称为「向彼的人」。他们悬挂依附于那些欲,只向那个方向倾动而住,因此称为「面彼的人」。他们遍覆于那些欲,成为被迷醉所累者而说,因此称为「尚彼的人」。他们以那些欲为尊长、为上首而住,因此称为「尊彼的人」。或者还有一种解释:因为所缘的可乐状态而成为依彼而行的人;因为所缘的可爱状态而成为多彼的人;因为所缘的悦意状态而成为重彼的人;因为所缘的可喜状态而成为趋彼的人;因为所缘的关联欲乐状态而成为向彼的人;显示巴利原文
Esantīti paccāsīsanti. Gavesantīti maggayanti. Pariyesantīti sabbākārena icchanti patthenti. Atha vā diṭṭhārammaṇe subhāsubhaṃ atthi, natthīti esanti. Subhāsubhārammaṇe paccakkhaṃ katvā vaḷañjanatthāya piyaṃ karontā gavesanti. Cittavasena esanti. Payogavasena gavesanti. Karaṇavasena pariyesanti. Te duvidhe kāme paṭicca otaritvā carantīti taccaritā. Te ca kāme bahulaṃ yebhuyyena vaḍḍhenti pavattayantīti tabbahulā. Te ca kāme garuṃ katvā rahantīti taggarukā. Tesu kāmesu ninnā namitā hutvā vasantīti tanninnā. Tesu kāmesu sanninnā hutvā vasantīti tappoṇā. Tesu kāmesu avalambitā hutvā tesuyeva namitā vasantīti tappabbhārā. Tesu kāmesu avattharitvā mucchāparetappasaṅgā hutvā vadantīti tadadhimuttā. Te ca kāme adhipatiṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ katvā vasantīti tadadhipateyyā. Atha vā ‘‘ārammaṇassa iṭṭhabhāvena taccaritā. Ārammaṇassa kantabhāvena tabbahulā. Ārammaṇassa manāpabhāvena taggarukā. Ārammaṇassa piyabhāvena tanninnā. Ārammaṇassa kāmupasaṃhitabhāvena tappoṇā. Ārammaṇassa rajanīyabhāvena tappabbhārā. Ārammaṇassa mucchanīyabhāvena tadadhimuttā. Ārammaṇassa bandhanīyabhāvena tadadhipateyyā’’ti evameke vaṇṇayanti.
于「于色而遍求」等语句中,应当知:「遍求」是就为获得未得之物而寻求说;「获得」是就入手说;「受用」是就加以使用说。「作诤论、生口角」指诤论的制造者。专注于此者便是「专于诤论的人」。对于「业行制造者」等词,亦同此理。「游行于行境」指在妓女等行境中游行,或在念处等行境中游行。专注于此者便是「专于行境的人」。以对所缘的审察而拥有禅那者,即是「有禅那的人」。专注于此者便是「专于禅那的人」。显示巴利原文
Rūpepariyesantītiādīsu pariyesantīti aladdhassa lābhāya esanavasena. Paṭilabhantīti hatthagatavasena. Paribhuñjantīti vaḷañjanavasena vuttanti ñātabbaṃ. Kalahaṃ vivādaṃ karotīti kalahakārako. Tasmiṃ niyuttoti kalahapasuto. Kammakārakādīsupi eseva nayo. Gocare carantoti vesiyādigocare, satipaṭṭhānādigocare vā caramāno. Tesu niyutto gocarapasuto. Ārammaṇūpanijjhānavasena jhānaṃ assa atthīti jhāyī. Tasmiṃ niyutto jhānapasuto.
「消尽」:谓走向恶趣。「悭吝者」:指隐藏自己成就的人。「言」:指说话。「语句」:指言辞之道。「教导」:指开示与教诫。「教诫」:指训诫。「不纳受」:即不领受、不尊重。或作「不听从」,义同。为从事例上显示悭吝,故说「五种悭吝:住处悭吝……」等。其中,于住处生悭吝,称为住处悭吝,余词亦循此理。显示巴利原文
Avagacchantīti apāyaṃ gacchanti. Maccharinoti sakasampattiṃ niguhantā. Vacananti kathanaṃ. Byapathanti vākyapathaṃ. Desananti vissajjanaovādaṃ. Anusiṭṭhinti anusāsaniṃ. Nādiyantīti na gaṇhanti na garuṃ karonti. ‘‘Na paṭissantī’’ti vā pāṭho, soyeva attho. Vatthuto macchariyadassanatthaṃ ‘‘pañca macchariyāni āvāsamacchariya’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha āvāse macchariyaṃ āvāsamacchariyaṃ. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.
所谓「住处」,指整个寺院、僧坊、单间寮房或夜间住处等。住于其中者能安乐而住,获得资具。若有比丘,不希望具足行持、举止优雅的比丘前来,即使已来,心中亦想:「愿他速离。」此即住处悭吝。然而,若为阻止制造纷争者等住于此处,则不名住处悭吝。显示巴利原文
Āvāso nāma sakalārāmopi pariveṇampi ekovarakopi rattiṭṭhānādīnipi. Tesu vasantā sukhaṃ vasanti, paccaye labhanti. Eko bhikkhu vattasampannasseva pesalassa bhikkhuno tattha āgamanaṃ na icchati, āgatopi ‘‘khippaṃ gacchatū’’ti cintesi, idaṃ āvāsamacchariyaṃ nāma. Bhaṇḍanakārakādīnaṃ pana tattha vāsaṃ anicchato āvāsamacchariyaṃ nāma na hoti.
此处所言「家」,或指护持者之家,或指亲戚之家。若有人不希望他人接近其家,此即家悭吝。然若为防恶人接近,则不名悭吝,因其行为意在破坏他们净信。唯有对于能守护净信的比丘,若仍不欲其他比丘接近其家,方称家悭吝。显示巴利原文
Kulanti upaṭṭhākakulampi ñātikulampi. Tattha aññassa upasaṅkamanaṃ anicchato kulamacchariyaṃ hoti. Pāpapuggalassa pana upasaṅkamanaṃ anicchatopi macchariyaṃ nāma na hoti. So hi tesaṃ pasādabhedāya paṭipajjati. Pasādaṃ rakkhituṃ samatthasseva pana bhikkhuno tattha upasaṅkamanaṃ anicchato macchariyaṃ nāma hoti.
“利得”指四种资具的利得。当其他具戒者获得利得时,心里想着“愿他不要得到”,这便是利得悭吝。然而,若有人将信众施舍之物浪费,或以不受用、错误受用等方式将其损坏,即使物品即将腐坏,也不施予他人;若有人见此情形,心想:“若此人不得此物,其他具戒者便能得到并受用。”这种想法则不算是悭吝。显示巴利原文
Lābhoti catupaccayalābhova. Taṃ aññasmiṃ sīlavanteyeva labhante ‘‘mā labhatū’’ti cintentassa lābhamacchariyaṃ hoti. Yo pana saddhādeyyaṃ vinipāteti, aparibhogadupparibhogādivasena vināseti, pūtibhāvaṃ gacchantampi aññassa na deti, taṃ disvā ‘‘sace imaṃ esa na labheyya, añño sīlavā labheyya, paribhogaṃ gaccheyyā’’ti cintentassa macchariyaṃ nāma natthi.
“称赞”指对身体容貌的称赞和对功德的称赞。其中,对身体容貌悭吝的人,一旦听闻他人说“那人相好庄严”,便不愿加以谈论。对功德悭吝的人,则不愿称赞他人的戒行、头陀支、行道与行仪。显示巴利原文
Vaṇṇo nāma sarīravaṇṇopi guṇavaṇṇopi. Tattha sarīravaṇṇe maccharī ‘‘paro pāsādiko rūpavā’’ti vutte taṃ na kathetukāmo hoti. Guṇavaṇṇamaccharī parassa sīlena dhutaṅgena paṭipadāya ācārena vaṇṇaṃ na kathetukāmo hoti.
“法”指教理法与证悟法。其中,圣弟子对证悟法不会悭吝,他们希望包括天神在内的世间一切众生,都能证悟自己所证悟的法。唯独对教理法才可能生起悭吝,这才特称之为“法悭吝”。具此法悭吝的人,自己知道某个秘密的经典或法义门径,就不想让别人知道。但是,若有人在观察人的根器之后,出于对法的护持而不传授;或者在观察法的深浅之后,出于对人的护持而不传授,这样的人便不能称为法悭吝者。在此,有一种人态度轻浮,时而作沙门,时而作婆罗门,时而又作尼乾陀。若一位比丘心想:“此人会把我们传承下来的教理,即那些精深微妙的法义,弄得支离破碎、混乱不堪。”由是而不传授,这便是观察人后、为护持法而不传。若他想:“此法极为微细深妙,倘若此人学会之后,又转向他处解说,以此显露自己,最终会导致法的坏失。”由是而不传授,这便是观察法后、为护持人而不传。然而,若他想:“此人若学会此法,将来便有力量破坏我们的传统。”由是而不传授,此人便是真正的法悭吝者。显示巴利原文
Dhammoti pariyattidhammo ca paṭivedhadhammo ca. Tattha ariyasāvakā paṭivedhadhammaṃ na maccharāyanti, attanā paṭividdhadhamme sadevakassa lokassa paṭivedhaṃ icchanti. Taṃ pana paṭivedhaṃ ‘‘pare jānantū’’ti icchanti, tantidhammeyeva pana dhammamacchariyaṃ nāma hoti. Tena samannāgato puggalo yaṃ guḷhaṃ ganthaṃ vā kathāmaggaṃ vā jānāti, taṃ aññe na jānāpetukāmo hoti. Yo pana puggalaṃ upaparikkhitvā dhammānuggahena dhammaṃ vā upaparikkhitvā puggalānuggahena na deti, ayaṃ dhammamaccharī nāma na hoti. Tattha ekacco puggalo lolo hoti, kālena samaṇo hoti , kālena brāhmaṇo, kālena nigaṇṭho. Yo hi bhikkhu ‘‘ayaṃ puggalo paveṇiāgataṃ tantiṃ saṇhaṃ sukhumaṃ dhammantaraṃ bhinditvā āluḷessatī’’ti na deti, ayaṃ puggalaṃ upaparikkhitvā dhammānuggahena na deti nāma. Yo pana ‘‘ayaṃ dhammo saṇho sukhumo, sacāyaṃ puggalo gaṇhissati, aññaṃ byākaritvā attānaṃ āvi katvā nassissatī’’ti na deti, ayaṃ dhammaṃ upaparikkhitvā puggalānuggahena na deti nāma. Yo pana ‘‘sacāyaṃ imaṃ dhammaṃ gaṇhissati, amhākaṃ samayaṃ bhindituṃ samattho bhavissatī’’ti na deti, ayaṃ dhammamaccharī nāma hoti.
在这五种悭吝中,因住处悭吝,将来会投生为夜叉或饿鬼,用头顶着那个住处的垃圾四处游荡。因家悭吝,当见到其他人在那个家庭中行布施、表恭敬等时,心里想着“这个家坏了,本是我的”,便会口中喷血,腹部下泻,肠子一段段碎裂排出。因利得悭吝,对属于僧伽或僧团大众的利得心生悭吝,却当个人之物私自受用,将来便会投生为夜叉、饿鬼或大蟒蛇。因容貌称赞的悭吝、功德称赞的悭吝,以及法悭吝,则只会称赞自己的功德,对别人的功德却说“这算什么呢”,处处挑剔过失,些许法也不教给别人,来世便容貌丑陋,又聋又哑。显示巴利原文
Imesu pañcasu macchariyesu āvāsamacchariyena tāva yakkho vā peto vā hutvā tasseva āvāsassa saṅkāraṃ sīsena ukkhipitvā vicarati. Kulamacchariyena tasmiṃ kule aññesaṃ dānamānanādīni karonte disvā ‘‘bhinnaṃ vatidaṃ kulaṃ mamā’’ti cintayato lohitampi mukhato uggacchati, kucchivirecanampi hoti, antānipi khaṇḍākhaṇḍāni hutvā nikkhamanti. Lābhamacchariyena saṅghassa vā gaṇassa vā santake lābhe maccharāyitvā puggalikaparibhogaṃ viya paribhuñjitvā yakkho vā peto vā mahāajagaro vā hutvā nibbattati. Sarīravaṇṇaguṇavaṇṇamaccharena pana pariyattidhammamacchariyena ca attanova vaṇṇaṃ vaṇṇeti, paresaṃ vaṇṇe ‘‘kiṃ vaṇṇo eso’’ti taṃ taṃ dosaṃ vadanto pariyattidhammañca kassaci kiñci adento dubbaṇṇo ceva eḷamūgo ca hoti.
再者,因住处悭吝,在铁屋地狱中被焚烧;因家悭吝,所得的利养极为微少;因利得悭吝,投生于粪地狱;因称赞悭吝,无论转生何处,皆容貌丑陋;因法悭吝,投生于火炭地狱。显示巴利原文
Api ca āvāsamacchariyena lohagehe paccati, kulamacchariyena appalābho hoti, lābhamacchariyena gūthaniraye nibbattati, vaṇṇamacchariyena bhave bhave nibbattassa vaṇṇo nāma na hoti, dhammamacchariyena kukkuḷaniraye nibbattatīti.
悭吝,即悭吝不舍的心理作用;悭吝所表现的状态,名为悭吝性;具足悭吝者的状况,名为悭吝态。“愿这一切成就唯属于我,不要归于他人”,像这样不愿将自己所有成就分享给他人,名为“极悭”;这种极悭的状态,名为“极悭性”,这是较轻微的一种悭吝。不尊重他人者,名为“吝啬者”;其吝啬的状态,名为“吝啬”,这是顽固型悭吝的名称。具此顽固悭吝者,甚至会阻止别人布施给其他人。这在经典中也曾说过:显示巴利原文
Maccharāyanavasena macchariyaṃ. Maccharāyanākāro maccharāyanā. Maccharena ayitassa maccherasamaṅgino bhāvo maccharāyitattaṃ. ‘‘Mayhameva hontu, mā aññassā’’ti sabbāpi attano sampattiyo byāpetuṃ na icchatīti viviccho, vivicchassa bhāvo vevicchaṃ, mudumacchariyassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Kadariyo vuccati anādaro, tassa bhāvo kadariyaṃ, thaddhamacchariyassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Tena hi samannāgato puggalo parampi paresaṃ dadamānaṃ nivāreti. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
吝啬之人怀著邪恶的心思,执持邪见,不存敬意;对于向人乞食者,他们加以阻挠,障碍他人布施。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kadariyo pāpasaṅkappo, micchādiṭṭhianādaro; Dadamānaṃ nivāreti, yācamānāna bhojana’’nti. (saṃ. ni. 1.132);
若见乞者,便以苛刻之心令心蜷缩、向内收紧,因此名为“尖吝者”;此种状态,即称为“尖吝性”。另有一说:“尖吝性”是指以尖匙取食。譬如从满满一锅饭中取食时,若用一把处处收束的尖头匙舀取,便无法盛满;同样,悭吝人的心便是如此收束紧缩的。心一收束,身体也随之收缩、蜷曲、退怯,不能舒展。因此,悭吝便被称为“尖吝性”。显示巴利原文
Yācake disvā kaṭukabhāvena cittaṃ añcati saṅkocetīti kaṭukañcuko, tassa bhāvo kaṭukañcukatā. Aparo nayo – kaṭukañcukatā vuccati kaṭacchuggāho. Samatittikapuṇṇāya hi ukkhaliyā bhattaṃ gaṇhanto sabbatobhāgena saṅkuṭitena aggakaṭacchunā gaṇhāti pūretvā gahetuṃ na sakkoti, evaṃ maccharipuggalassa cittaṃ saṅkucati, tasmiṃ saṅkucite kāyopi tatheva saṅkucati paṭikuṭati paṭinivaṭṭati na sampasārīyatīti maccheraṃ ‘‘kaṭukañcukatā’’ti vuttaṃ.
心的执持状态,是指心被遮蔽、执持,以致在布施等利益他人时无法舒展。然而,悭吝者不愿将自己之物施与他人,却希求获取他人之物,故应知:基于“此奇物唯应归我,不可属他”的心念,悭吝具有“隐藏自成就”与“执取他成就”的相。显示巴利原文
Aggahitattaṃ cittassāti paresaṃ upakārakaraṇe dānādinā ākārena yathā na sampasārīyati, evaṃ āvaritvā gahitabhāvo cittassa. Yasmā pana maccharipuggalo attano santakaṃ paresaṃ adātukāmo hoti, parasantakaṃ gaṇhitukāmo. Tasmā ‘‘idaṃ acchariyaṃ mayhameva hotu, mā aññassā’’ti pavattivasenassa attasampattinigūhanalakkhaṇatā parasampattiggahaṇalakkhaṇatā ca veditabbā.
“蕴悭吝”也是一种悭吝:对自己五蕴所构成的再生有,认为他人不可共享,生起“此奇物唯应归我,不可属他”的想法,这种悭吝名为“蕴悭吝”。对“界悭吝”、“处悭吝”的道理也是如此。“执取”是以执取与决断的方式来把持。“无了知性”是指对一切知佛所说的法亦不了知的状态;不布施乞者,即是对乞者之言充耳不闻。“放逸之人”即失念之人。“言说”是简要之说;“广说”是详尽展开之说;“开示”是借譬喻阐明义理之说;“教诲”是反复叮咛令铭记之说。或者这样理解:显了而说,名为“言说”;令掌握而说,名为“广说”;令悦意而说,名为“开示”;清晰明辨而说,名为“教诲”。又或者说:为灭少苦而说,为“言说”;为灭炽苦而说,为“广说”;为灭恶趣苦而说,为“开示”;为灭有苦而说,为“教诲”。另有人说:“言说”与苦谛遍知通达相应;“广说”与集谛断除通达相应;“开示”与灭谛作证通达相应;“教诲”与道谛修习通达相应。以上即某些人的解释方式。显示巴利原文
Khandhamacchariyampi macchariyanti attano pañcakkhandhasaṅkhātaṃ upapattibhavaṃ aññehi asādhāraṇaṃ ‘‘acchariyaṃ mayhameva hotu, mā aññassā’’ti pavattaṃ macchariyaṃ khandhamacchariyaṃ nāma. Dhātuāyatanamacchariyesupi eseva nayo. Gāhoti gāhanicchayavasena gahaṇaṃ. Avadaññutāyāti sabbaññubuddhānampi kathitaṃ ajānanabhāvena. Yācakānaṃ adadamāno hi tehi kathitaṃ na jānāti nāma. Janā pamattāti sativippavāsā janā. Vacananti saṅkhepavacanaṃ. Byappathanti vitthāravacanaṃ. Desananti upamaṃ dassetvā atthasandassanavacanaṃ. Anusiṭṭhinti punappunaṃ saṃlakkhāpanavacanaṃ. Atha vā dassetvā kathanaṃ vacanaṃ nāma. Gaṇhāpetvā kathanaṃ byappathaṃ nāma. Tosetvā kathanaṃ desanaṃ nāma. Padassetvā kathanaṃ anusiṭṭhi nāma. Atha vā paritāpadukkhaṃ nāsetvā kathanaṃ vacanaṃ nāma. Pariḷāhadukkhaṃ nāsetvā kathanaṃ byappathaṃ nāma. Apāyadukkhaṃ nāsetvā kathanaṃ desanaṃ nāma. Bhavadukkhaṃ nāsetvā kathanaṃ anusiṭṭhi nāma. Atha vā dukkhasaccapariññāpaṭivedhayuttaṃ vacanaṃ. Samudayasaccapahānapaṭivedhayuttaṃ byappathaṃ. Nirodhasaccasacchikiriyapaṭivedhayuttaṃ desanaṃ. Maggasaccabhāvanāpaṭivedhayuttaṃ anusiṭṭhīti evamādinā nayena eke vaṇṇayanti.
“不聆听”指不听闻。“不倾耳”指不为听闻而竖起耳孔。“不立他心”指不为了知而安立心。“不随顺者”指不听闻教诫之人。“不奉行者”指虽听闻而不依教奉行之人。“违逆而行者”指反其道而行之的人。“面转向他方”指虽有所为,却不予正面回应,此即其义。显示巴利原文
Nasussusantīti na suṇanti. Na sotaṃ odahantīti savanatthaṃ kaṇṇasotaṃ na ṭhapenti. Na aññā cittaṃ upaṭṭhapentīti jānanatthaṃ cittaṃ na patiṭṭhapenti. Anassavāti ovādaṃ asuṇamānā. Avacanakarāti suṇamānāpi vacanaṃ na karontīti avacanakarā. Paṭilomavuttinoti paṭāṇī hutvā pavattanakā . Aññeneva mukhaṃ karontīti karontāpi mukhaṃ na dentīti attho.
「于不平坦中」:因与身善行等所认可的“平坦”相对,故称为“不平坦”;即处于那样的不平坦中。「安住」:指进入后难以拔出。「于身业」:从身体发起的,或由身体造作的业,即是身业。对于语业等,道理亦同。显示巴利原文
Visameti kāyasucaritādisammatassa samassa paṭipakkhattā visamaṃ, tasmiṃ visame. Niviṭṭhāti paviṭṭhā dunnīharā. Kāyakammeti kāyato pavatte, kāyena vā pavatte kāyakamme. Vacīkammādīsupi eseva nayo.
于此,身业、语业、意业依恶行而分类;应知杀生等十不善业道,亦依此而分类。以上是共通词句的注释。对于不共通的词句:「杀生」指杀害有情,即杀死有情、毁灭有情。此处所说的「有情」,从世俗言说指众生,从究竟意义上指命根。当面对有命根的对象,生起“这是有情”的想法,以切断其命根为目的,经由身门或语门生起杀害的思,这即是「杀生」。对于没有德行的小生命,如畜生等,杀生的罪过较轻;对于形体巨大的众生,罪过较重。为什么呢?因为所施加的加行重大;即使加行相同,也因所依的对象形体大而有差别。对于有德行的众生,如人类等,所杀对象的德行微少时,罪过较轻;德行殊胜时,罪过较重。然而,在形体大小与德行高低都相当的情况下,因烦恼轻微与加行轻柔,罪过较轻;因烦恼猛烈与加行粗重,罪过较重。应如此理解。显示巴利原文
Tattha kāyakammavacīkammamanokammāni duccaritavasena vibhattāni, pāṇātipātādayo dasaakusalakammapathavasena vibhattāti ñātabbaṃ. Ayaṃ tāvettha sādhāraṇapadavaṇṇanā, asādhāraṇesu pana pāṇassa atipāto pāṇātipāto, pāṇavadho pāṇaghātoti vuttaṃ hoti. Pāṇoti cettha vohārato satto, paramatthato jīvitindriyaṃ. Tasmiṃ pana pāṇe pāṇasaññino jīvitindriyupacchedakaupakkamasamuṭṭhāpitā kāyavacīdvārānaṃ aññataradvārapavattā vadhakacetanā pāṇātipāto. So guṇavirahitesu tiracchānagatādīsu pāṇesu khuddake pāṇe appasāvajjo, mahāsarīre mahāsāvajjo. Kasmā? Payogamahantatāya, payogasamattepi vatthumahantatāya. Guṇavantesu manussādīsu appaguṇe pāṇe appasāvajjo, mahāguṇe mahāsāvajjo. Sarīraguṇānaṃ pana samabhāve sati kilesānaṃ upakkamānañca mudutāya appasāvajjo, tibbatāya mahāsāvajjoti veditabbo.
杀生的构成有五项条件:一是有情,二是有情想,三是杀心,四是加行,五是由此而死。具体方法有六种:亲手作、教令他人作、投掷、设置固定装置、依咒术达成、依神通达成。这一义理若详细展开,则过于冗长,此处不再细说。若有需要,可参阅《一切善见》律藏注释以了解。显示巴利原文
Tassa pañca sambhārā honti – pāṇo pāṇasaññitā vadhakacittaṃ upakkamo tena maraṇanti. Chappayogā – sāhatthiko āṇattiko nissaggiyo thāvaro vijjāmayo iddhimayoti. Imasmiṃ panatthe vitthāriyamāne atipapañco hoti, tasmā naṃ na vitthārayissāma. Aññañca evarūpaṃ , atthikehi pana samantapāsādikaṃ vinayaṭṭhakathaṃ (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.172) oloketvā gahetabbaṃ.
「不与取」就是取走他人未给予之物,也就是夺取他人的财物,这称为盗窃、偷窃。其中,「未给予」是指他人所持有的东西,当他人对某物可以随意处置,且不会因拿走它而受惩罚或谴责时,此物便属于他人所持有。对于这种他人所持有的东西,明知是他人所有,却生起了想要拿走的盗心,并发动了相关行为,这就是「不与取」。如果所取之物低劣,罪过就小;如果所取之物珍贵殊胜,罪过就大。为什么呢?因为物品本身珍贵。若物品价值相当,但物主德行高远,罪过就大;若物主德行卑下,罪过相对就小。显示巴利原文
Adinnassa ādānaṃ adinnādānaṃ, parassa haraṇaṃ theyyaṃ corikāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha adinnanti parapariggahitaṃ, yattha paro yathākāmakāritaṃ āpajjanto adaṇḍāraho anupavajjo ca hoti, tasmiṃ pana parapariggahite parapariggahitasaññino tadādāyakaupakkamasamuṭṭhāpikā theyyacetanā adinnādānaṃ. Taṃ hīne parasantake vatthusmiṃ appasāvajjaṃ, paṇīte mahāsāvajjaṃ. Kasmā? Vatthupaṇītatāya, vatthusamatte sati guṇādhikānaṃ santake vatthusmiṃ mahāsāvajjaṃ. Taṃ taṃ guṇādhikaṃ upādāya tato tato hīnaguṇassa santake vatthusmiṃ appasāvajjaṃ.
不与取由五种条件构成:物品是他人所持有的、明知是他人之物、有盗心、采取方便、以及通过方便取走物品。有六种方式,如亲手取等。根据情况,这些方式表现为五种取走的形式:偷窃取走、强行夺取、秘密取走、设计骗取、以及诈取。此处只是简要说明,详细解释载于《一切善见》。显示巴利原文
Tassa pañca sambhārā honti – parapariggahitaṃ parapariggahitasaññitā theyyacittaṃ upakkamo tena haraṇanti. Chappayogā sāhatthikādayova. Te ca kho yathānurūpaṃ theyyāvahāro pasayhāvahāro paṭicchannāvahāro parikappāvahāro kusāvahāroti imesaṃ pañcannaṃ avahārānaṃ vasena pavattanti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthāro pana samantapāsādikāyaṃ vutto.
「欲邪行」:在此,「欲」是指淫欲的行为。「邪行」是指被彻底呵责的鄙劣行为。从特征上说,以行持非正法(邪淫)的意图,由身门生起的、侵犯不可行处的思,即是欲邪行。显示巴利原文
Kāmesumicchācāroti ettha pana kāmesūti methunasamācāresu. Micchācāroti ekantanindito lāmakācāro. Lakkhaṇato pana asaddhammasevanādhippāyena kāyadvārappavattā agamanīyaṭṭhānavītikkamacetanā kāmesumicchācāro.
其中,「不可行处」是指:对男子而言,有二十种女性,即母护、父护、父母护、兄护、姐护、亲族护、宗族护、法护、有护、有罚护这十种,称为母护等;以及买得妻、依欲住妻、依财住妻、依衣住妻、水钵妻、除棉垫妻、既是婢又是妻、既是佣工又是妻、旗掠妻、片刻妻这十种,称为买得等。对女子而言,有护与有罚两种,加上买得等十种,共十二种其他男子,这些都称为不可行处。显示巴利原文
Tattha agamanīyaṭṭhānaṃ nāma purisānaṃ tāva māturakkhitā piturakkhitā mātāpiturakkhitā bhāturakkhitā bhaginirakkhitā ñātirakkhitā gottarakkhitā dhammarakkhitā sārakkhā saparidaṇḍāti māturakkhitādayo dasa, dhanakkītā chandavāsinī bhogavāsinī paṭavāsinī odapattakinī obhatacumbaṭakā dāsī ca bhariyā kammakārī ca bhariyā dhajāhaṭā muhuttikāti etā dhanakkītādayo dasāti vīsati itthiyo. Itthīsu pana dvīnnaṃ sārakkhasaparidaṇḍānaṃ dasannañca dhanakkītādīnanti dvādasannaṃ itthīnaṃ aññe purisā, idaṃ agamanīyaṭṭhānaṃ nāma.
然而,此邪行若发生在无戒等功德的不可行处,罪过较小;若发生在具足戒等功德者身上,罪过重大。它有四个条件:不可行处、生起与之交合的心、交合的加行、以道入道并领受。其加行唯有一种,即亲手而为。显示巴利原文
So panesa micchācāro sīlādiguṇarahite agamanīyaṭṭhāne appasāvajjo, sīlādiguṇasampanne mahāsāvajjo. Tassa cattāro sambhārā – agamanīyavatthu tasmiṃ sevanacittaṃ sevanapayogo maggena maggapaṭipattiadhivāsananti. Eko payogo sāhatthiko eva.
「妄」:以欺骗为先导、破坏他人利益的身语行为。出于欺骗的意图,生起令他人误解的身语业之思,即是妄语。另一种解释:「妄」指不真实、虚假的事物;「语」指将其说为真实、如实。从特征上说,对于不真实的事物,想要令他人认知为真实,由此生起如此表识之思,即是妄语。这种妄语所破坏的利益微小,则罪过小;利益重大,则罪过大。在家者因吝惜己物而说「没有」等,罪过较小;作为证人,旨在破坏他人利益而说,罪过重大。出家人得到少许油或酥油后,以嬉笑心说「今天村里油像河流一样淌着」等夸大之语,罪过较小;若以未见说见等方式妄语,罪过重大。显示巴利原文
Musāti visaṃvādanapurekkhārassa atthabhañjanako vacīpayogo kāyapayogo vā. Visaṃvādanādhippāyena panassa paravisaṃvādakakāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā musāvādo. Aparo nayo – musāti abhūtaṃ atacchaṃ vatthu. Vādoti tassa bhūtato tacchato viññāpanaṃ. Lakkhaṇato pana atathaṃ vatthuṃ tathato paraṃ viññāpetukāmassa tathāviññattisamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā musāvādo. So yamatthaṃ bhañjati, tassa appatāya appasāvajjo, mahantatāya mahāsāvajjo. Api ca gahaṭṭhānaṃ attano santakaṃ adātukāmatāya ‘‘natthī’’tiādinayappavatto appasāvajjo, sakkhinā hutvā atthabhañjanatthaṃ vutto mahāsāvajjo. Pabbajitānaṃ appakampi telaṃ vā sappiṃ vā labhitvā hasādhippāyena ‘‘ajja gāme telaṃ nadī maññe sandatī’’ti pūraṇakathānayena pavatto appasāvajjo, adiṭṭhaṃyeva pana diṭṭhantiādinā nayena vadantānaṃ mahāsāvajjo.
它具备四个条件:不实之事、欺骗之心、相应的策励、对方领会其义。其加行唯有一种,即亲手而为。此加行当知为以身、或以身所系物、或以言语,而行欺骗他人之事。若以此行为令对方了知彼义,则在生起此行为之思的刹那,即已为妄语业所系缚。显示巴利原文
Tassa cattāro sambhārā honti – atathaṃ vatthu visaṃvādanacittaṃ tajjo vāyāmo parassa tadatthavijānananti. Eko payogo sāhatthikova. So ca kāyena vā kāyapaṭibaddhena vā vācāya vā paravisaṃvādakakiriyākaraṇe daṭṭhabbo. Tāya ce kiriyāya paro tamatthaṃ jānāti, ayaṃ kiriyasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanākkhaṇeyeva musāvādakammunā bajjhati.
在“离间语”等中,凡以彼语,令闻者心中对自己生起喜爱,而对他人变得疏远,此即离间语。凡令自己与他人皆感刺耳,其语本身亦粗恶,既不悦耳、亦不入心,此即粗恶语。凡以杂秽之言而说无义利者,即是杂秽语。它们根本的思,亦得离间语等之名,此即此处所指。显示巴利原文
Pisuṇavācātiādīsu yāya vācāya yassa taṃ vācaṃ bhāsati, tassa hadaye attano piyabhāvaṃ parassa ca suññabhāvaṃ karoti, sā pisuṇavācā. Yāya pana attānampi parampi pharusaṃ karoti, yā vācā sayampi pharusā neva kaṇṇasukhā na hadayaṅgamā, ayaṃ pharusavācā. Yena samphaṃ palapati niratthakaṃ, so samphappalāpo. Tesaṃ mūlabhūtāpi cetanā pisuṇavācādināmameva labhati, sā eva idha adhippetāti.
其中,以杂染心,或为离间他人,或为使自己受他人喜爱,而发起身语业行所起的思,即是离间语。若所离间者功德微少,则罪过微少;若功德广大,则罪过广大。显示巴利原文
Tattha saṃkiliṭṭhacittassa paresaṃ vā bhedāya attano piyakamyatāya vā kāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā pisuṇavācā. Sā yassa bhedaṃ karoti , tassa appaguṇāya appasāvajjā, mahāguṇatāya mahāsāvajjā.
它有四个条件:有应被离间的他人,以“如此他们将各自不同、彼此分离”的离间意图为先导,或以“如此我将成为可爱、可信之人”的求宠意图为先导,相应的努力,以及对方领会其意。显示巴利原文
Tassā cattāro sambhārā honti – bhinditabbo paro ‘‘iti ime nānā bhavissanti vinā bhavissantī’’ti bhedapurekkhāratā vā, ‘‘iti ahaṃ piyo bhavissāmi vissāsiko’’ti viyakamyatā vā, tajjo vāyāmo, tassa tadatthavijānananti.
生起能引发伤害他人要害之身行、语行的全然粗恶之思,即是粗恶语。然而,伤害要害的行为若出于内心的柔软,则不构成粗恶语。例如,父母有时会对年幼的子女说:“愿贼人把你们撕成碎片!”但哪怕一片莲叶飘落在孩子身上,他们心中都不愿。戒师与依止师有时也会对弟子说:“把这些无惭无愧的人赶出去!他们怎么还在四处游荡?”然而,他们内心却希望弟子们在教法与证悟上获得成就。正如内心柔软时,粗恶语不成立;同样,语言柔和时,也未必不是粗恶语。因为,一个想杀某人的人说“让他舒舒服服地躺着吧”,这句话并非不是粗恶语——由于心的粗恶,它恰恰是粗恶语。凡此粗恶语所针对的对象,若其功德小,则罪过小;若功德大,则罪过大。它有三个条件:有应被骂的他人、忿怒之心,以及辱骂。显示巴利原文
Parassa mammacchedakakāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā ekantapharusacetanā pharusavācā. Mammacchedakopi payogo cittasaṇhatāya pharusavācā na hoti. Mātāpitaro hi kadāci puttake evampi vadanti ‘‘corā vo khaṇḍākhaṇḍikaṃ karontū’’ti, uppalapattampi ca nesaṃ upari patantaṃ na icchanti. Ācariyupajjhāyā ca kadāci nissitake evaṃ vadanti ‘‘kiṃ ime ahirikā anottappino caranti, niddhamatha ne’’ti. Atha ca nesaṃ āgamādhigamasampattiṃ icchanti. Yathā ca cittasaṇhatāya pharusavācā na hoti, evaṃ vacanasaṇhatāya apharusavācāpi na hoti. Na hi mārāpetukāmassa ‘‘imaṃ sukhaṃ sayāpethā’’ti vacanaṃ apharusavācā hoti, cittapharusatāya panesā pharusavācāva, sā yaṃ sandhāya pavattitā. Tassa appaguṇatāya appasāvajjā, mahāguṇatāya mahāsāvajjā. Tassā tayo sambhārā – akkositabbo paro kupitacittaṃ akkosananti.
生起能引发表达无义利之身行、语行的不善思,即是杂秽语。若习行轻微,则罪过小;若习行深重,则罪过大。它有两个条件:以谈论《摩诃婆罗多》大战、掠走悉多等无义利故事为先导,以及说如是之语。显示巴利原文
Anatthaviññāpikā kāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā akusalacetanā samphappalāpo. So āsevanamandatāya appasāvajjo, āsevanamahantatāya mahāsāvajjo. Tassa dve sambhārā honti – bhāratayuddhasītāharaṇādiniratthakakathāpurekkhāratā tathārūpīkathākathanañcāti.
因为“朝向而思”,故称为「贪欲」,意即心面对他人财物时,朝向它、沉入它而持续地运作。它的特征是像这样:“啊,要是这东西变成我的该多好!”,如此贪求他人的财物。与不与取一样,它的罪过也有轻有重。它要具足两个条件:他人的财物,以及将它执为己有。因为即使对他人的财物生起了贪心,只要还没有把它执取为“但愿这成为我的”,业道就还不算被违犯。显示巴利原文
Abhijjhāyatīti abhijjhā, parabhaṇḍābhimukhī hutvā tanninnatāya pavattatīti attho. Sā ‘‘aho vata idaṃ mamāssā’’ti evaṃ parabhaṇḍābhijjhāyanalakkhaṇā. Adinnādānaṃ viya appasāvajjā mahāsāvajjā ca. Tassā dve sambhārā honti – parabhaṇḍaṃ attano pariṇāmanañcāti. Parabhaṇḍavatthuke hi lobhe uppannepi na tāva kammapathabhedo hoti, yāva ‘‘aho vatidaṃ mamāssā’’ti attano na pariṇāmeti.
因为“破坏利益和安乐”,故称为「嗔恨」。它的特征是内心生起以毁灭对方为目的的嗔恼。与粗恶语一样,它的罪过也有轻有重。它要具足两个条件:其他的众生,以及想要毁灭他的念头。因为即使对某一众生起了愤怒,只要还没有想“但愿他灭亡、消失”,业道就还不算被违犯。显示巴利原文
Hitasukhaṃ byāpādayatīti byāpādo, so paravināsāya manopadosalakkhaṇo. Pharusavācā viya appasāvajjo mahāsāvajjo ca. Tassa dve sambhārā honti – parasatto ca tassa ca vināsacintāti. Parasattavatthuke hi kodhe uppannepi na tāva kammapathabhedo hoti, yāva ‘‘aho vatāyaṃ ucchijjeyya vinasseyyā’’ti tassa vināsaṃ na cintesi.
由于不如实把握真相,颠倒地看待事物,故称为「邪见」。它的特征是秉持“布施没有果报”等一类颠倒的见解。与杂秽语一样,它的罪过也有轻有重。显示巴利原文
Yathābhuccagahaṇābhāvena micchā passatīti micchādiṭṭhi. Sā ‘‘natthi dinna’’ntiādinā nayena viparītadassanalakkhaṇā. Samphappalāpo viya appasāvajjā mahāsāvajjā ca.
有人依于色等而疑惑:“我将来会成为有想、无想,还是非想非非想?”又通过“将来我还会存在吗?”等方式,对自我生疑。其中,“我将来还会存在吗?不会存在吗?”是依于常见与断见,对未来自我的存在与否生起疑惑。“我会成为什么?”则是依于种姓、相貌与再生而疑:“我会成为刹帝利吗?婆罗门、吠舍、首陀罗、在家者、出家者、天、人中的哪一种?”“我会是什么样子?”乃依于形态样式而疑:“我会是长、短、白、黑、有量、无量等之中的哪一种?”亦有观点认为:“依自在天创造等理论,而疑惑‘我是因何而成为这样的?’,此是从因的角度生疑。”“我曾是什么,将来会变成什么?”是依于出生等而疑:“过去我是刹帝利,将来会变成婆罗门吗?……过去我是天,将来会变成人吗?”如此,对自己的相续流转生起疑惑。在这一切的描述中,“长时”都只是时间的同义词。显示巴利原文
Saññī, asaññī, nevasaññīnāsaññī bhavissāmāti rūpādivasena kaṅkhanti. Bhavissāma nu kho mayantiādinā attānaṃ kaṅkhanti. Tattha bhavissāma nu kho. Na nu kho bhavissāmāti tassa sassatākārañca ucchedākārañca nissāya anāgate attānaṃ vijjamānatañca avijjamānatañca kaṅkhanti. Kiṃ nu kho bhavissāmāti jātiliṅgupapattiyo nissāya ‘‘khattiyā nu kho bhavissāma, brāhmaṇavessasuddagahaṭṭhapabbajitadevamanussānaṃ aññatarā’’ti kaṅkhanti. Kathaṃ nu kho bhavissāmāti saṇṭhānākāraṃ nissāya ‘‘dīghā nu kho bhavissāma, rassaodātakaṇhapamāṇikaappamāṇikādīnaṃ aññatarā’’ti kaṅkhanti. Keci pana ‘‘issaranimmānādīni nissāya ‘kena nu kho kāraṇena bhavissāmā’ti hetuto kaṅkhantī’’ti vadanti. Kiṃ hutvā kiṃ bhavissāma nu kho mayanti jātiādīni nissāya ‘‘khattiyā hutvā nu kho brāhmaṇā bhavissāma…pe… devā hutvā manussā’’ti attano paramparaṃ kaṅkhanti. Sabbattheva pana addhānanti kālādhivacanametaṃ.
10 正因为如此,所以“应当学”……贤者们这样说。此处,“应当学”是指应当转向、投入三学。“在此”即是在此教法中。其中,应当学之处即是“学”。“三”是对数量的界定。增上戒学:“增上戒”是指高超、殊胜的戒;它既是增上戒,又因应当修学之义而称为学,故为增上戒学。同理,增上心学与增上慧学也依此类推。显示巴利原文
10. Yasmā etadeva tasmā hi sikkhetha…pe… āhu dhīrāti. Tattha sikkhethāti tisso sikkhā āvajjeyya. Idhevāti imasmiṃyeva sāsane. Tattha sikkhitabbāti sikkhā. Tissoti gaṇanaparicchedo. Adhisīlasikkhāti adhikaṃ uttamaṃ sīlanti adhisīlaṃ, adhisīlañca taṃ sikkhitabbaṭṭhena sikkhā cāti adhisīlasikkhā. Esa nayo adhicittaadhipaññāsikkhāsu.
那么,在这些当中,什么是戒?什么是增上戒?什么是心?什么是增上心?什么是慧?什么是增上慧?答:五戒、十戒只能算是“戒”。因为这种戒,无论佛陀是否出现于世间,都在世间存在。当佛陀出现世间时,佛陀及其声闻弟子会教导大众受持这些戒;当佛陀未现世间时,则有独觉佛、宣扬业力之人、如法的沙门与婆罗门、转轮王、大王及大菩萨们来教导,而且有智慧的沙门、婆罗门也会自己受持。他们圆满这些善法之后,便享受天界与人间的成就。显示巴利原文
Katamaṃ panettha sīlaṃ, katamaṃ adhisīlaṃ, katamaṃ cittaṃ, katamaṃ adhicittaṃ, katamā paññā, katamā adhipaññāti? Vuccate – pañcaṅgadasaṅgasīlaṃ tāva sīlameva . Tañhi buddhe uppannepi anuppannepi loke pavattati . Uppanne buddhe tasmiṃ sīle buddhāpi sāvakāpi mahājanaṃ samādapenti, anuppanne buddhe paccekabuddhā ca kammavādino ca dhammikā samaṇabrāhmaṇā ca cakkavattī ca mahārājāno mahābodhisattā ca samādapenti, sāmampi paṇḍitā samaṇabrāhmaṇā samādiyanti. Te taṃ kusalaṃ dhammaṃ paripūretvā devesu ca manussesu ca sampattiṃ anubhonti.
巴帝摩卡律仪戒称为“增上戒”。它在一切世间戒中,犹如太阳在一切光明中最上、最胜,又如须弥山在群山中那样最上、最胜,并且只在佛陀出现世间时才会出现,不可能离开佛陀的出世而存在。因为除了佛陀能将那制戒的教法提出并建立之外,其他任何有情都没有能力这样做。唯有佛陀们在彻底断除身门、语门一切恶行之流后,才针对每一违犯施设了相应的律仪。然而,与巴帝摩卡律仪相比,只有与道果相应的戒才是真正的增上戒。显示巴利原文
Pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlaṃ pana ‘‘adhisīla’’nti vuccati. Tañhi sūriyo viya pajjotānaṃ sineru viya pabbatānaṃ sabbalokiyasīlānaṃ adhikañceva uttamañca, buddhuppādeyeva ca pavattati, na vinā buddhuppādā. Na hi taṃ paññattiṃ uddharitvā añño satto ṭhapetuṃ sakkoti. Buddhāyeva pana sabbaso kāyavacīdvāraajjhācārasotaṃ chinditvā tassa tassa vītikkamassa anucchavikaṃ taṃ sīlasaṃvaraṃ paññapenti. Pātimokkhasaṃvaratopi ca maggaphalasampayuttameva sīlaṃ adhisīlaṃ.
然而,应当了知:将八种欲界善心与世间八等至心合在一起来看,这些都只属于“心”。无论佛陀是否出现于世间,这种心都会存在;至于它的劝导与受持方式,则应按如前“戒”部分已阐明的方法来理解。显示巴利原文
Kāmāvacarāni pana aṭṭha kusalacittāni lokiyaaṭṭhasamāpatticittāni ca ekajjhaṃ katvā cittamevāti veditabbāni. Buddhuppādānuppāde cassa pavatti, samādapanaṃ samādānañca sīle vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
而以观为前导的八等至心,才被称为“增上心”。如同增上戒在诸戒中那样,它在一切世间心中也是最上、最胜的;而且,它只存在于佛陀出现世间之时,不可能离开佛陀的出世而有。比此更殊胜的,则是唯有道果心才算得上增上心。显示巴利原文
Vipassanāpādakaṃ aṭṭhasamāpatticittaṃ pana ‘‘adhicitta’’nti vuccati. Tañhi adhisīlaṃ viya sīlānaṃ, sabbalokiyacittānaṃ adhikañceva uttamañca, buddhuppādeyeva ca hoti, na vinā buddhuppādā. Tatopi ca maggaphalacittameva adhicittaṃ.
而像「有布施、有供养」等这样阐述的业自作识智慧,则是「慧」。不论佛陀出现于世间与否,这种慧都存在于世间。佛陀出世时,佛陀与声闻弟子们劝导大众修习此慧;佛陀未出世时,独觉佛、宣说业力者、行法的沙门与婆罗门、转轮王、大王及大菩萨们亦加以劝导,明智有情自己也会受持。如同安古罗在一万年中广行大施,维拉摩、毗输安多罗及众多其他智者也都行过大施。他们圆满这些善法之后,便享受天界与人间的成就。显示巴利原文
‘‘Atthi dinnaṃ atthi yiṭṭha’’ntiādinayappavattaṃ (ma. ni. 2.94) pana kammassakatāñāṇaṃ paññā. Sā hi buddhe uppannepi anuppannepi loke pavattati. Uppanne buddhe tassā paññāya buddhāpi sāvakāpi mahājanaṃ samādapenti, anuppanne buddhe paccekabuddhā ca kammavādino ca dhammikā samaṇabrāhmaṇā ca cakkavattī ca mahārājāno mahābodhisattā ca samādapenti, sāmampi paṇḍitā sattā samādiyanti. Tathā hi aṅkuro dasavassasahassāni mahādānaṃ adāsi. Velāmo vessantaro aññe ca bahū paṇḍitamanussā mahādānāni adaṃsu. Te taṃ kusalaṃ dhammaṃ paripūretvā devesu ca manussesu ca sampattiṃ anubhaviṃsu.
而以三相行相作判别的那观智,则被称为「增上慧」。如同增上戒、增上心之于戒与心那样,它在一切世间慧中是最上、最胜的,而且非佛陀出世则不会出现于世间。比它更为殊胜的,唯有道果慧才可称为增上慧。显示巴利原文
Tilakkhaṇākāraparicchedakaṃ pana vipassanāñāṇaṃ ‘‘adhipaññā’’ti vuccati. Sā hi adhisīlaadhicittāni viya sīlacittānaṃ, sabbalokiyapaññānaṃ adhikā ceva uttamā ca, na ca vinā buddhuppādā loke pavattati. Tatopi ca maggaphalapaññāva adhipaññā.
现在为逐一说明,故说:「什么是增上戒学?于此,比丘具戒,具足巴帝摩卡防护而住……」等语。「于此」一词,是为了指出那位成就前方便成就、圆满一切戒类之人,并标明此教法为其所依,同时也遮止其他教法具有这些状态。正如世尊所说:「诸比丘,唯于此中,乃有沙门……外道众会之中,除那些沙门外,皆空无所有。」(《中部》1.139-140)「比丘」,标示那位戒圆满者。「具足巴帝摩卡防护而住」,标示其安住于巴帝摩卡律仪的状况。「住」,标示其具足与之相应的安住方式。「具足行处与行境」,标示那些资助巴帝摩卡律仪的法。「见微细罪亦生怖畏」,标示其于巴帝摩卡无有堕落。「受持」,标示其对诸学处无余领受。「学」,标示其具足学。「于诸学处」,标示所应学之法。显示巴利原文
Idāni ekekaṃ dassento ‘‘katamā adhisīlasikkhā – idha bhikkhu sīlavā hoti, pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto viharatī’’tiādimāha. Idhāti vacanaṃ pubbabhāgakaraṇīyasampadāya sampannassa sabbapakārasīlaparipūrakassa puggalassa sannissayabhūtasāsanaparidīpanaṃ, aññasāsanassa ca tathābhāvapaṭisedhanaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇo…pe… suññā parappavādā samaṇebhi aññehī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.139-140). Bhikkhūti tassa sīlassa paripūrakassa puggalassa paridīpanaṃ. Pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvutoti idamassa pātimokkhasaṃvare patiṭṭhitabhāvaparidīpanaṃ. Viharatīti idamassa tadanurūpavihārasamaṅgībhāvaparidīpanaṃ. Ācāragocarasampannoti idamassa pātimokkhasaṃvarassa upakārakadhammaparidīpanaṃ. Aṇumattesu vajjesu bhayadassāvīti idamassa pātimokkhato acavanadhammatāparidīpanaṃ. Samādāyāti idamassa sikkhāpadānaṃ anavasesato ādānaparidīpanaṃ. Sikkhatīti idamassa sikkhāya samaṅgībhāvaparidīpanaṃ. Sikkhāpadesūti idamassa sikkhitabbadhammaparidīpanaṃ.
此处,“bhikkhu”(比丘)因见轮回中的怖畏(bhayaṃ ikkhati)而得名为比丘。他因具备“sīla”(戒),故称“具戒者”(sīlavā)。所谓“戒”,是依“sīlana”(持戒之行)的意义而立名。那么,什么是持戒之行?即是“等持”(samādhāna),意指因身业等的善于戒行而不散乱;或是“支持”(upadhāraṇa),意指作为一切善法安立的依止。精通声明的论师们在此认可的就是这两种含义。然而,另有论师解释:“戒是以近持义、等持义、戒行义、头义、清凉义、吉祥义而名为戒。”显示巴利原文
Tattha bhikkhūti saṃsāre bhayaṃ ikkhatīti bhikkhu. Sīlamassa atthīti sīlavāti ettha sīlanti sīlanaṭṭhena sīlaṃ. Kimidaṃ sīlanaṃ nāma? Samādhānaṃ vā, kāyakammādīnaṃ susīlyavasena avippakiṇṇatāti attho. Upadhāraṇaṃ vā, kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ patiṭṭhāvasena ādhārabhāvoti attho. Etadeva hi ettha atthadvayaṃ saddalakkhaṇavidū anujānanti. Aññe pana ‘‘adhisevanaṭṭhena ācāraṭṭhena sīlanaṭṭhena siraṭṭhena sītalaṭṭhena sivaṭṭhena sīla’’nti vaṇṇayanti.
“持戒之行”即是戒的特相,纵然戒因种种差异而分为多类;
正如色的“可见性”即是色的特相,纵然色因种种差异而分为多类。
显示巴利原文 Sīlanaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ tassa, bhinnassāpi anekadhā; Sanidassanattaṃ rūpassa, yathā bhinnassanekadhā.
正如色处虽因青、黄等不同类别而有众多差别,但其可见性始终是它的相——因为在青等差别中,可见的性质从不会丧失。同样地,戒虽因思等差别而呈现出多种不同,但前面所说的以身业等的等持、以及作为善法安立依止的‘戒行’,正是它的相;因为纵使被思等差别所区分,这种等持与安立依止的状态也绝不丧失。如此,在说到它的相时——显示巴利原文
Yathā hi nīlapītādibhedenanekadhā bhinnassāpi rūpāyatanassa sanidassanattaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ nīlādibhedena bhinnassāpi sanidassanabhāvānatikkamanato. Tathā sīlassa cetanādibhedena anekadhā bhinnassāpi yadetaṃ kāyakammādīnaṃ samādhānavasena, kusalānañca dhammānaṃ patiṭṭhāvasena vuttaṃ sīlanaṃ, tadeva lakkhaṇaṃ cetanādibhedena bhinnassāpi samādhānapatiṭṭhābhāvānatikkamanato. Evaṃ lakkhaṇassa panassa –
Dussīlyaviddhaṃsanatā, anavajjaguṇo tathā;
所谓‘味’,是从作用成就的角度而说的。显示巴利原文
Kiccasampattiatthena, raso nāma pavuccati.
因此,应当了知:此名为‘戒’者,以作用的义理而言,其味为‘摧破恶戒’;以成就的义理而言,其味为‘无有过失’。显示巴利原文
Tasmā idaṃ sīlaṃ nāma kiccaṭṭhena rasena dussīlyaviddhaṃsanarasaṃ, sampattiatthena rasena anavajjarasanti veditabbaṃ.
戒以‘清净’为其现起,而它被智者们……
‘愧’与‘惭’,被赞为戒的‘立足处’。
显示巴利原文 Soceyyapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, tayidaṃ tassa viññubhi; Ottappañca hirī ceva, padaṭṭhānanti vaṇṇitaṃ.
而此戒,以所谓“身清净、语清净、意清净”的清净为现起——即以清净的状态显现出来,达到被认知把握的状态。惭与愧则被智者们赞叹为戒的足处,意为近因。因为有惭与愧时,戒才生起并安住;没有它们时,戒既不生起也不安住。如此具足这种状态者,便成为具戒者。应知这里所说的“戒”,对于远离杀生等恶行的人,或对于圆满实践仪轨的人,指的是思等诸法。这在《无碍解道》中已说过:“什么是戒?思是戒,心所法是戒,防护是戒,不犯是戒。”显示巴利原文
Tañhidaṃ sīlaṃ ‘‘kāyasoceyyaṃ vacīsoceyyaṃ manosoceyya’’nti evaṃ vuttasoceyyapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, soceyyabhāvena paccupaṭṭhāti gahaṇabhāvaṃ gacchati. Hirottappañca pana tassa viññūhi padaṭṭhānanti vaṇṇitaṃ, āsannakāraṇanti attho. Hirottappe hi sati sīlaṃ uppajjati ceva tiṭṭhati ca, asati neva uppajjati ceva na tiṭṭhati cāti evaṃvidhena sīlena sīlavā hoti. Etaṃ sīlaṃ nāma pāṇātipātādīhi vā viramantassa, vattapaṭipattiṃ vā pūrentassa cetanādayo dhammā veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ ‘‘kiṃ sīlanti? Cetanā sīlaṃ, cetasikaṃ sīlaṃ, saṃvaro sīlaṃ, avītikkamo sīla’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.39).
其中,“思是戒”:指远离杀生等者,或圆满行持仪轨者的思心所。“心所法是戒”:指远离杀生等者的离心所。再者,“思是戒”:指断除杀生等恶行的那七种业道思。“心所法是戒”:指如“他舍离贪欲,以离贪之心而安住”(《长部》1.217)等所说,在《相应部·大品》中所说的无贪、无瞋、正见等法。“防护是戒”:应知有五种防护——巴帝摩卡律仪、念防护、智防护、忍耐防护、精进防护。它们之间的差别将于后说明。“不犯是戒”:指受持戒律者在身、语上不发生违犯。在这四者中,防护戒与不犯戒,两者才是无歧义、直接意义上的戒。而思戒与心所法戒,应知是间接、譬喻意义上的戒。显示巴利原文
Tattha cetanā sīlaṃ nāma pāṇātipātādīhi vā viramantassa vattapaṭipattiṃ vā pūrentassa cetanā. Cetasikaṃ sīlaṃ nāma pāṇātipātādīhi viramantassa virati. Api ca cetanā sīlaṃ nāma pāṇātipātādīni pajahantassa sattakammapathacetanā. Cetasikaṃ sīlaṃ nāma ‘‘abhijjhaṃ pahāya vigatābhijjhena cetasā viharatī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.217) nayena saṃyuttamahāvagge vuttā anabhijjhābyāpādasammādiṭṭhidhammā. Saṃvaro sīlanti ettha pañcavidhena saṃvaro veditabbo – pātimokkhasaṃvaro satisaṃvaro ñāṇasaṃvaro khantisaṃvaro vīriyasaṃvaro. Tassa nānākaraṇaṃ upari āvi bhavissati. Avītikkamo sīlanti samādinnasīlassa kāyikavācasiko avītikkamo. Ettha ca saṃvarasīlaṃ, avītikkamasīlanti idameva nippariyāyato sīlaṃ. Cetanāsīlaṃ, cetasikaṃ sīlanti pariyāyato sīlanti veditabbaṃ.
“巴帝摩卡”:即学处之戒。因为护持它、守护它的人,能因此从地狱等苦中解脱、释放,故称为巴帝摩卡。“以巴帝摩卡防护而防护”:即具足巴帝摩卡防护戒。“行处具足”:即于行仪与行处具足。“于微细”:即于极微小的。“过恶”:即于不善法。“见怖畏”:即见到怖畏。“正受持后”:即正确地受持之后。“于学处学”:即逐条受持那些学处而学。再者,“正受持后,于学处学”的另一层意思是:凡是于学处中、于所学分中,所应学的身业或心业,这一切都总摄受持而学。显示巴利原文
Pātimokkhanti sikkhāpadasīlaṃ. Tañhi yo naṃ pāti rakkhati, taṃ mokkheti moceti āpāyikādīhi dukkhehi, tasmā ‘‘pātimokkha’’nti vuttaṃ. Pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvutoti pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlena samannāgato. Ācāragocarasampannoti ācārena ceva gocarena ca sampanno. Aṇumattesūti appamattakesu. Vajjesūti akusaladhammesu. Bhayadassāvīti bhayadassī. Samādāyāti sammā ādiyitvā. Sikkhati sikkhāpadesūti taṃ taṃ sikkhāpadaṃ samādiyitvā sikkhati. Api ca samādāya sikkhati sikkhāpadesūti yaṃkiñci sikkhāpadesu sikkhākoṭṭhāsesu sikkhitabbaṃ kāyikaṃ vā cetasikaṃ vā, taṃ sabbaṃ samādāya sikkhati.
「小戒蕴」:指桑喀地谢沙等所余的戒蕴。「大戒蕴」:指波罗夷等无余的戒蕴。然而,因为比丘依巴帝摩卡戒而安立于教法中,故称之为「基」。或者,比丘于此上安立,善法即于此上安立,故为「基」。此义应依诸经了知,如:“有智之人,依戒而立”(《相应部》1.23, 192),“大王,戒有一切善法之立足相”(《弥兰陀王问经》2.1.9),“大王,善立于戒者……一切善法皆不退失”(《弥兰陀王问经》2.1.9)等。显示巴利原文
Khuddako sīlakkhandhoti saṅghādisesādisāvaseso sīlakkhandho. Mahantoti pārājikādiniravaseso. Yasmā pana pātimokkhasīlena bhikkhu sāsane patiṭṭhāti nāma , tasmā taṃ ‘‘patiṭṭhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Patiṭṭhahati vā ettha bhikkhu, kusalā dhammā eva vā ettha patiṭṭhahantīti patiṭṭhā. Ayamattho ‘‘sīle patiṭṭhāya naro sapañño’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.23, 192) ca, ‘‘patiṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ, mahārāja, sīlaṃ sabbesaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammāna’’nti (mi. pa. 2.1.9) ca , ‘‘sīle patiṭṭhito kho, mahārāja…pe… sabbe kusalā dhammā na parihāyantī’’ti (mi. pa. 2.1.9) ca ādisuttavasena veditabbo.
此戒以最先生起之义而称为「初」。此义亦经中说:“故于此,优低耶,你当于善法之初即清净。何为善法之初?即极清净之戒与正直之见。”(《相应部》5.382)譬如,欲建城的建筑师,先清理城址,之后才以街道、四衢、十字路口等划分而建城。同样,瑜伽行者先在最初清净其戒,之后才亲证止、观、道、果、涅槃。又如,染匠先用三种碱水洗净衣服,再随心所欲地在清净的衣服上染色;又如,巧画师欲作画,先于壁上作预备,之后才现起图像。同样,瑜伽行者先在最初清净其戒,之后才亲证止、观等法。戒因此被称为「初」。显示巴利原文
Tadetaṃ pubbuppattiatthena ādi. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘tasmātiha tvaṃ uttiya ādimeva visodhehi kusalesu dhammesu. Ko cādi kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ, sīlañca suvisuddhaṃ diṭṭhi ca ujukā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.382). Yathā hi nagaravaḍḍhakī nagaraṃ māpetukāmo paṭhamaṃ nagaraṭṭhānaṃ sodheti, tato aparabhāge vīthicatukkasiṅghāṭakādiparicchedena vibhajitvāva nagaraṃ māpeti. Evameva yogāvacaro ādito sīlaṃ visodheti, tato aparabhāge samādhivipassanāmaggaphalanibbānāni sacchikaroti. Yathā vā pana rajako paṭhamaṃ tīhi khārehi vatthaṃ dhovitvā parisuddhe vatthe yadicchakaṃ raṅgajātaṃ upaneti, yathā vā pana cheko cittakāro rūpaṃ likhitukāmo āditova bhittiparikammaṃ karoti, tato aparabhāge rūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti. Evameva yogāvacaro āditova sīlaṃ visodhetvā aparabhāge samathavipassanādayo dhamme sacchikaroti. Tasmā sīlaṃ ‘‘ādī’’ti vuttaṃ.
此戒,因与足相似而为「行」。因为足被称为‘caraṇa’。譬如,被斩断足的人,不会生起往某方行走的加行,唯足具足者才会生起;同样,若人戒破损、有缺、不圆满,则其趣向涅槃的智行不成;若人戒不破损、无缺、圆满,则其趣向涅槃的智行得成。故戒被称为「行」。显示巴利原文
Tadetaṃ caraṇasarikkhatāya caraṇaṃ. Caraṇāti hi pādā vuccanti. Yathā hi chinnacaraṇassa purisassa disaṃ gamanābhisaṅkhāro na jāyati, paripuṇṇapādasseva jāyati, evameva yassa sīlaṃ bhinnaṃ hoti khaṇḍaṃ aparipuṇṇaṃ, tassa nibbānagamanāya ñāṇagamanaṃ na sampajjati. Yassa pana taṃ abhinnaṃ hoti akhaṇḍaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ, tassa nibbānagamanāya ñāṇagamanaṃ sampajjati. Tasmā sīlaṃ ‘‘caraṇa’’nti vuttaṃ.
戒,依调伏义而称为“调伏”,依防护义而称为“防护”。由此二者,既说明了戒的调伏,也说明了戒的防护。词义:调伏——它能调伏违犯的躁动,或调御此人,不令其因违犯而躁动,故名为调伏。防护——它能关闭、堵塞违犯的入口,故名为防护。显示巴利原文
Tadetaṃ saṃyamanavasena saṃyamo. Saṃvaraṇavasena saṃvaroti ubhayenāpi sīlasaṃyamo ceva sīlasaṃvaro ca kathito. Vacanattho panettha saṃyameti vītikkamavipphandanaṃ , puggalaṃ vā saṃyameti vītikkamavasena tassa vipphandituṃ na detīti saṃyamo. Vītikkamassa pavesanadvāraṃ saṃvarati pidahatīti saṃvaro.
“Mokkha”:指最上的,或如同口。譬如,众生四种食从口而入,遍润身体诸肢;同样,瑜伽行者四种地的善法由戒之口而入,成就义利。故称为“mokkha”。“于首要中为善者”即“pāmokkha”,意为前行、最胜、首要。应知:所谓“为证得善法等至”,即是证得四种地善法,它是前行、最胜、首要。显示巴利原文
Mokkhanti uttamaṃ mukhabhūtaṃ vā. Yathā hi sattānaṃ catubbidho āhāro mukhena pavisitvā aṅgamaṅgāni pharati, evaṃ yoginopi catubhūmakakusalaṃ sīlamukhena pavisitvā atthasiddhiṃ sampādeti. Tena ‘‘mokkha’’nti. Pamukhe sādhūti pāmokkhaṃ, pubbaṅgamaṃ seṭṭhaṃ padhānanti attho. Kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ samāpattiyāti catubhūmakakusalānaṃ paṭilābhatthāya pāmokkhaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ seṭṭhaṃ padhānanti veditabbaṃ.
“唯独远离诸欲”:即已离欲、已无欲、已舍离欲。此处的“eva”字应知为决定之义。因其为决定义,故在入初禅而住时,虽然诸欲已不存在,仍能显示诸欲是初禅的对立面,以及唯有通过舍离诸欲才能证得初禅。如何显示?当以“唯独远离诸欲”作出决定时,即表明:此禅那必定以诸欲为对立面,若诸欲还在,此禅那便不会生起,犹如黑暗存在时光明便不显现;唯有舍离诸欲方能证得此禅那,犹如舍弃此岸方能抵达彼岸。因此说为决定。显示巴利原文
Viviccevakāmehīti kāmehi vivicca vinā hutvā apakkamitvā. Yo panāyamettha evakāro, so niyamatthoti veditabbo. Yasmā ca niyamattho, tasmā tasmiṃ paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharaṇasamaye avijjamānānampi kāmānaṃ tassa paṭhamajjhānassa paṭipakkhabhāvaṃ kāmapariccāgeneva cassa adhigamaṃ dīpeti. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Vivicceva kāmehī’’ti evañhi niyame kariyamāne idaṃ paññāyati, nūnimassa jhānassa kāmā paṭipakkhabhūtā, yesu sati idaṃ na pavattati andhakāre sati padīpobhāso viya, tesaṃ pariccāgeneva cassa adhigamo hoti orimatīrapariccāgena pārimatīrasseva. Tasmā niyamaṃ karotīti.
于此,或许有人会问:“为何这个‘eva’字仅出现在前句(vivicceva kāmehi),而未出现在后句(akusalehi dhammehi)?难道可以不远离不善法,便进入并安住于禅那吗?”其实不应如此看待。此字之所以在前句宣说,是因为初禅乃从诸欲出离(nissaraṇa)之故。初禅既已超越欲界,又是欲贪(kāmarāga)的对治,因此它正是诸欲的出离。正如经中所说:“这就是诸欲的出离,也就是出离(nekkhamma)。”(《如是语》72)不过,在后句中,也应像“在此有沙门,在此有第二沙门”(《中部》1.139)的用例那样,将“eva”字引来使用,说成“唯独远离不善法”(vivicceva akusalehi dhammehi)。因为事实上,若未远离那些被称为盖(nīvaraṇa)的不善法,便不可能进入并安住于禅那。因此,应当在这两个分句中都见此字:“唯独远离诸欲,唯独远离不善法”。而在两个分句中,通过通用的“远离”(viviccā)这一说法,即可涵盖……显示巴利原文
Tattha siyā ‘‘kasmā panesa pubbapadeyeva vutto na uttarapade, kiṃ akusalehi dhammehi aviviccāpi jhānaṃ upasampajja vihareyyā’’ti? Na kho panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Taṃnissaraṇato hi pubbapade eva esa vutto. Kāmadhātusamatikkamanato hi kāmarāgapaṭipakkhato ca idaṃ jhānaṃ kāmānameva nissaraṇaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘kāmānametaṃ nissaraṇaṃ yadidaṃ nekkhamma’’nti (itivu. 72). Uttarapadepi pana yathā ‘‘idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇo, idha dutiyo samaṇo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.139) ettha evakāro ānetvā vuccati, evaṃ vattabbo. Na hi sakkā ito aññehipi nīvaraṇasaṅkhātehi akusalehi dhammehi avivicca jhānaṃ upasampajja viharituṃ. Tasmā vivicceva kāmehi vivicceva akusalehi dhammehīti evaṃ padadvayepi esa daṭṭhabbo. Padadvayepi ca kiñcāpi viviccāti iminā sādhāraṇavacanena tadaṅgavivekādayo kāyavivekādayo ca sabbepi vivekā saṅgahaṃ gacchanti, tathāpi pubbabhāge kāyavivekacittavivekavikkhambhanavivekā daṭṭhabbā. Lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe kāyavivekacittavivekasamucchedavivekanissaraṇavivekā.
而通过“诸欲”(kāmehi)一词,应当知道,它既涵盖了此《分别论》中以“何谓事欲?即可爱之色……”等方式所说的事欲(vatthukāma),也涵盖了同《分别论》中以“欲求是欲,贪是欲,欲贪是欲,思惟是欲,贪是欲,思惟贪是欲”等方式所说的烦恼欲(kilesakāma)。当知此词统摄这一切。若确实如此,“唯独远离诸欲”(vivicceva kāmehi)的含义,也就通于“也唯独远离事欲”。由此,便说明了身远离(kāyaviveka)。显示巴利原文
Kāmehīti iminā pana padena ye ca idha ‘‘katame vatthukāmā manāpikā rūpā’’tiādinā nayena vatthukāmā vuttā, ye ca idheva vibhaṅge ‘‘chando kāmo rāgo kāmo chandarāgo kāmo saṅkappo kāmo rāgo kāmo saṅkapparāgo kāmo’’ti evaṃ kilesakāmā vuttā, te sabbepi saṅgahitā icceva daṭṭhabbā. Evañhi sati vivicceva kāmehīti vatthukāmehipi viviccevāti attho yujjati. Tena kāyaviveko vutto hoti.
“远离不善法”(Vivicca akusalehi dhammehi)的含义,也就通于“远离烦恼欲,或远离一切不善法”。由此,便说明了心远离(cittaviveka)。在此,由前句说远离事欲,阐明了舍离欲乐;由后句说远离烦恼欲,阐明了持取出离乐(nekkhamasukha)。正是这样,通过宣说远离事欲与烦恼欲这二者本身,前句表明舍弃染污之事(saṃkilesavatthu),后句表明舍弃染污(saṃkilesa)本身;前句表明舍离贪的根源,后句表明舍离痴的根源;前句阐明加行的清净(payogasuddhi),后句阐明意乐的培育。当知这便是对“诸欲”(kāmehi)一词所涉诸欲中,就事欲方面(vatthukāmapakkha)所作的解释道理。显示巴利原文
Vivicca akusalehi dhammehīti kilesakāmehi sabbākusalehi vā viviccāti attho yujjati. Tena cittaviveko vutto hoti. Purimena cettha vatthukāmehi vivekavacanato eva kāmasukhapariccāgo, dutiyena kilesakāmehi vivekavacanato nekkhammasukhapariggaho vibhāvito hoti . Evaṃ vatthukāmakilesakāmavivekavacanatoyeva ca etesaṃ paṭhamena saṃkilesavatthuppahānaṃ, dutiyena saṃkilesappahānaṃ. Paṭhamena lolabhāvassa hetupariccāgo, dutiyena bālabhāvassa. Paṭhamena ca payogasuddhi, dutiyena āsayaposanaṃ vibhāvitaṃ hotīti ñātabbaṃ . Esa tāva nayo ‘‘kāmehī’’ti ettha vuttakāmesu vatthukāmapakkhe .
从烦恼欲的角度,欲、贪等种种分类,所指的实为爱欲,统称之为“欲”。此爱欲虽亦属不善法,但在《分别论》中,以“何者为爱欲?即欲……”等方式,从它是禅那所对治的角度而被单独列出。或可说是因其为烦恼欲,故在前半句“诸欲”中宣说;因其属不善法,故在后半句“不善法”中宣说。又因其种类繁多,故不说单数“欲”而说复数“诸欲”。尽管还有其他法可归为不善法,但《分别论》为显示与上层禅支相违对治的关系,唯举诸盖:“哪些是不善法?即爱欲……”等。因诸盖是禅支的相违者、对立者,而禅支正是它们的能对治者、破坏者、摧毁者。正如《藏论》所说:“定是对治爱欲的,喜是对治嗔恚的,寻是对治昏沉睡眠的……”显示巴利原文
Kilesakāmapakkhe pana chandoti ca rāgoti ca evamādīhi anekabhedo kāmacchandova ‘‘kāmo’’ti adhippeto. So ca akusalapariyāpannopi samāno ‘‘tattha katamo kāmacchando, kāmo’’tiādinā nayena vibhaṅge jhānapaṭipakkhato visuṃ vutto. Kilesakāmattā vā purimapade vutto, akusalapariyāpannattā dutiyapade. Anekabhedato cassa kāmatoti avatvā kāmehīti vuttaṃ. Aññesampi ca dhammānaṃ akusalabhāve vijjamāne ‘‘tattha katame akusalā dhammā, kāmacchando’’tiādinā nayena vibhaṅge (vibha. 564) uparijhānaṅgānaṃ paccanīkapaṭipakkhabhāvadassanato nīvaraṇāneva vuttāni. Nīvaraṇāni hi jhānaṅgapaccanīkāni tesaṃ jhānaṅgāneva paṭipakkhāni, viddhaṃsakāni vighātakānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tathā hi ‘‘samādhi kāmacchandassa paṭipakkho, pīti byāpādassa, vitakko thinamiddhassa, sukhaṃ uddhaccakukkuccassa, vicāro vicikicchāyā’’ti peṭake vuttaṃ.
这样一来,在这里,通过「唯独远离诸欲」(vivicceva kāmehi)这句,就说明了对于爱欲的镇伏远离(vikkhambhanaviveka);通过「远离不善法」(vivicca akusalehi dhammehi)这句,就说明了对于五种盖的镇伏远离。或者,用摄未摄者(aggahitaggahaṇa)的角度来说,前句对治爱欲,后句对治其余的盖。同样地,前句对治三种不善根中,以五种欲(pañcakāmaguṇa)分类为对象的贪(lobha);后句对治以瞋恚事(āghātavatthu)分类等为对象的瞋(dosa)和痴(moha)。或者,在瀑流(ogha)等法中,前句对治欲流(kāmogha)、欲轭(kāmayoga)、欲漏(kāmāsava)、欲取(kāmupādāna)、贪求(abhijjhā)身系(kāyagantha)、欲贪(kāmarāga)结(saṃyojana);后句对治其余的瀑流、轭、漏、取、身系、结。前句对治渴爱(taṇhā)及与之相应的心所;后句对治无明(avijjā)及与之相应的心所。还应当知道,或者按心的生起来说,前句说明了对八种与贪相应(lobhasampayutta)的不善心的镇伏远离,后句说明了对其他四种不善心的镇伏远离。显示巴利原文
Evamettha vivicceva kāmehīti iminā kāmacchandassa vikkhambhanaviveko vutto hoti, vivicca akusalehi dhammehīti iminā pañcannampi nīvaraṇānaṃ. Aggahitaggahaṇena pana paṭhamena kāmacchandassa, dutiyena sesanīvaraṇānaṃ. Tathā paṭhamena tīsu akusalamūlesu pañcakāmaguṇabhedavisayassa lobhassa, dutiyena āghātavatthubhedādivisayānaṃ dosamohānaṃ. Oghādīsu vā dhammesu paṭhamena kāmoghakāmayogakāmāsavakāmupādānaabhijjhākāyaganthakāmarāgasaṃyojanānaṃ, dutiyena avasesaoghayogāsavaupādānaganthasaṃyojanānaṃ. Paṭhamena ca taṇhāya taṃsampayuttakānañca, dutiyena avijjāya taṃsampayuttakānañca. Api ca paṭhamena lobhasampayuttaaṭṭhacittuppādānaṃ, dutiyena sesānaṃ catunnaṃ akusalacittuppādānaṃ vikkhambhanaviveko vutto hotīti veditabbo.
至此,已说明初禅的断除支,今为说明相应支,而说“有寻有伺”等。其中,寻的特相是令心投向所缘,伺的特相是持续审察所缘。二者虽在某些情况下不相离,但寻以粗重及先行为义,如钟的初击,是心对所缘的初次投向;伺以微细及随转审察为性,如钟的余响,是其后的相续运作。在此,寻带有激荡,在最初心生起时,如心之悸动,恰似欲飞向天空的鸟拍动双翅,又如心随香气趋向莲花、迎面扑去的蜜蜂。伺则是恬静的运作,心无过分激荡,犹如已飞于空中的鸟展翅滑翔,又如已抵莲花上方盘旋的蜜蜂。显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā ca paṭhamassa jhānassa pahānaṅgaṃ dassetvā idāni sampayogaṅgaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘savitakkaṃ savicāra’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ārammaṇe cittassa abhiniropanalakkhaṇo vitakko, ārammaṇānumajjanalakkhaṇo vicāro. Santepi ca nesaṃ katthaci aviyoge oḷārikaṭṭhena pubbaṅgamaṭṭhena ca ghaṇḍābhighāto viya cetaso paṭhamābhinipāto vitakko, sukhumaṭṭhena anumajjanasabhāvena ca ghaṇḍānuravo viya anupabandho vicāro. Vipphāravā cettha vitakko paṭhamuppattikāle paripphandanabhūto cittassa, ākāse uppatitukāmassa pakkhino pakkhavikkhepo viya, padumābhimukhapāto viya ca gandhānubandhacetaso bhamarassa. Santavutti vicāro nātiparipphandanabhāvo cittassa, ākāse uppatitassa pakkhino pakkhappasāraṇaṃ viya, paribbhamanaṃ viya ca padumābhimukhapatitassa bhamarassa padumassa uparibhāge.
然而,《二集注》中说:'犹如在空中飞行的大鸟,以双翅捕捉风后,收拢翅膀滑翔而行——如此,以令心投向所缘的方式生起的是寻;犹如为了捕捉风而扇动翅膀飞行——如此,以持续审察的方式生起的是伺。'这种说法只有在无间相续生起时才合理。不过,它们的差别在初禅与第二禅中变得明显。又,好比一个人一只手紧紧抓住沾有污垢的铜器,另一只手用沾了粉、油和刷帚苗的东西擦拭,紧抓之手如寻,擦拭之手如伺。同样,陶匠用棍棒击打使轮子转动而制作陶器时,向下压住的手如寻,来回移动的手如伺。同样,画圆时,固定在中心的针如投向所缘的寻,在外围旋转的针如持续审察的伺。如此,此禅那与寻、伺一同生起,犹如树与花、果,因此此禅那被称为'有寻有伺'。显示巴利原文
Dukanipātaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘ākāse gacchato mahāsakuṇassa ubhohi pakkhehi vātaṃ gahetvā pakkhe sannisīdāpetvā gamanaṃ viya ārammaṇe cetaso abhiniropanabhāvena pavatto vitakko, vātaggahaṇatthaṃ pakkhe phandāpayamānassa gamanaṃ viya anumajjanabhāvena pavatto vicāro’’ti vuttaṃ. Taṃ anuppabandhena pavattiyaṃ yujjati. So pana nesaṃ viseso paṭhamadutiyajjhānesu pākaṭo hoti. Api ca malaggahitaṃ kaṃsabhājanaṃ ekena hatthena daḷhaṃ gahetvā itarena hatthena cuṇṇatelavālaṇḍupakena parimajjantassa daḷhaggahaṇahattho viya vitakko. Parimajjanahattho viya vicāro. Tathā kumbhakārassa daṇḍappahārena cakkaṃ bhamayitvā bhājanaṃ karontassa uppīḷanahattho viya vitakko. Ito cito ca sañcaraṇahattho viya vicāro. Tathā maṇḍalaṃ karontassa majjhe sannirumbhitvā ṭhitakaṇṭako viya abhiniropano vitakko. Bahi paribbhamanakaṇṭako viya anumajjamāno vicāro. Iti iminā ca vitakkena iminā ca vicārena saha vattati rukkho viya pupphena ca phalena cāti idaṃ jhānaṃ ‘‘savitakkaṃ savicāra’’nti vuccati.
'远离所生的':此处,远离即离,意为五盖的离去。或者,远离是指已远离的状态,即已远离五盖、与禅那相应的法聚。因此,从远离中生起的,或在那远离中生起的,称为'远离所生的'。'喜乐':此处,令满足故为喜,以欢喜为特相。此喜有五种:小喜、刹那喜、涌起喜、激动喜、遍满喜。显示巴利原文
Vivekajanti ettha vivitti viveko, nīvaraṇavigamoti attho. Vivittoti vā viveko, nīvaraṇavivitto jhānasampayuttadhammarāsīti attho. Tasmā vivekā, tasmiṃ vā viveke jātanti vivekajaṃ. Pītisukhanti ettha piṇayatīti pīti, sā sampiyāyanalakkhaṇā. Sā panesā khuddikāpīti , khaṇikāpīti, okkantikāpīti, ubbegāpīti, pharaṇāpītīti pañcavidhā hoti.
其中,小喜仅能令身毛竖立。刹那喜于刹那之间生起,犹如闪电。涌起喜如同海岸的波浪,屡屡冲击身体而后破碎。激动喜强烈有力,能使身体扬起,乃至腾跃空中。显示巴利原文
Tattha khuddikāpīti sarīre lomahaṃsamattameva kātuṃ sakkoti. Khaṇikāpīti khaṇe khaṇe vijjuppādasadisā hoti. Okkantikāpīti samuddatīraṃ vīci viya, kāyaṃ okkamitvā okkamitvā bhijjati. Ubbegāpīti balavatī hoti, kāyaṃ uddhaggaṃ katvā ākāse laṅghāpanappamāṇapattā.
遍满喜力量极强。当它生起时,整个身体便充遍扩展,犹如吹满气的皮囊,又如被大水涌入的山谷,遍体浸透。然而,此五种喜在握持所缘、趋于成熟时,能圆满两种轻安——身轻安与心轻安;轻安在握持所缘、趋于成熟时,能圆满两种乐——身乐与心乐;乐在握持所缘、趋于成熟时,能圆满三种定——刹那定、近行定与安止定。在这些喜中,唯有那种成为安止定的基础、增长后成为定相应支的遍满喜,才是此处所指的喜。显示巴利原文
Pharaṇāpīti atibalavatī hoti. Tāya hi uppannāya sakalasarīraṃ dhamitvā pūritavatthi viya mahatā udakoghena pakkhandapabbatakucchi viya ca anuparipphuṭaṃ hoti. Sā panesā pañcavidhā pīti gabbhaṃ gaṇhantī paripākaṃ gacchantī duvidhaṃ passaddhiṃ paripūreti kāyapassaddhiñca cittapassaddhiñca, passaddhi gabbhaṃ gaṇhantī paripākaṃ gacchantī duvidhampi sukhaṃ paripūreti kāyikaṃ cetasikañca, sukhaṃ gabbhaṃ gaṇhantaṃ paripākaṃ gacchantaṃ tividhaṃ samādhiṃ paripūreti khaṇikasamādhiṃ upacārasamādhiṃ appanāsamādhiñcāti. Tāsu yā appanāsamādhissa mūlaṃ hutvā vaḍḍhamānā samādhisampayogaṅgatā pharaṇāpīti, ayaṃ imasmiṃ atthe adhippetā pītīti.
另一种则是‘乐’:能令欣悦,故称为乐,意思是令其生起者变得快乐。或者,乐即安乐,又因能极好地吞噬、破坏身心的疾患,故名为乐,这是悦受的名称。它以愉悦为特相。虽然在某些情况下喜与乐不可分离,但对获得可意所缘的满足是喜,对所得之味的体验是乐。有喜之处必有乐,有乐之处则未必有喜。喜属于行蕴,乐属于受蕴。犹如旷野中疲惫之人,见到或听到林边的水,便如喜;进入树荫、饮水、用水,便如乐。应当知道,这是依各时分中明显的特征而说的。如此,此禅那具有此喜与此乐,或者说,此喜与此乐存在于这禅那之中,因此这个禅那被称为‘具喜乐的’。显示巴利原文
Itaraṃ pana sukhayatīti sukhaṃ, yassa uppajjati, taṃ sukhitaṃ karotīti attho. Sukhanaṃ vā sukhaṃ, suṭṭhu vā khādati khaṇati ca kāyacittābādhanti sukhaṃ, somanassavedanāyetaṃ nāmaṃ. Taṃ sātalakkhaṇaṃ. Santepi ca nesaṃ katthaci avippayoge iṭṭhārammaṇapaṭilābhatuṭṭhi pīti, paṭiladdharasānubhavanaṃ sukhaṃ. Yattha pīti, tattha sukhaṃ, yattha sukhaṃ, tattha na niyamato pīti. Saṅkhārakkhandhasaṅgahitā pīti, vedanākkhandhasaṅgahitaṃ sukhaṃ. Kantārakhinnassa vanantodakadassanasavanesu viya pīti, vanacchāyappavesanaudakaparibhogesu viya sukhaṃ. Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ samaye pākaṭabhāvato cetaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Iti ayañca pīti idañca sukhaṃ assa jhānassa, asmiṃ vā jhāne atthīti idaṃ jhānaṃ ‘‘pītisukha’’nti vuccati.
又或者,喜与乐合称‘喜乐’,就如‘法与律’等复合词。这个禅那拥有由远离所生的喜与乐,或者说,由远离所生的喜与乐存在于这禅那中,因此也可称为‘由远离所生的喜乐’。正如这个禅那是远离所生的一样,此处的喜乐同样只是远离所生,并且禅那具足它。因此,即便不采用省略的复合词形式,直接以一个词说为‘由远离所生的喜乐’,也是合理的。显示巴利原文
Atha vā pīti ca sukhañca pītisukhaṃ dhammavinayādayo viya. Vivekajaṃ pītisukhaṃ assa jhānassa, asmiṃ vā jhāne atthīti evampi vivekajaṃpītisukhaṃ. Yatheva hi jhānaṃ, evaṃ pītisukhampettha vivekajameva hoti, tañcassa atthi, tasmā alopasamāsaṃ katvā ekapadeneva ‘‘vivekajaṃpītisukha’’ntipi vattuṃ yujjati.
「初」:因在次第计数中位居第一,故称初;亦指此为最初生起者,故名为初。「禅那」:禅那有两种,即「观所缘禅那」与「观相禅那」。其中,八种等至因密切观察地遍等所缘,故称「观所缘禅那」;观、道、果则称「观相禅那」。此中,观因密切观察无常等相,故为观相禅那;道由借观完成其作用而得成就,故为观相禅那;果因密切观察灭谛的真实相,故为观相禅那。就此处而言,在前行阶段指观所缘禅那,于出世间道刹那则指观相禅那。是故当知,禅那由「观所缘」「观相」及「烧尽敌对(诸盖)」三种意义而得此名。显示巴利原文
Paṭhamanti gaṇanānupubbatā paṭhamaṃ, idaṃ paṭhamaṃ uppannantipi paṭhamaṃ. Jhānanti duvidhaṃ jhānaṃ ārammaṇūpanijjhānaṃ lakkhaṇūpanijjhānañcāti. Tattha aṭṭha samāpattiyo pathavīkasiṇādiārammaṇaṃ upanijjhāyantīti ārammaṇūpanijjhānanti saṅkhyaṃ gatā. Vipassanāmaggaphalāni pana lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ nāma. Tattha vipassanā aniccādilakkhaṇassa upanijjhānato lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ. Vipassanāya katakiccassa maggena ijjhanato maggo lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ, phalaṃ pana nirodhasaccaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ upanijjhāyatīti lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ. Tesu idha pubbabhāge ārammaṇūpanijjhānaṃ, lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ adhippetaṃ. Tasmā ārammaṇūpanijjhānato ca lakkhaṇūpanijjhānato ca paccanīkajhāpanato ca jhānanti veditabbaṃ.
「具足」:即已趋近、已到达之意;或作「令具足后」解,即已成就。「住」:谓以与之相应的威仪而安住;意即成就前述禅那者,使其自身之行住坐卧及活动得以圆满。显示巴利原文
Upasampajjāti upagantvā, pāpuṇitvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Upasampādayitvā vā, nipphādetvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Viharatīti tadanurūpena iriyāpathavihārena iriyati, vuttappakārajhānasamaṅgī hutvā attabhāvassa iriyanaṃ vuttiṃ abhinipphādeti.
此初禅已离五支、具足五支、具三种善、成就十种相。其中,由断除欲贪、瞋恚、惛眠、掉悔、疑此五种盖,故当知其为「五支已离」。若这些盖未断,禅那便不能生起,故称它们为禅那的「舍离之支」。虽于禅那刹那,其余不善法亦被断除,然唯独这些盖是禅那的特别障碍。盖因心被欲贪所诱、驰逐种种境时,无法于单一所缘得定;或被欲贪所败之心,不愿走上出离欲界之道。被瞋恚所冲击、于所缘心生违逆者,则不能无间相续地运作。被惛眠所压伏,其心便失却堪任。被掉悔所驱使,心则不能寂静而动摇散乱。被疑所害,其心便不肯登上能证禅那的修行之乘。是故,这些盖独为禅那的障碍,才被称为「舍离之支」。显示巴利原文
Taṃ panetaṃ paṭhamajjhānaṃ pañcaṅgavippahīnaṃ pañcaṅgasamannāgataṃ tividhakalyāṇaṃ, dasalakkhaṇasampannaṃ. Tattha kāmacchando byāpādo thinamiddhaṃ uddhaccakukkuccaṃ vicikicchāti imesaṃ pañcannaṃ nīvaraṇānaṃ pahānavasena pañcaṅgavippahīnatā veditabbā. Na hi etesu appahīnesu jhānaṃ uppajjati. Tenassetāni pahānaṅgānīti vuccanti. Kiñcāpi hi jhānakkhaṇe aññepi akusalā dhammā pahīyanti, tathāpi etāneva visesena jhānantarāyakarāni. Kāmacchandena hi nānāvisayappalobhitaṃ cittaṃ na ekattārammaṇe samādhiyati, kāmacchandābhibhūtaṃ vā, taṃ na kāmadhātuppahānāya paṭipadaṃ paṭipajjati. Byāpādena vā ārammaṇe paṭihaññamānaṃ na nirantaraṃ pavattati. Thinamiddhābhibhūtaṃ akammaññaṃ hoti. Uddhaccakukkuccaparetaṃ avūpasantameva hutvā paribbhamati. Vicikicchāya upahataṃ jhānādhigamasādhikaṃ paṭipadaṃ nārohati. Iti visesena jhānantarāyakarattā etāneva pahānaṅgānīti vuttāni.
然而,由于寻将心导向并安置于所缘,伺则使其持续系念于所缘,依于寻与伺,那已修得无散乱加行的人,心便成就了加行的善巧;由此,喜使心喜悦,乐令身增益。接着,在寻的导向、伺的持续、喜的喜悦、乐的增益这些力量的摄助下,与它们相应的其余诸法中的心一境性,便平等、正直地安立于单一所缘之上。因此,由于寻、伺、喜、乐、心一境性这五者的生起,当知此禅那“五支具足”。因为这五者生起时,禅那即称为“已生起的禅那”,所以这些便是它的“具足五支”。由此不应认为,在五支具足之外,还另有某个名为“禅那”的实体。然而,如同从支分的角度说“四支军队”、“五支乐器”、“八支圣道”一样,应知这里也只是从支分的角度,称之为“五支”或“五支具足”的。显示巴利原文
Yasmā pana vitakko ārammaṇe cittaṃ abhiniropeti, vicāro anupabandhati, tehi avikkhepāya sampāditapayogassa cetaso payogasampattisambhavā pīti pīṇanaṃ sukhañca upabrūhanaṃ karoti. Athassa sesasampayuttadhammā etehi abhiniropanānubandhanapīṇanupabrūhanehi anuggahitā ekaggatā ekattārammaṇe samaṃ sammā ca ādhiyati. Tasmā vitakko vicāro pīti sukhaṃ cittekaggatāti imesaṃ pañcannaṃ uppattivasena pañcaṅgasamannāgatatā veditabbā. Uppannesu hi etesu pañcasu jhānaṃ uppannaṃ nāma hoti. Tenassa etāni pañcaṅgasamannāgatānīti vuccanti. Tasmā na etehi samannāgataṃ aññadeva jhānaṃ nāma atthīti gahetabbaṃ. Yathā pana aṅgamattavaseneva caturaṅginī senā, pañcaṅgikaṃ tūriyaṃ, aṭṭhaṅgiko ca maggoti vuccati, evamidampi aṅgamattavaseneva pañcaṅgikanti vā pañcaṅgasamannāgatanti vā vuccatīti veditabbaṃ.
这五支在近行定的刹那虽说也有,但近行定中的它们,仅比平常的心更强。而在(安止定)这里,它们比近行定中的更为强盛,已达到色界禅那的特征,圆满成就。因为在此处,寻是以极其清晰的方式,将心导向并安置于所缘而生起;伺则是极密切地紧随、抚触所缘;喜与乐遍满全身,正如世尊所说:“他的全身,没有一处不被由远离所生的喜乐所遍满。”心一境性也如同上方的盒盖与下方的盒盖密合一般,触对所缘而生起。这便是它们与其余(近行)诸支的差别。其中,心一境性虽然在“有寻有伺”那段经文中未被列出名称,但在《分别论》中说:“禅那即是寻、伺、喜、乐、心一境性”,因此它确实是禅支。因为世尊是以那样的意趣作简略说明,而此意趣在《分别论》中已予以阐明。显示巴利原文
Etāni ca pañcaṅgāni kiñcāpi upacārakkhaṇepi atthi, atha kho upacāre pakaticittato balavatarāni. Idha pana upacāratopi balavatarāni rūpāvacaralakkhaṇappattāni nipphannāni. Ettha hi vitakko suvisadena ākārena ārammaṇe cittaṃ abhiniropayamāno uppajjati. Vicāro ativiya ārammaṇaṃ anumajjamāno. Pītisukhaṃ sabbāvantampi kāyaṃ pharamānaṃ . Tenevāha – ‘‘nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa vivekajena pītisukhena apphuṭaṃ hotī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.226). Cittekaggatāpi heṭṭhimamhi samuggapaṭale uparimaṃ samuggapaṭalaṃ viya ārammaṇesu phusitā hutvā uppajjati, ayametesaṃ itarehi viseso. Tattha cittekaggatā kiñcāpi ‘‘savitakkaṃ savicāra’’nti imasmiṃ pāṭhe na niddiṭṭhā, tathāpi vibhaṅge (vibha. 565) ‘‘jhānanti vitakko vicāro pīti sukhaṃ cittekaggatā’’ti evaṃ vuttattā aṅgameva. Yena hi adhippāyena bhagavatā uddeso kato, soyeva tena vibhaṅge pakāsitoti.
三种善。显示巴利原文
Tividhakalyāṇaṃ
“三种善”与“十相成就”:在这里,依初、中、后的阶段而说为具有三种善。而且,应知正是通过这些初、中、后各自的相状,成就了十相。与此有关的经文如下:显示巴利原文
Tividhakalyāṇaṃ dasalakkhaṇasampannanti ettha pana ādimajjhapariyosānavasenatividhakalyāṇatā. Tesaṃyeva ca ādimajjhapariyosānānaṃ lakkhaṇavasena dasalakkhaṇasampannatā veditabbā. Tatrāyaṃ pāḷi –
初禅以行道清净为初,以舍随增为中,以庆慰为后。初禅以行道清净为初。初有几种相?初有三种相:心从彼(禅那)障碍清净;由清净故,心进入中道止相;由进入故,心即于彼处跃入。即:心从障碍清净;由清净故,心进入中道止相;由进入故,心即于彼处跃入。初禅以行道清净为初,具足此三种相。因此说:初禅是初善,亦具三相。显示巴利原文
‘‘Paṭhamassa jhānassa paṭipadāvisuddhi ādi, upekkhānubrūhanā majjhe, sampahaṃsanā pariyosānaṃ, paṭhamassa jhānassa paṭipadāvisuddhi ādi. Ādissa kati lakkhaṇāni? Ādissa tīṇi lakkhaṇāni – yo tassa paripantho, tato cittaṃ visujjhati, visuddhattā cittaṃ majjhimaṃ samathanimittaṃ paṭipajjati, paṭipannattā tattha cittaṃ pakkhandati. Yañca paripanthato cittaṃ visujjhati, yañca visuddhattā cittaṃ majjhimaṃ samathanimittaṃ paṭipajjati, yañca paṭipannattā tattha cittaṃ pakkhandati. Paṭhamassa jhānassa paṭipadāvisuddhi ādi, ādissa imāni tīṇi lakkhaṇāni. Tena vuccati – ‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ ādikalyāṇañceva hoti tilakkhaṇasampannañcā’ti.
初禅以舍随增为中。中有几种相?中有三种相:以中舍观察清净心,以中舍观察入止心,以中舍观察已现起之单一境。即:以中舍观察清净心,以中舍观察入止心,以中舍观察已现起之单一境。初禅以舍随增为中,具足此三种相。因此说:初禅是中善,亦具三相。显示巴利原文
‘‘Paṭhamassa jhānassa upekkhānubrūhanā majjhe. Majjhassa kati lakkhaṇāni? Majjhassa tīṇi lakkhaṇāni – visuddhaṃ cittaṃ ajjhupekkhati, samathapaṭipannaṃ ajjhupekkhati, ekattupaṭṭhānaṃ ajjhupekkhati. Yañca visuddhaṃ cittaṃ ajjhupekkhati, yañca samathapaṭipannaṃ ajjhupekkhati, yañca ekattupaṭṭhānaṃ ajjhupekkhati. Paṭhamassa jhānassa upekkhānubrūhanā majjhe, majjhassa imāni tīṇi lakkhaṇāni. Tena vuccati – ‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ majjhekalyāṇañceva hoti tilakkhaṇasampannañcā’ti.
初禅以庆慰为后。后有几种相?后有四种相:以彼处所生诸法不相超越为庆慰,以诸根一味为庆慰,以策发相应精进为庆慰,以数数修习为庆慰。初禅以庆慰为后,具足此四种相。因此说:初禅是后善,亦具四相。显示巴利原文
‘‘Paṭhamassa jhānassa sampahaṃsanā pariyosānaṃ. Pariyosānassa kati lakkhaṇāni? Pariyosānassa cattāri lakkhaṇāni – tattha jātānaṃ dhammānaṃ anativattanaṭṭhena sampahaṃsanā, indriyānaṃ ekarāsaṭṭhena sampahaṃsanā, tadupagavīriyavāhanaṭṭhena sampahaṃsanā, āsevanaṭṭhena sampahaṃsanā. Paṭhamassa jhānassa sampahaṃsanā pariyosānaṃ, pariyosānassa imāni cattāri lakkhaṇāni. Tena vuccati ‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ pariyosānakalyāṇañceva hoti catulakkhaṇasampannañcā’’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.158).
有些人这样解释:“修道清净”是指具足资粮的近行定;“舍随增”是指安止定;“庆慰”是指省察。然而,依经文所说——“心趋入一境,既为修道清净所趣入,也为舍所随增,更为智所庆慰”——应当知道,在安止定本身内部,由入定之因成立“修道清净”;由中舍的作用成立“舍随增”;由成就诸法不相超越等状态,令净化智的作用得以圆满,故有“庆慰”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tatra paṭipadāvisuddhi nāma sasambhāriko upacāro. Upekkhānubrūhanā nāma appanā. Sampahaṃsanā nāma paccavekkhaṇā’’ti evameke vaṇṇayanti. Yasmā pana ‘‘ekattagataṃ cittaṃ paṭipadāvisuddhipakkhandañceva hoti upekkhānubrūhitañca ñāṇena ca sampahaṃsita’’nti pāḷiyaṃ vuttaṃ, tasmā antoappanāyameva āgamanavasena paṭipadāvisuddhi, tatramajjhattupekkhāya kiccavasena upekkhānubrūhanā, dhammānaṃ anativattanādibhāvasādhanena pariyodāpakassa ñāṇassa kiccanipphattivasena sampahaṃsanā ca veditabbā.
如何理解呢?当安止定生起的那一刹那,名为“盖”的烦恼群,乃是此禅那的障碍,心从其中得以清净。心由清净而脱离障碍,便趣入中道的止相。所谓“中道的止相”,即是正现起的安止定本身。而在此前的前行心,以融入同一相续的方式到达彼相,故说“趣入中道的止相”;由如是趣入,又因达到彼相而投入其中,便说“趋入”。因此,应知在初禅生起的刹那,由入定之因而有的“修道清净”,乃是依前行心中已成就的方式而安立的。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ ? Yasmiñhi vāre appanā uppajjati, tasmiṃ yo nīvaraṇasaṅkhāto kilesagaṇo tassa jhānassa paripantho, tato cittaṃ visujjhati. Visuddhattā āvaraṇavirahitaṃ hutvā majjhimaṃ samathanimittaṃ paṭipajjati. Majjhimasamathanimittaṃ nāma samappavatto appanāsamādhiyeva. Tadanantaraṃ pana purimacittaṃ ekasantatipariṇāmanayena tathattaṃ upagacchamānaṃ majjhimaṃ samathanimittaṃ paṭipajjati nāma, evaṃ paṭipannattā tathattupagamanena tattha pakkhandati nāma. Evaṃ tāva purimacitte vijjamānākāranipphādikā paṭhamassa jhānassa uppādakkhaṇeyeva āgamanavasena paṭipadāvisuddhi veditabbā.
再者,心既如是清净,更无可清净者,便不再于清净功用上作意,是名“中舍观察清净之心”。由于已至寂止状态,便不再于已至寂止者上作再度入定之功用,是名“中舍观察已至寂止者”。又因已至寂止,舍离了与烦恼的杂染,安住于单一,对于再令心安住单一的功用不复策励,是名“中舍观察已现起的单一”。当知此即由中舍作用而有的“舍随增”。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ visuddhassa pana tassa puna visodhetabbābhāvato visodhane byāpāraṃ akaronto visuddhaṃ cittaṃ ajjhupekkhati nāma. Samathabhāvūpagamanena samathapaṭipannassa puna samādhāne byāpāraṃ akaronto samathapaṭipannaṃ ajjhupekkhati nāma. Samathapaṭipannabhāvato eva cassa kilesasaṃsaggaṃ pahāya ekattena upaṭṭhitassa puna ekattupaṭṭhāne byāpāraṃ akaronto ekattupaṭṭhānaṃ ajjhupekkhati nāma. Evaṃ tatramajjhattupekkhāya kiccavasena upekkhānubrūhanā veditabbā.
然而,当这些由舍如此培育而生起的、名为“定与慧”的双运法,在现起时彼此不相超越地运作;那些信等诸根,因从种种烦恼中解脱,以解脱之味而成为一味;那驱动着与此相应、符合于它们不相超越及一味本质的精进;以及在那刹那现行着的修习——所有这一切,都因智见到了染污与清净中的过患与利益,而通过这样的庆慰、净化、彻底净化才得以成就。因此说:“由成就诸法不相超越等状态的净化智的作用完成而有庆慰。”显示巴利原文
Ye panete evaṃ upekkhānubrūhite tattha jātā samādhipaññāsaṅkhātā yuganaddhadhammā aññamaññaṃ anativattamānā hutvā pavattā, yāni ca saddhādīni indriyāni nānākilesehi vimuttattā vimuttirasena ekarasāni hutvā pavattāni, yañcesa tadupagaṃ tesaṃ anativattanaekarasabhāvānaṃ anucchavikaṃ vīriyaṃ vāhayati, yā cassa tasmiṃ khaṇe pavattā āsevanā, sabbepi te ākārā yasmā ñāṇena saṃkilesavodānesu taṃ taṃ ādīnavañca ānisaṃsañca disvā tathā tathā sampahaṃsitattā visodhitattā pariyodāpitattā nipphannāva, tasmā ‘‘dhammānaṃ anativattanādibhāvasādhanena pariyodāpakassa ñāṇassa kiccanipphattivasena sampahaṃsanā veditabbā’’ti vuttaṃ.
“Vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā”:指寻(vitakka)与伺(vicāra)此两者的平息与超越,也就是说,在第二禅那的刹那,它们不再出现。于此应当了知:虽然在第二禅那里,初禅的一切法都不存在——因为初禅的触等法,与此处的触等法并不相同——然而,为了指出“由超越较粗的支,从初禅之后证得第二禅那等”,才说“寻与伺的止息”。这是为了彰显此义。“Ajjhatta”:此处指自身内。在《分别论》中仅说“内,自己的”。因为是自身内,所以它的意思是:于自身中生起,于自身的相续中生起。显示巴利原文
Vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamāti vitakkassa ca vicārassa cāti imesaṃ dvinnaṃ vūpasamā samatikkamā, dutiyajjhānakkhaṇe apātubhāvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha kiñcāpi dutiyajjhāne sabbepi paṭhamajjhānadhammā na santi, aññeyeva hi paṭhamajjhāne phassādayo, aññe idha. Oḷārikassa pana oḷārikassa aṅgassa samatikkamā paṭhamajjhānato paresaṃ dutiyajjhānādīnaṃ adhigamo hotīti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā’’ti evaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Ajjhattanti idha niyakajjhattaṃ adhippetaṃ, vibhaṅge pana ‘‘ajjhattaṃ paccatta’’nti (vibha. 573) ettakameva vuttaṃ. Yasmā niyakajjhattaṃ adhippetaṃ, tasmā attani jātaṃ, attano santāne nibbattanti ayamettha attho.
“Sampasādananti”:信(saddhā)称为“净信”。由于与净信相应,禅那本身亦可称为净信,正如因与蓝色相应,蓝布即被称为“蓝布”。或者,因为此禅那具足净信,且由寻与伺的扰动止息,令心得净,故亦名为“净信”。依后一释义时,应将词连成“净信的心”(sampasādanaṃ cetaso)。而依前一释义时,“心的”(cetaso)一词则应与“心一境性”相连。显示巴利原文
Sampasādananti sampasādanaṃ vuccati saddhā. Sampasādanayogato jhānampi sampasādanaṃ, nīlavaṇṇayogato nīlavatthaṃ viya. Yasmā vā taṃ jhānaṃ sampasādanasamannāgatattā vitakkavicārakkhobhavūpasamanena ca ceto sampasādayati, tasmāpi ‘‘sampasādana’’nti vuttaṃ. Imasmiñca atthavikappe sampasādanaṃ cetasoti evaṃ padasambandho veditabbo. Purimasmiṃ pana atthavikappe cetasoti etaṃ ekodibhāvena saddhiṃ yojetabbaṃ.
此处义理分析如下:「Ekodi」:独自生起,故为一境。因不被寻与伺攀附,它作为最崇高、最殊胜的状态而生起,这便是其义。世间中,最殊胜者亦被称为「一」。或可解释为:脱离寻与伺,独自无伴而生起。又或解释为:它使相应法生起,故称「生起者」,意为令其生起。以殊胜义,此「一」即是「生起者」,合称一境(ekodi),是定(samādhi)的同义词。如此,修习并增长此「一境」,便是第二禅那的「心一境性」(ekodibhāva)。然而,此「一境」属于心,非属众生,亦非属命者,因此说为「心的一境性」(cetaso ekodibhāva)。显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ atthayojanā – eko udetīti ekodi, vitakkavicārehi anajjhārūḷhattā aggo seṭṭho hutvā udetīti attho. Seṭṭhopi hi loke ekoti vuccati. Vitakkavicāravirahito vā eko asahāyo hutvātipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Atha vā sampayuttadhamme udāyatīti udi, uṭṭhāpetīti attho. Seṭṭhaṭṭhena eko ca so udi cāti ekodi, samādhissetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Iti imaṃ ekodiṃ bhāveti vaḍḍhetīti idaṃ dutiyajjhānaṃ ekodibhāvaṃ. So panāyaṃ ekodi yasmā cetaso, na sattassa, na jīvassa. Tasmā etaṃ ‘‘cetaso ekodibhāva’’nti vuttaṃ.
有人问:第一禅那中不是也有信,也有名为一境的定吗?既然如此,为何只说第二禅那是「具净信的心一境性」呢?回答:应知,第一禅那被寻与伺的扰动所干扰,犹如波浪搅浑之水,并非清澈明净。因此,虽有信,却不称「具净信」。正因为不够明净,那里的定也还不明显,故亦不称「心一境性」。然而,在此第二禅那中,由于无寻与伺的障碍,信得到空间而变得强大有力;又因得到强力的信为伴,定也变得明显。因此应知,唯独此禅那可得此名。显示巴利原文
Nanu cāyaṃ saddhā paṭhamajjhānepi atthi, ayañca ekodināmako samādhi, atha kasmā idameva ‘‘sampasādanaṃ cetaso ekodibhāva’’nti vuttanti? Vuccate – aduñhi paṭhamajjhānaṃ vitakkavicārakkhobhena vīcitaraṅgasamākulamiva jalaṃ na suppasannaṃ hoti, tasmā satiyāpi saddhāya sampasādananti na vuttaṃ. Na suppasannattāyeva cettha samādhipi na suṭṭhu pākaṭo, tasmā ekodibhāvantipi na vuttaṃ. Imasmiṃ pana jhāne vitakkavicārapalibodhābhāvena laddhokāsā balavatī saddhā, balavasaddhāsahāyapaṭilābheneva ca samādhipi pākaṭo. Tasmā idameva evaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
「Avitakkaṃ avicāraṃ」:由于通过修习已断除,此禅那中无寻,或对此禅那而言无寻,故称「无寻」。同理可知「无伺」。此处有人问:「寻与伺的止息」一语,不也已表达了这层含义吗?为何还要再说「无寻无伺」呢?回答:确实如此,这层含义已经成立。然而,「寻与伺的止息」并非仅为说明此义。如前所述:「为了显示通过超越较粗的支,从第一禅那之后成就第二禅那等,因此才说寻与伺的止息。」显示巴利原文
Avitakkaṃ avicāranti bhāvanāya pahīnattā etasmiṃ, etassa vā vitakko natthīti avitakkaṃ. Imināva nayena avicāraṃ. Etthāha ‘‘nanu ca ‘vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā’ti imināpi ayamattho siddho. Atha kasmā puna vuttaṃ ‘avitakkaṃ avicāra’’’nti? Vuccate – evametaṃ, siddhovāyamattho. Na panetaṃ tadatthadīpakaṃ, nanu avocumha ‘‘oḷārikassa pana oḷārikassa aṅgassa samatikkamā paṭhamajjhānato paresaṃ dutiyajjhānādīnaṃ samadhigamo hotīti dassanatthaṃ ‘vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā’ti evaṃ vutta’’nti.
而且,正因为寻与伺的止息,才有这净信,并非由于烦恼的浑浊止息;也正因为寻与伺的止息,才有心一境性,这不同于近行禅因舍弃诸盖而获得,也不同于初禅因禅支显现而获得。因此,‘寻与伺的止息’这句话,揭示了净信与心一境性的原因。同样地,正因为寻与伺的止息,才有这无寻无伺,这不同于第三禅、第四禅以及眼识等,那里寻与伺根本不生起。所以,‘寻与伺的止息’这句话,既说明了无寻无伺状态的原因,也不仅仅是说寻与伺不存在。而‘无寻无伺’这句话本身,仅仅说明寻与伺不存在。因此,即使前面已经说过,后面仍应再说。显示巴利原文
Api ca vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā idaṃ sampasādanaṃ, na kilesakālussiyassa. Vitakkavicārānañca vūpasamā ekodibhāvaṃ, na upacārajjhānamiva nīvaraṇappahānā, na paṭhamajjhānamiva ca aṅgapātubhāvāti evaṃ sampasādanaekodibhāvānaṃ hetuparidīpakamidaṃ vacanaṃ. Tathā vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā idaṃ avitakkaṃ avicāraṃ, na tatiyacatutthajjhānāni viya cakkhuviññāṇādīni viya ca abhāvāti, evaṃ avitakkaavicārabhāvassa hetuparidīpakañca, na vitakkavicārābhāvamattaparidīpakaṃ. Vitakkavicārābhāvamattaparidīpakameva pana ‘‘avitakkaṃ avicāra’’nti idaṃ vacanaṃ. Tasmā purimaṃ vatvāpi puna vattabbamevāti.
定生:意为从初禅的定生起,或从与之相应的定生起。虽然初禅的喜乐也从相应定中生起,但只有这第二禅的定才真正堪称为‘定’——因为它无寻伺扰动,极为安稳不动,又极为清净。所以,为了赞叹此定的殊胜,才特别将第二禅的喜乐称为‘定生’。至于‘喜乐’,其义如前所述。显示巴利原文
Samādhijanti paṭhamajjhānasamādhito sampayuttasamādhito vā jātanti attho. Tattha kiñcāpi paṭhamampi sampayuttasamādhito jātaṃ, atha kho ayameva samādhi ‘‘samādhī’’ti vattabbataṃ arahati, vitakkavicārakkhobhavirahena ativiya acalattā suppasannattā ca. Tasmā imassa vaṇṇabhaṇanatthaṃ idameva ‘‘samādhija’’nti vuttaṃ. Pītisukhanti idaṃ vuttanayameva.
第二:依计数次第,这是第二个。又因为它是第二个生起的禅那,故称为‘第二’。显示巴利原文
Dutiyanti gaṇanānupubbatā dutiyaṃ. Idaṃ dutiyaṃ uppannantipi dutiyaṃ.
「由喜的褪离」:这里所说的「离」,是指对前面所述那种喜的厌弃,或是超越了它。而夹在中间的“和”字起连接作用,它可以将“止息”连接进来,也可以将「寻与伺的止息」连接进来。如果只连接“止息”,则应这样连贯地理解:「由喜的褪离,并且更进一步,由止息」。在这种解释中,“离”是厌弃的意思,因此整体应理解为:由于对喜的厌弃与超越。如果连接的是「寻与伺的止息」,则应这样理解:「由喜的褪离,并且更进一步,由寻与伺的止息」。在这种解释中,“离”是超越的意思,因此整体应理解为:由喜的超越,以及寻与伺的止息。显示巴利原文
Pītiyā ca virāgāti virāgo nāma vuttappakārāya pītiyā jigucchanaṃ vā samatikkamo vā . Ubhinnaṃ pana antarā ca-saddo sampiṇḍanattho, so vūpasamaṃ vā sampiṇḍeti vitakkavicāravūpasamaṃ vā. Tattha yadā vūpasamameva sampiṇḍeti, tadā pītiyā virāgā ca, kiñca bhiyyo vūpasamā cāti evaṃ yojanā veditabbā. Imissā ca yojanāya virāgo jigucchanattho hoti, tasmā pītiyā jigucchanā ca samatikkamā cāti ayamattho daṭṭhabbo. Yadā pana vitakkavicāravūpasamaṃ sampiṇḍeti, tadā pītiyā ca virāgā, kiñca bhiyyo vitakkavicārānañca vūpasamāti evaṃ yojanā veditabbā. Imissā ca yojanāya virāgo samatikkamanattho hoti, tasmā pītiyā ca samatikkamā vitakkavicārānañca vūpasamāti ayamattho daṭṭhabbo.
这些寻与伺其实在第二禅中便已止息,此处是为了指明趣入这第三禅的途径,并赞叹其功德而作此说。因为当说到「寻与伺的止息」时,便能令人了知:「寻与伺的止息正是证入此第三禅的途径。」正如于第三圣道时,虽然那些有身见等烦恼尚未被断除,经中却说“断除五下分结”,这是以赞叹的方式来激励那些精勤求道者发起努力。同样地,在这里,寻与伺虽已于第二禅止息,却说它们止息,也是一种赞叹。因此,这个意思便被表述为:「由喜的超越,以及寻与伺的止息。」显示巴利原文
Kāmañcete vitakkavicārā dutiyajjhāneyeva vūpasantā, imassa pana jhānassa maggaparidīpanatthaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇanatthañcetaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā’’ti hi vutte idaṃ paññāyati ‘‘nūna vitakkavicāravūpasamo maggo imassa jhānassā’’ti. Yathā ca tatiye ariyamagge appahīnānampi sakkāyadiṭṭhādīnaṃ ‘‘pañcannaṃ orambhāgiyānaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ pahānā’’ti (ma. ni. 2.132-133) evaṃ pahānaṃ vuccamānaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇanaṃ hoti, tadadhigamāya ussukkānaṃ ussāhajanakaṃ, evameva idha avūpasantānampi vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamo vuccamāno vaṇṇabhaṇanaṃ hoti, tenāyamattho vutto ‘‘pītiyā ca samatikkamā vitakkavicārānañca vūpasamā’’ti.
「具舍者而住」:这里,“舍”是指依生起而观,即平等地看待,以不偏不倚的心态去观察。由于具备了那种清净、广大、坚固的舍,证得第三禅的人便被称为“具舍者”。显示巴利原文
Upekkhako ca viharatīti ettha upapattito ikkhatīti upekkhā, samaṃ passati, apakkhapatitā hutvā passatīti attho. Tāya visadāya vipulāya thāmagatāya samannāgatattā tatiyajjhānasamaṅgī ‘‘upekkhako’’ti vuccati.
而“舍”有十种:六支舍、梵住舍、觉支舍、精进舍、行舍、受舍、观舍、居中舍、禅那舍、清净舍。显示巴利原文
Upekkhā pana dasavidhā hoti – chaḷaṅgupekkhā brahmavihārupekkhā bojjhaṅgupekkhā vīriyupekkhā saṅkhārupekkhā vedanupekkhā vipassanupekkhā tatramajjhattupekkhā jhānupekkhā pārisuddhupekkhāti.
其中,名为“六支舍”者,即如《中部》所说:“诸比丘,于此,比丘以眼看见色后,不生欢喜,亦不生不快,安住于舍,正念正知。”这是漏尽者于六根门面对可意与不可意的六种所缘时,因其本性清净、不舍离本然状态的舍,称为六支舍。显示巴利原文
Tattha yā ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā neva sumano hoti na dummano, upekkhako ca viharati sato sampajāno’’ti (ma. ni. 6.1) evamāgatā khīṇāsavassa chasu dvāresu iṭṭhāniṭṭhachaḷārammaṇāpāthe parisuddhapakatibhāvāvijahanākārabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ chaḷaṅgupekkhā nāma.
名为“梵住舍”者,即如《长部》与《中部》所说:“以与舍俱行的心遍满一方而住。”这是对一切众生保持中舍、不偏不倚的心态,这种舍称为梵住舍。显示巴利原文
Yā pana ‘‘upekkhāsahagatena cetasā ekaṃ disaṃ pharitvā viharatī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.556; ma. ni. 1.77) evamāgatā sattesu majjhattākārabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ brahmavihārupekkhā nāma.
而所谓“舍觉支”,则如《中部》所说“修习依于远离的舍觉支”,指对同时生起的诸法保持中舍的状态,这便称为“舍觉支”。显示巴利原文
Yā pana ‘‘upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṃ bhāveti vivekanissita’’nti (ma. ni. 2.247) evamāgatā sahajātānaṃ dhammānaṃ majjhattākārabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ bojjhaṅgupekkhā nāma.
而所谓“精进舍”,即如《增支部》所说“应时时作意舍相”,指不过度策励、也不过于懈怠的精进,这便称为“精进舍”。显示巴利原文
Yā pana ‘‘kālena kālaṃ upekkhānimittaṃ manasi karotī’’ti (a. ni. 3.103) evamāgatā anaccāraddhanātisithilavīriyasaṅkhātā upekkhā, ayaṃ vīriyupekkhā nāma.
而所谓“行舍”,即如《无碍解道》所说:“有多少行舍依止而生起?有多少行舍依观而生起?依止而生起八种行舍,依观而生起十种行舍。”指面对盖等时,通过思择而安住、不执取,于其中保持中舍的舍,这便称为“行舍”。显示巴利原文
Yā pana ‘‘kati saṅkhārupekkhā samathavasena uppajjanti, kati saṅkhārupekkhā vipassanāvasena uppajjanti? Aṭṭha saṅkhārupekkhā samathavasena uppajjanti, dasa saṅkhārupekkhā vipassanāvasena uppajjantī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.57) evamāgatā nīvaraṇādipaṭisaṅkhāsantiṭṭhanāgahaṇe majjhattabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ saṅkhārupekkhā nāma.
而“受舍”,如《法集论》所言:“于彼时,欲界善心生起,与舍俱行。”这是指称为“不苦不乐”的感受,此舍即名为“受舍”。显示巴利原文
Yā pana ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti upekkhāsahagata’’nti (dha. sa. 150) evamāgatā adukkhamasukhasaṅkhātā upekkhā, ayaṃ vedanupekkhā nāma.
而“观舍”,如《中部》与《增支部》所说:“凡是存在、已生起者,他舍断之,证得舍”——这是指在审察时处于中舍的舍,称为“观舍”。显示巴利原文
Yā pana ‘‘yadatthi yaṃ bhūtaṃ, taṃ pajahati, upekkhaṃ paṭilabhatī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.71-72; a. ni. 7.55) evamāgatā vicinane majjhattabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ vipassanupekkhā nāma.
而那种于欲等(任何心所)中所出现的、能使俱生诸法平衡而转的舍,则称为“中舍性舍”。显示巴利原文
Yā pana chandādīsu yevāpanakesu āgatā sahajātānaṃ samavāhitabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ tatramajjhattupekkhā nāma.
而“住于舍”(upekkhako ca viharatī)所说的那种,即使面对最上等乐也不生偏袒的舍,即称为“禅那舍”。显示巴利原文
Yā pana ‘‘upekkhako ca viharatī’’ti evamāgatā aggasukhepi tasmiṃ apakkhapātajananī upekkhā, ayaṃ jhānupekkhā nāma.
而“清净舍”,如《法集论》与《长部》所说“第四禅为舍念清净”,是指从一切对立中完全清净、即使在对立止息后也不起任何造作的舍,名为“清净舍”。显示巴利原文
Yā pana ‘‘upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṃ catutthaṃ jhāna’’nti (dha. sa. 165; dī. ni. 1.232) evamāgatā sabbapaccanīkaparisuddhā paccanīkavūpasamanepi abyāpārabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ pārisuddhupekkhā nāma.
其中,六支舍、梵住舍、觉支舍、中舍性舍、禅那舍与清净舍,本质上是同一回事,即中舍性舍。只是依不同阶段而有这些区分,如同同一人依男孩、青年、长者、将军、国王等而有不同名称一样。因此应知:当六支舍存在时,那里便没有觉支舍等;或当觉支舍存在时,那里便没有六支舍等。显示巴利原文
Tattha chaḷaṅgupekkhā ca brahmavihārupekkhā ca bojjhaṅgupekkhā ca tatramajjhattupekkhā ca jhānupekkhā ca pārisuddhupekkhā ca atthato ekā, tatramajjhattupekkhāva hoti. Tena tena avatthābhedena panassā ayaṃ bhedo . Ekassāpi sato sattassa kumārayuvatherasenāpatirājādivasena bhedo viya, tasmā tāsu yattha chaḷaṅgupekkhā, na tattha bojjhaṅgupekkhādayo. Yattha vā pana bojjhaṅgupekkhā, na tattha chaḷaṅgupekkhādayo hontīti veditabbā.
正如那些舍在意义上是一体,行舍与观舍也是如此。这其实就是慧,仅依作用而分二种。譬如:有人傍晚进屋,发现有蛇,便拿起羊足杖去寻找;看见蛇躺在糠堆里,便观察“这究竟是不是蛇?”看到三个特征后,不再怀疑,就在审察“是蛇、非蛇”时,心中生起中舍。同样地,已经着手修观的行者,以观智照见诸行的三相,在审察诸行无常等特性时,所生起的中舍,就叫做观舍。又如那人以羊足杖用力叉住蛇,心想:“我要怎样才能不伤害这条蛇,也不被蛇咬,而将它放走呢?”在寻求放走的方法时,对于抓握一事,生起中舍。同样地,由于已见三相,便看待三有如同炽燃的火聚,此时对执取诸行所生起的中舍,就叫做行舍。如是,当观舍成就时,行舍自然也成就了。不过这种慧,依其在审察与执取时的中舍作用,而被分为两种而已。而精进舍与受舍,不仅彼此意义不同,也与其余诸舍意义不同。显示巴利原文
Yathā cetāsaṃ atthato ekībhāvo, evaṃ saṅkhārupekkhāvipassanupekkhānampi. Paññā eva hi esā, kiccavasena dvidhā bhinnā, yathā hi purisassa sāyaṃ gehaṃ paviṭṭhaṃ sappaṃ ajapadadaṇḍaṃ gahetvā pariyesamānassa taṃ thusakoṭṭhake nipannaṃ disvā ‘‘sappo nu kho no’’ti avalokentassa sovatthikattayaṃ disvā nibbematikassa ‘‘sappo na sappo’’ti vicinane majjhattatā uppajjati, evameva yā āraddhavipassakassa vipassanāñāṇena lakkhaṇattaye diṭṭhe saṅkhārānaṃ aniccabhāvādivicinane majjhattatā uppajjati, ayaṃ vipassanupekkhā. Yathā pana tassa purisassa ajapadadaṇḍakena gāḷhaṃ sappaṃ gahetvā ‘‘kintāhaṃ imaṃ sappaṃ aviheṭhento attānañca iminā aḍaṃsāpento muñceyya’’nti muñcanākārameva pariyesato gahaṇe majjhattatā hoti, evameva yā lakkhaṇattayassa diṭṭhattā āditte viya tayo bhave passato saṅkhāraggahaṇe majjhattatā, ayaṃ saṅkhārupekkhā. Iti vipassanupekkhāya siddhāya saṅkhārupekkhāpi siddhāva hoti. Iminā panesā vicinanaggahaṇesu majjhattatāsaṅkhātena kiccena dvidhā bhinnāti. Vīriyupekkhā pana vedanupekkhā ca aññamaññañca avasesāhi ca atthato bhinnāyevāti. Āha cettha –
中舍、梵住舍、觉支舍、六支舍、禅那舍、清净舍,
观舍、行舍、受舍、精进舍。
其中两种属于慧,另外两种则是受舍与精进舍,因而根本舍唯有这四种。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Majjhattabrahmabojjhaṅgachaḷaṅgajhānasuddhiyo; Vipassanā ca saṅkhāravedanāvīriyaṃ iti. ‘‘Vitthārato dasopekkhā-chamajjhattādito tato; Duve paññā tato dvīhi, catassova bhavantimā’’ti.
如此,在这些舍中,此处所指的即是禅那舍。它以中舍为相,无功用为味,无行为为现起,离喜为足处。于此有问:“这不就是意义上的中舍性吗?而中舍性在初禅与第二禅中也有。既然如此,为何在那些禅那中不说‘他住于舍’呢?何以不如此说?”(答:)因为在那里它的作用尚未圆满。因为在那些禅那中,伴有喜的舍被寻等制伏,作用未得圆满,故而不说。而在此第三禅,它不被无寻地等所制伏,犹如抬起头来一般,作用圆满,因此才被宣说。显示巴利原文
Iti imāsu upekkhāsu jhānupekkhā idha adhippetā. Sā majjhattalakkhaṇā, anābhogarasā , abyāpārapaccupaṭṭhānā, pītivirāgapadaṭṭhānāti. Etthāha – ‘‘nanu cāyaṃ atthato tatramajjhattupekkhāva hoti, sā ca paṭhamadutiyajjhānesupi atthi. Tasmā tatrāpi ‘upekkhako ca viharatī’ti evamayaṃ vattabbā siyā, sā kasmā na vuttā’’ti? Aparibyattakiccato. Aparibyattañhi tassā tattha kiccaṃ, vitakkādīhi abhibhūtattā. Idha panāyaṃ vitakkavicārapītīhi anabhibhūtattā ukkhittasirā viya hutvā paribyattakiccā jātā, tasmā vuttāti.
于“念与正知”(satoca sampajāno)句中:念即忆念,正知即了知。如是,这是就个人而说的念与正知两者。其中,念以忆念为相,以不忘失为味,以守护为现起;正知以不痴为相,以审度为味,以探究为现起。显示巴利原文
Satoca sampajānoti ettha saratīti sato. Sampajānātīti sampajāno. Iti puggalena sati ca sampajaññañca vuttaṃ. Tattha saraṇalakkhaṇā sati, asammussanarasā ārakkhapaccupaṭṭhānā. Asammohalakkhaṇaṃ sampajaññaṃ, tīraṇarasaṃ, pavicayapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ.
在此,虽然此“念与正知”在前面的禅那中也存在,因为失念、无正知之人,连近行定尚且无法成就,何况安止定。然而,由于那些禅那较为粗显,心行之路容易,犹如在平地行走之人,彼处念与正知的作用并不显著。而通过断除粗重的支,此禅那变得微细,心行之路则如同走在刀刃上的人,必须由念与正知的作用所摄持,因此唯独在此(第三禅)才说。而且还有更深一层的意义:犹如一头常随母牛的小牛,若被带走而无看护,便会跑回母牛身边;同样,这第三禅的乐虽已离喜,但若不以念与正知的守护来保护,它就可能退转与喜相应,或对乐生起贪染。再者,此乐极为甘甜,因为自此以上再无更殊胜之乐。然而,此处正是依凭念与正知之力,方能对乐不生贪染,否则便不可能。应知:正是为了显示此义理上的差别,才唯独在这第三禅中宣说。显示巴利原文
Tattha kiñcāpi idaṃ satisampajaññaṃ purimajjhānesupi atthi, muṭṭhassatissa hi asampajānassa upacāramattampi na sampajjati, pageva appanā. Oḷārikattā pana tesaṃ jhānānaṃ bhūmiyaṃ viya purisassa cittassa gati sukhā hoti, abyattaṃ tattha satisampajaññakiccaṃ. Oḷārikaṅgappahānena pana sukhumattā imassa jhānassa purisassa khuradhārāyaṃ viya satisampajaññakiccapariggahitā eva cittassa gati icchitabbāti idheva vuttaṃ. Kiñca bhiyyo – yathā dhenupago vaccho dhenuto apanīto arakkhiyamāno punadeva dhenuṃ upagacchati, evamidaṃ tatiyajjhānasukhaṃ pītito apanītampi satisampajaññārakkhena arakkhiyamānaṃ punadeva pītiṃ upagaccheyya, pītisampayuttameva siyā, sukhe vāpi sattā sārajjanti. Idañca atimadhurasukhaṃ, tato paraṃ sukhābhāvā. Satisampajaññānubhāvena panettha sukhe asārajjanā hoti, no aññathāti imampi atthavisesaṃ dassetuṃ idamidheva vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
现在解释“以身体感受乐”(sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṃvedeti)这一句:虽然第三禅成就者并没有对乐受的耽着,但即使如此,因为他的名身与乐相应。或者说,与名身相应的乐,由它所生起的极殊胜色法触及其色身;由于这种触,即使从禅那出定后,他也能感受乐。因此,为了显示此义,而说“以身体感受乐”。显示巴利原文
Idāni sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṃvedetīti ettha kiñcāpi tatiyajjhānasamaṅgino sukhapaṭisaṃvedanābhogo natthi, evaṃ santepi yasmā tassa nāmakāyena sampayuttaṃ sukhaṃ. Yaṃ vā taṃ nāmakāyasampayuttaṃ sukhaṃ, taṃsamuṭṭhānenassa yasmā atipaṇītena rūpena rūpakāyo phuṭo, yassa phuṭattā jhānā vuṭṭhitopi sukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedeyya, tasmā etamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṃvedetī’’ti āha.
现在解释“圣者们称他为‘舍者、具念者、住于乐者’”这一句。意思是,佛陀等圣者以该禅那为因、以该禅那为缘,宣说、开示、施设、阐明、分别、揭示并称扬那位具足第三禅的人,即是在称叹他:“舍者、具念者、住于乐者”。应知此处经文摄义为:“他成就此第三禅而住”。显示巴利原文
Idāni yaṃ taṃ ariyā ācikkhanti upekkhako satimā sukhavihārīti ettha yaṃjhānahetu yaṃjhānakāraṇā taṃ tatiyajjhānasamaṅgīpuggalaṃ buddhādayo ariyā ācikkhanti desenti paññapenti paṭṭhapenti vivaranti vibhajanti uttānīkaronti pakāsenti, pasaṃsantīti adhippāyo. Kinti? Upekkhako satimā sukhavihārīti. Taṃ tatiyajjhānaṃ upasampajja viharatīti evamettha yojanā veditabbā.
为什么圣者们如此称叹他呢?因为他值得称叹。此人于第三禅那中,虽已至极甜美、抵达乐的顶点,却依然是「舍者」,不被对乐的贪染所牵。又因「喜」不生起,念住现前,故为「具念者」。再者,他以名身感受那种圣者所喜爱、圣者所习行、无杂染的乐,所以值得称叹。因此,应知圣者为彰显应受称叹的功德,而这样称叹:“舍者、具念者、住于乐者”。说“第三”,是因计数次第为第三,且因是第三个生起的,故称为「第三」。显示巴利原文
Kasmā pana taṃ te evaṃ pasaṃsantīti? Pasaṃsārahato. Ayañhi yasmā atimadhurasukhe sukhapāramippattepi tatiyajjhāne upekkhako, na tattha sukhābhisaṅgena ākaḍḍhīyati. Yathā ca pīti na uppajjati, evaṃ upaṭṭhitasatitāya satimā. Yasmā ca ariyakantaṃ ariyajanasevitameva ca asaṃkiliṭṭhaṃ sukhaṃ nāmakāyena paṭisaṃvedeti, tasmā pasaṃsāraho. Iti pasaṃsārahato naṃ ariyā te evaṃ pasaṃsāhetubhūte guṇe pakāsento ‘‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’’ti evaṃ pasaṃsantīti veditabbaṃ. Tatiyanti gaṇanānupubbatā tatiyaṃ, idaṃ tatiyaṃ uppannantipi tatiyaṃ.
“由断除乐与由断除苦”,指断除身乐与断除身苦。“于之前”,是说这些都是在进入第四禅那之前,而不是在第四禅那的当下。“由喜与忧的灭没”,指心的乐受与心的苦受——这两者同样是在之前就已灭没,也就是已经断除了的意思。显示巴利原文
Sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānāti kāyikasukhassa ca kāyikadukkhassa ca pahānā. Pubbevāti tañca kho pubbeva, na catutthajjhānakkhaṇe. Somanassadomanassānaṃ atthaṅgamāti cetasikasukhassa ca cetasikadukkhassa cāti imesampi dvinnaṃ pubbeva atthaṅgamā, pahānā icceva vuttaṃ hoti.
那么,它们是在什么时候被断除的呢?是在四种禅那各自的近行刹那。喜,在第四禅的近行刹那才被断除;而苦、忧、乐,则在第一、第二、第三禅的近行刹那便被断除。虽然在此文句中,苦、乐、喜、忧的断除并未依断除次第而说,但在《根分别》中,则是按根的列举次第而说,此处也应当这样来理解:应知苦、乐、喜、忧的断除。显示巴利原文
Kadā pana nesaṃ pahānaṃ hoti? Catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ upacārakkhaṇe. Somanassañhi catutthajjhānassa upacārakkhaṇeyeva pahīyati, dukkhadomanassasukhāni paṭhamadutiyatatiyajjhānānaṃ upacārakkhaṇesu. Evametesaṃ pahānakkamena avuttānaṃ, indriyavibhaṅge pana indriyānaṃ uddesakkameneva idhāpi vuttānaṃ sukhadukkhasomanassadomanassānaṃ pahānaṃ veditabbaṃ.
然而,如果这些感受只在各个禅那的近行刹那才被断除,那为什么经中又说:‘在何处,所生起的苦根无余灭尽?诸比丘,在此,比丘远离诸欲……具足初禅而住,正是在这里,所生起的苦根无余灭尽。在何处,所生起的忧根……乐根……喜根无余灭尽?诸比丘,在此,比丘断除乐……具足第四禅而住,正是在这里,所生起的喜根无余灭尽’呢?这是将灭尽安立于禅那本身之中,因为那是殊胜的灭尽。在初禅等禅那中,它们的灭尽是殊胜的灭尽,而非仅仅是灭尽。而在近行刹那,仅是灭尽,并非殊胜的灭尽。显示巴利原文
Yadi panetāni tassa tassa jhānassa upacārakkhaṇeyeva pahīyanti, atha kasmā ‘‘kattha cuppannaṃ dukkhindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhati? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi…pe… paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati, ettha cuppannaṃ dukkhindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhati. Kattha cuppannaṃ domanassindriyaṃ… sukhindriyaṃ… somanassindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhati? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu, sukhassa ca pahānā…pe… catutthaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Ettha cuppannaṃ somanassindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.510) evaṃ jhānesveva nirodho vuttoti. Atisayanirodhattā. Atisayanirodho hi nesaṃ paṭhamajjhānādīsu, na nirodhoyeva. Nirodhoyeva pana upacārakkhaṇe nātisayanirodho.
确实如此。在缘取不同所缘的初禅近行中,即使苦根已经灭去,仍有可能因蚊虻叮咬等触或坐卧不适等伤害而再生起;但在安止定中,则绝对不会生起。在近行中,它虽已灭去,却未彻底灭去,因为尚未被对立法所破坏。而在安止中,由于喜遍满全身,整个身体都为乐所浸润,因为被对立法所破坏,苦根得以彻底灭除。同样地,在缘取不同所缘的第二禅近行中,即使忧根已断除,但由于寻与伺之缘——即当身体疲倦和内心苦闷时,忧仍会生起;若无寻与伺,它便不会生起,而它生起之处,正是有寻与伺之处。在第二禅的近行中,寻与伺本身尚未被断除,因此忧可能在那里生起;但在第二禅中,绝不会生起,因为它的缘已被断除。同样地,在第三禅的近行中,乐根虽已断除,但如果身体被由喜所生的极为殊胜的细触所触,乐还可能生起;但在第三禅中绝不会生起,因为在第三禅里,作为乐之缘的喜已完全灭尽。同样地,在第四禅的近行中,喜根虽已断除,但由于距离太近,也由于尚未完全超越未达安止的舍,喜还可能生起;但在第四禅中绝对不会生起。正因为如此,经中说‘在何处……’等语,是将灭尽安立在禅那本身之中。显示巴利原文
Tathā hi nānāvajjane paṭhamajjhānūpacāre niruddhassāpi dukkhindriyassa ḍaṃsamakasādisamphassena vā visamāsanupatāpena vā siyā uppatti, na tveva antoappanāyaṃ. Upacāre vā niruddhampetaṃ na suṭṭhu niruddhaṃ hoti, paṭipakkhena avihatattā. Antoappanāyaṃ pana pītipharaṇena sabbo kāyo sukhokkanto hoti, sukhokkantakāyassa ca suṭṭhu niruddhaṃ hoti dukkhindriyaṃ, paṭipakkhena vihatattā. Nānāvajjaneyeva ca dutiyajjhānūpacāre pahīnassāpi domanassindriyassa yasmā etaṃ vitakkavicārapaccayepi kāyakilamathe cittupaghāte ca sati uppajjati, vitakkavicārābhāve neva uppajjati. Yattha pana uppajjati, tattha vitakkavicārabhāve. Appahīnāyeva ca dutiyajjhānūpacāre vitakkavicārāti tatthassa siyā uppatti, na tveva dutiyajjhāne, pahīnappaccayattā. Tathā tatiyajjhānūpacāre pahīnassāpi sukhindriyassa pītisamuṭṭhānapaṇītarūpaphuṭakāyassa siyā uppatti, na tveva tatiyajjhāne. Tatiyajjhāne hi sukhassa paccayabhūtā pīti sabbaso niruddhāti. Tathā catutthajjhānūpacāre pahīnassāpi somanassindriyassa āsannattā, appanāpattāya upekkhāya abhāvena sammā anatikkantattā ca siyā uppatti, na tveva catutthajjhāne. Tasmā eva ca ‘‘etthuppannaṃ dukkhindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhatī’’ti tattha tattha aparisesaggahaṇaṃ katanti.
于此有人会问:“这些感受在进入各个禅那的近行时便已断除,为什么在此处又将它们合在一起说呢?”这是为了能够把握“不苦不乐受”。因为这里所说的“不苦不乐”感受极其微细、难以了知,不易把握。就如牧牛者为了能轻易抓住一头难以制伏的恶牛,会先把所有的牛都集中赶进一个牛栏,再逐一放出,当轮到那头牛时,便说“就是这头,抓住它”,这样来捉住它。同样地,世尊为了让人能够把握“不苦不乐受”,而将这些感受全部集合在一起。如此把集合起来的诸受开示清楚之后,便可以指出:“那既不是乐,也不是苦,不是喜,不是忧——这就是不苦不乐受”,这样才有可能把握它。显示巴利原文
Etthāha – ‘‘athevaṃ tassa tassa jhānassupacāre pahīnāpi etā vedanā idha kasmā samāhaṭā’’ti? Sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ. Yā hi ayaṃ adukkhamasukhanti ettha adukkhamasukhā vedanā vuttā, sā sukhumā dubbiññeyyā, na sakkā sukhena gahetuṃ, tasmā yathā nāma duṭṭhassa yathā vā tathā vā upasaṅkamitvā gahetuṃ asakkuṇeyyassa goṇassa sukhagahaṇatthaṃ gopo ekasmiṃ vaje sabbā gāvo samāharati, athekekaṃ nīharanto paṭipāṭiyā āgataṃ ‘‘ayaṃ so gaṇhatha na’’nti tampi gāhāpeti, evameva bhagavā sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ sabbā etā samāharīti. Evañhi samāhaṭā etā dassetvā ‘‘yaṃ neva sukhaṃ, na dukkhaṃ, na somanassaṃ, na domanassaṃ, ayaṃ adukkhamasukhā vedanā’’ti sakkā hoti esā gāhayituṃ.
再者,也应知道,这些感受的宣说,也是为了显示证得“不苦不乐心解脱”的缘。因为断除苦等正是它的缘。正如经中所说:“贤友,有四缘能证得不苦不乐心解脱的等至。贤友,在此,比丘断除乐……具足第四禅而住。贤友,这便是证得不苦不乐心解脱等至的四缘。”(《中部》)又如,在其他地方,虽然已经有身见等在别处断除,但为了称扬第三道而说“在那里断除”;同样地,在此处为了称扬这种禅那而宣说这些感受,也应当如是了知。又或者,为了显示由于破坏了它们的缘,导致贪与嗔变得极为遥远,而宣说这些感受。因为在这些感受中,乐是喜的缘,喜是贪的缘;苦是忧的缘,忧是嗔的缘。由于乐等被破坏,那些随缘而生的贪与嗔便被摧毁,变得极其遥远。显示巴利原文
Api ca adukkhamasukhāya cetovimuttiyā paccayadassanatthañcāpi etā vuttāti veditabbā. Dukkhappahānādayo hi tassā paccayā. Yathāha – ‘‘cattāro kho, āvuso, paccayā adukkhamasukhāya cetovimuttiyā samāpattiyā. Idhāvuso, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā …pe… catutthaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Ime kho, āvuso, cattāro paccayā adukkhamasukhāya cetovimuttiyā samāpattiyā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.458). Yathā vā aññattha pahīnāpi sakkāyadiṭṭhiādayo tatiyamaggassa vaṇṇabhaṇanatthaṃ ‘‘tattha pahīnā’’ti vuttā, evaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇanatthampetassa jhānassetā idha vuttātipi veditabbā. Paccayaghātena vā ettha rāgadosānaṃ atidūrabhāvaṃ dassetumpetā vuttāti veditabbā. Etāsu hi sukhaṃ somanassassa paccayo, somanassaṃ rāgassa, dukkhaṃ domanassassa, domanassaṃ dosassa. Sukhādighātena ca te sappaccayā rāgadosā hatāti atidūre hontīti.
“不苦不乐”:因为没有苦,所以称为不苦;因为没有乐,所以称为不乐。以此,这里并非仅仅表示没有苦与乐,而是在说明与苦、乐对立的第三种受。这第三种受名为不苦不乐,也称作“舍”。应如此了知它的特相——体验与可意、不可意相反之境;它的作用——保持中舍;它的现起——不明显;它的足处——乐的灭尽。显示巴利原文
Adukkhamasukhanti dukkhābhāvena adukkhaṃ, sukhābhāvena asukhaṃ. Etenettha sukhadukkhapaṭipakkhabhūtaṃ tatiyavedanaṃ dīpeti, na dukkhasukhābhāvamattaṃ. Tatiyavedanā nāma adukkhamasukhā, upekkhātipi vuccati. Sā iṭṭhāniṭṭhaviparītānubhavanalakkhaṇā, majjhattarasā, avibhūtapaccupaṭṭhānā, sukhanirodhapadaṭṭhānāti veditabbā.
「舍念清净」:指由舍所生起的念清净。在此禅那中,念极为清净;而此念的清净,是由舍所成就,非由余者。因此,这称为「舍念清净」。而在此禅那中,使念清净的此种舍,依义理应知即是「中舍性」。不仅此处的念唯依此舍而得清净,实一切相应俱生之法亦悉清净,然教说以念为首而说。显示巴利原文
Upekkhāsatipārisuddhinti upekkhāya janitasatipārisuddhiṃ. Imasmiñhi jhāne suparisuddhā sati, yā ca tassā satiyā pārisuddhi, sā upekkhāya katā, na aññena. Tasmā etaṃ ‘‘upekkhāsatipārisuddhi’’nti vuccati. Yāya ca upekkhāya ettha sati pārisuddhi hoti, sā atthato tatramajjhattatāti veditabbā. Na kevalañcettha tāya satiyeva parisuddhā, api ca kho sabbepi sampayuttadhammā, satisīsena pana desanā vuttā.
在此,虽然此舍在下方的三个禅那中亦存在,然而,如同白昼的月牙,虽于白昼存在,却被太阳的光辉所掩蔽,又因未得与自己同类之夜(或未得助缘),故虽在白昼,亦不清净、不皎洁;同样,此中舍性之月牙,于初禅等中,被寻等敌对法之光辉所掩蔽,且未得与自己同类之舍受之夜,虽亦存在,仍不清净。当其不清净时,与之俱生的念等,亦如白昼不清净月牙的光辉般不清净。因此,在那些禅那中,无有任何被称为「舍念清净」。而在此第四禅中,因未被寻等敌对法之光辉所掩蔽,且已获得与自己同类之舍受之夜,此中舍性之月牙便极为清净;因其清净,与之俱生的念等,亦如皎洁月牙的光辉般,清净且皎洁。因此,应知唯此第四禅才称为「舍念清净」。「第四」:依数目次第,即是第四。此为第四禅之生起,故称第四。显示巴利原文
Tattha kiñcāpi ayaṃ upekkhā heṭṭhāpi tīsu jhānesu vijjati, yathā pana divā sūriyappabhābhibhavā sommabhāvena ca attano upakārakattena vā sabhāgāya rattiyā alābhā divā vijjamānāpi candalekhā aparisuddhā hoti apariyodātā, evamayampi tatramajjhattupekkhācandalekhā vitakkādipaccanīkadhammatejābhibhavā sabhāgāya ca upekkhāvedanārattiyā apaṭilābhā vijjamānāpi paṭhamajjhānādibhedesu aparisuddhā hoti. Tassā ca aparisuddhāya divā aparisuddhacandalekhāya pabhā viya sahajātāpi satiādayo aparisuddhāva honti. Tasmā tesu ekampi ‘‘upekkhāsatipārisuddhi’’nti na vuttaṃ. Idha pana vitakkādipaccanīkadhammatejābhibhavābhāvā sabhāgāya ca upekkhāvedanārattiyā paṭilābhā ayaṃ tatramajjhattupekkhācandalekhā ativiya parisuddhā, tassā parisuddhattā parisuddhacandalekhāya pabhā viya sahajātāpi satiādayo parisuddhā honti pariyodātā. Tasmā idameva ‘‘upekkhāsatipārisuddhi’’nti vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Catutthanti gaṇanānupubbatā catutthaṃ. Idaṃ catutthaṃ uppannantipi catutthaṃ.
「具慧」:因他有慧,故称具慧。「趣向生灭」:即趣向于生及趣向于灭。「具足」:即圆满。「圣」:即无过失的。「能穿透的」:即属于穿透的部分。「导向苦尽」:即导向涅槃。对于「此是苦」等,他依对自相与共相的证悟,如实了知、通达:「苦唯有此量,更无过此」,从而遍知一切苦谛。又将那能产生苦的渴爱,了知为「此是苦集」。对于此二者(苦与集)到达某处后便灭尽之处——即它们不再转起的涅槃,了知为「此是苦灭」。对于能到达彼(灭)的圣道,了知为「此是导向苦灭之道」,他亦同样依对自相与共相的证悟,如实了知、通达。应如此了知此处之义。显示巴利原文
Paññavā hotīti paññā assa atthīti paññavā. Udayatthagāminiyāti udayagāminiyā ceva atthagāminiyā ca. Samannāgatoti paripuṇṇo. Ariyāyāti niddosāya. Nibbedhikāyāti nibbedhapakkhikāya. Dukkhakkhayagāminiyāti nibbānagāminiyā. So idaṃ dukkhanti evamādīsu ‘‘ettakaṃ dukkhaṃ na ito bhiyyo’’ti sabbampi dukkhasaccaṃ sarasalakkhaṇapaṭivedhena yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti paṭivijjhati. Tassa ca dukkhassa nibbattikaṃ taṇhaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ dukkhasamudayo’’ti. Tadubhayampi yaṃ ṭhānaṃ patvā nirujjhati, taṃ tesaṃ appavattiṃ nibbānaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ dukkhanirodho’’ti. Tassa ca sampāpakaṃ ariyamaggaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’’ti sarasalakkhaṇapaṭivedhena yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti paṭivijjhatīti evamattho veditabbo.
如此以诸谛的自性说明之后,现在依烦恼而作教说,故说“这些漏”等。这些应依前面所说的方法来理解。如此说明三学之后,现在为了显示其圆满的次第,而说“能作意此三学而学”等。其意为:为了各个圆满,作意时也能学;作意后,了知‘这就是学’也能学;了知后,反复省察也能学;省察后,如所见般审虑也能学;审虑后,令心于此安立不动,使其稳固也能学;依止于与各学相应的信、精进、念、定、慧,使它们各自的功能发挥作用也能学;即使在应证知而证知之时,也履行各项工作而修习这三学。即:修习增上戒,善修习增上心,受持并践行增上慧。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sarūpato saccāni dassetvā idāni kilesavasena pariyāyato dassento ‘‘ime āsavā’’tiādimāha. Te vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Evaṃ tisso sikkhāyo dassetvā idāni tāsaṃ pāripūrikkamaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘imā tisso sikkhāyo āvajjanto sikkheyyā’’tiādimāha. Tassattho – paccekaṃ paripūretuṃ āvajjantopi sikkheyya, āvajjitvāpi ‘‘ayaṃ nāma sikkhā’’ti jānantopi sikkheyya, jānitvā punappunaṃ passantopi sikkheyya, passitvā yathādiṭṭhaṃ paccavekkhantopi sikkheyya, paccavekkhitvā tattheva cittaṃ acalaṃ katvā patiṭṭhapentopi sikkheyya, taṃtaṃsikkhāsampayuttasaddhāvīriyasatisamādhipaññāhi sakasakakiccaṃ karontopi sikkheyya, abhiññeyyābhijānanakālepi taṃ taṃ kiccaṃ karontopi tisso sikkhāyo sikkheyya, adhisīlaṃ ācareyya, adhicittaṃ sammā careyya, adhipaññaṃ samādāya vatteyya.
“于此”——这是根本句。依“于此见”等十个词语所说的,正是涵摄三学的一切知者佛陀的教法。此教法为佛陀世尊所见故,称为“见”;依对此教法的忍可故,称为“忍”;依对此教法的乐欲故,称为“乐”;依对此教法的执受故,称为“执”;据其自性义故,称为“法”;据应学之义故,称为“律”;据此二者故,称为“法律”;据所宣说故,称为“圣典”;据最上行之义故,称为“梵行”;据教授教导故,称为“导师教法”。因此,于“于此见”等表达中,即指此佛陀之见、此佛陀之忍、此佛陀之乐、此佛陀之执、此佛陀之法、此佛陀之律。显示巴利原文
Idhāti mūlapadaṃ. Imissā diṭṭhiyātiādīhi dasahi padehi sikkhattayasaṅkhātaṃ sabbaññubuddhasāsanameva kathitaṃ. Tañhi buddhena bhagavatā diṭṭhattā diṭṭhīti vuccati. Tasseva khamanavasena khanti, ruccanavasena ruci, gahaṇavasena ādāyo, sabhāvaṭṭhena dhammo, sikkhitabbaṭṭhena vinayo, tadubhayenapi dhammavinayo, pavuttavasena pāvacanaṃ, seṭṭhacariyaṭṭhena brahmacariyaṃ, anusiṭṭhidānavasena satthusāsananti vuccati. Tasmā ‘‘imissā diṭṭhiyā’’tiādīsu imissā buddhadiṭṭhiyā imissā buddhakhantiyā imissā buddharuciyā imasmiṃ buddhaādāye imasmiṃ buddhadhamme imasmiṃ buddhavinaye.
“乔达弥!你当知,那些法导致贪染,不导致离贪;导致结缚,不导致离缚;导致积聚,不导致损减;导致多欲,不导致少欲;导致不知足,不导致知足;导致愦闹,不导致远离;导致懈怠,不导致精进;导致难养,不导致易养。乔达弥!对此,你应坚定地受持:‘这不是法,这不是律,这不是导师的教法。’”显示巴利原文
‘‘Ye kho tvaṃ, gotami, dhamme jāneyyāsi ‘ime dhammā sarāgāya saṃvattanti, no virāgāya, saññogāya saṃvattanti, no visaññogāya, ācayāya saṃvattanti, no apacayāya, mahicchatāya saṃvattanti, no appicchatāya, asantuṭṭhiyā saṃvattanti, no santuṭṭhiyā, saṅgaṇikāya saṃvattanti , no pavivekāya, kosajjāya saṃvattanti, no vīriyārambhāya, dubbharatāya saṃvattanti, no subharatāyā’ti. Ekaṃsena, gotami, dhāreyyāsi ‘neso dhammo, neso vinayo, netaṃ satthusāsana’nti.
乔达弥,凡是你知道‘这些法导向离贪,不导向贪;……(中略)……导向易养,不导向难养’的法,你应当确然断定:‘这是法,这是律,这是导师的教法。’显示巴利原文
‘‘Ye ca kho tvaṃ, gotami, dhamme jāneyyāsi ‘ime dhammā virāgāya saṃvattanti, no sarāgāya…pe… subharatāya saṃvattanti, no dubbharatāyā’ti. Ekaṃsena, gotami, dhāreyyāsi ‘eso dhammo, eso vinayo, etaṃ satthusāsana’’’nti (a. ni. 8.53; cūḷava. 406) –
如此,当知此中之意为:在佛陀的法与律中,在佛陀的教说中,在佛陀的梵行中,在佛陀的教法中。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vutte imasmiṃ buddhadhammavinaye imasmiṃ buddhapāvacane imasmiṃ buddhabrahmacariye imasmiṃ buddhasāsaneti evamattho veditabbo.
再者,整个以三学为内涵的教法,因为是世尊所见的,以正见为缘、以正见为前导,故称为‘见’;因世尊的容忍故称为‘忍’;因认可故称为‘乐’;因执持故称为‘执’。它能使修行者不堕恶道而予以护持,故称为‘法’;此法又能调伏杂染分,故称为‘律’。既是法又是律,故称‘法律’。或者,以善法调伏不善法,故称‘法律’。由此而有如是言说。显示巴利原文
Api cetaṃ sikkhattayasaṅkhātaṃ sakalaṃ sāsanaṃ bhagavatā diṭṭhattā sammādiṭṭhipaccayattā sammādiṭṭhipubbaṅgamattā ca diṭṭhi. Bhagavato khamanavasena khanti. Ruccanavasena ruci. Gahaṇavasena ādāyo. Attano kārakaṃ apāyesu apatamānaṃ katvā dhāretīti dhammo. Sova saṃkilesapakkhaṃ vinetīti vinayo. Dhammo ca so vinayo cāti dhammavinayo. Kusaladhammehi vā akusaladhammānaṃ esa vinayoti dhammavinayo. Teneva vuttaṃ –
乔达弥!你应当了知:‘这些法导向离欲,不导向贪染……’乔达弥!对此你应坚定地认定:‘这是法,这是律,这是导师的教诫。’显示巴利原文
‘‘Ye ca kho tvaṃ, gotami, dhamme jāneyyāsi ‘ime dhammā virāgāya saṃvattanti, no sarāgāya…pe… ekaṃsena gotami dhāreyyāsi ‘eso dhammo, eso vinayo, etaṃ satthusāsana’’’nti (a. ni. 8.53; cūḷava. 406).
因是以法调伏,不以棍棒等调伏,故称“法与律”。对此也有言:显示巴利原文
Dhammena vā vinayo, na daṇḍādīhīti dhammavinayo. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
有人用棍棒、铁钩和鞭子来调伏,
而大仙以无棍棒、无武器,调伏了龙象。」(《小部》342;《中部》2.352)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Daṇḍeneke damayanti, aṅkusehi kasāhi ca; Adaṇḍena asatthena, nāgo danto mahesinā’’ti. (cūḷava. 342; ma. ni. 2.352);
‘‘Dhammena nīyamānānaṃ, kā usūyā vijānata’’nti. (mahāva. 63);
又或者,为了法而调伏,故称“法律”。因为这种调伏确实是为了无过失的法义,而不是为了生存、财富、欲乐等世间利益。因此,世尊说:“比丘们!这梵行并不是为了欺诳众人而住……”(详如《增支部》4.25)。富楼那长老也说:“贤友!在世尊座下,梵行是为了无取著般涅槃而住。”(《中部》1.259)又或者,因为它能特别地引导,所以称为“律”。从法而来的引导,即是“法律”。因为,它正是从轮回之法或忧悲等法中,特别地引导至涅槃。又或者,它是法的引导,而非外道师的引导,故称“法律”。世尊即是法身,唯有他的引导才是法律。显示巴利原文
Dhammāya vā vinayo dhammavinayo. Anavajjadhammatthañhesa vinayo, na bhavabhogāmisatthaṃ. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘nayidaṃ, bhikkhave, brahmacariyaṃ vussati janakuhanattha’’nti (a. ni. 4.25) vitthāro. Puṇṇattheropi āha ‘‘anupādāparinibbānatthaṃ kho, āvuso, bhagavati brahmacariyaṃ vussatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.259). Visiṭṭhaṃ vā nayatīti vinayo. Dhammato vinayo dhammavinayo. Saṃsāradhammato hi sokādidhammato vā esa visiṭṭhaṃ nibbānaṃ nayati. Dhammassa vā vinayo, na titthakarānanti dhammavinayo. Dhammabhūto hi bhagavā, tasseva vinayo.
又或者,因为诸法才是应当被证知、遍知、断除、修习与作证的,因此,这是针对诸法的调伏,而不是针对众生或命者的调伏,故称“法律”。因为具足义理与文句等功德,较之其他语言更为殊胜的语言,便称为“胜语”,此胜语即是“圣典”。因为在所有修行中,它是最殊胜的修行,故称“梵行”。因为它是天人师——世尊的教敕,故称“导师的教法”。又或者,“成为导师的教敕”本身即是“导师的教法”。因为佛陀说过:“在我灭度后,法与律就是你们的导师”(《长部》2.216),这就是说,法与律即是导师。对于这些词句的义理,应当如此了知。显示巴利原文
Yasmā vā dhammā eva abhiññeyyā pariññeyyā pahātabbā bhāvetabbā sacchikātabbā ca, tasmā esa dhammesu vinayo, na sattesu na jīvesu cāti dhammavinayo. Sātthasabyañjanatādīhi aññesaṃ vacanato padhānaṃ vacananti pavacanaṃ, pavacanameva pāvacanaṃ. Sabbacariyāhi visiṭṭhacariyabhāvena brahmacariyaṃ. Devamanussānaṃ satthubhūtassa bhagavato sāsananti satthusāsanaṃ. Satthubhūtaṃ vā sāsanantipi satthusāsanaṃ. ‘‘So vo mamaccayena satthāti (dī. ni. 2.216) hi dhammavinayova satthā’’ti vuttoti evametesaṃ padānaṃ attho veditabbo.
然而,正因为唯有在此教法中,才能见到能生起一切种类禅那的比丘,而在其他处则不能,所以应当知道,在经文各处所用的“于此”和“在此中”等限定语,正是据此而设。显示巴利原文
Yasmā pana imasmiṃyeva sāsane sabbappakārajjhānanibbattako bhikkhu dissati, na aññatra, tasmā tattha tattha ‘‘imissā’’ti ca ‘‘imasmi’’nti ca ayaṃ niyamo katoti veditabbo.
那些与之相应的诸法依此而活,故名为「命」。在守护的特相中起主导作用者,称为「根」。命即是根,故名「命根」。它对相续流转的生命活动有增上的作用。若从特相等而言,命根的特相是守护与自身不可分离的诸法;作用是令他们转起;现起是使他们安住;足处(近因)是应被维持的诸法。虽然它有守护等特相的差别,但仅在它存在的那个刹那守护那些法,犹如水护持青莲花等。对于那些依各自因缘而生的法,它如乳母保护婴儿般守护;而它自身,则随与己俱生法的关联而运作,犹如舵手操控船只。它不会在诸法坏灭之后再令其转起,因为那时它自己及应被转起的法俱不存在。它也不会于坏灭之刹那安住他们,因为那时它自身正在坏灭,正如逐渐耗尽的灯芯油仍能维持灯焰,但至彻底燃尽时则无法维持;然而,这并非意味它无有守护、转起和安住的功能,应作如是解:它在上述各个适当时机,确实能成办那些作用。或者,被称为「命根」,是「由于住时微少」的缘故,意思是显示巴利原文
Jīvanti tena taṃsampayuttakā dhammāti jīvitaṃ. Anupālanalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ. Jīvitameva indriyaṃ jīvitindriyaṃ. Taṃ pavattasantatādhipateyyaṃ hoti. Lakkhaṇādīhi pana attanā avinibhuttānaṃ dhammānaṃ anupālanalakkhaṇaṃ jīvitindriyaṃ, tesaṃ pavattanarasaṃ, tesaṃyeva ṭhapanapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, yāpayitabbadhammapadaṭṭhānaṃ. Santepi ca anupālanalakkhaṇādimhi vidhāne atthikkhaṇeyeva taṃ te dhamme anupāleti, udakaṃ viya uppalādīni. Yathāsakaṃ paccayehi uppannepi ca dhamme pāleti, dhāti viya kumāraṃ, sayaṃpavattitadhammasambandheneva ca pavattati, niyāmako viya nāvaṃ. Na bhaṅgato uddhaṃ pavattayati, attano ca pavattayitabbānañca abhāvā. Na bhaṅgakkhaṇe ṭhapeti, sayaṃ bhijjamānattā, khīyamāno viya vaṭṭisineho padīpasikhaṃ, na ca anupālanapavattanaṭṭhapanānubhāvavirahitaṃ , yathāvuttakkhaṇe tassa tassa sādhanatoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ṭhitiparittatāya vāti ṭhitikkhaṇassa mandatāya thokatāya. Appakanti mandaṃ lāmakaṃ. Sarasaparittatāya vāti attano paccayabhūtānaṃ kiccānaṃ sampattīnaṃ vā appatāya dubbalatāya.
为分别阐明此二种原因,而说「如何以存续之短促……」等语。此处,当知:这是就五蕴有中的流转而言,当心坏灭时,在一切色法与非色法中,色法虽未灭,但因非色法为色法的前导,故是针对非色命根而说;或是就五蕴有中的死心而言,因死心与一切色法、非色法一同坏灭;或是就四蕴有而言,因四蕴有无色法。「于过去的心的刹那」:指过去心的坏灭刹那具足时,具足该心的补特伽罗可称为「曾活命」,不可称为「活命」,亦不可称为「将活命」。「于未来的心的刹那,将活命」:指未来心的未生起刹那具足时,可称为「将活命」,不可称为「活命」,亦不可称为「曾活命」。「于现在的心的刹那」:指现在心的刹那具足时,可称为「活命」,即现在活命,不可称为「曾活命」,亦不可称为「将活命」。显示巴利原文
Tesaṃ dvinnaṃ kāraṇaṃ vibhāgato dassetuṃ ‘‘kathaṃ ṭhitiparittatāyā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘atīte cittakkhaṇe jīvitthāti evamādi pañcavokārabhave pavattiyaṃ cittassa nirujjhanakāle sabbasmiṃ rūpārūpadhamme anirujjhantepi rūpato arūpassa paṭṭhānabhāvena arūpajīvitaṃ sandhāya, cuticittena vā saddhiṃ sabbesaṃ rūpārūpānaṃ nirujjhanabhāvena pañcavokārabhave cuticittaṃ sandhāya, catuvokārabhave rūpassa abhāvena catuvokārabhavaṃ sandhāya kathita’’nti veditabbaṃ. Atīte cittakkhaṇeti atītacittassa bhaṅgakkhaṇasamaṅgīkāle taṃsamaṅgīpuggalo ‘‘jīvittha’’ iti vattuṃ labbhati. Na jīvatīti ‘‘jīvatī’’tipi vattuṃ na labbhati. Na jīvissatīti ‘‘jīvissatī’’tipi vattuṃ na labbhati. Anāgate cittakkhaṇe jīvissatīti anāgatacittassa anuppajjanakkhaṇasamaṅgīkāle ‘‘jīvissatī’’ti vattuṃ labbhati. Na jīvatīti ‘‘jīvatī’’ti vattuṃ na labbhati. Na jīvitthāti ‘‘jīvittha’’itipi vattuṃ na labbhati. Paccuppanne cittakkhaṇeti paccuppannacittakkhaṇasamaṅgīkāle. Jīvatīti ‘‘idāni jīvatī’’ti vattuṃ labbhati. Na jīvitthāti ‘‘jīvittha’’iti vattuṃ na labbhati. Na jīvissatīti ‘‘jīvissatī’’tipi vattuṃ na labbhati.
「生命与躯体,以及苦与乐」——这首偈颂应知是就五蕴有而说,因为唯有不舍五蕴有时,方能执取苦受。如何理解?「生命」:以生命为首而言,即行蕴。「躯体」:即色蕴。「苦与乐」:则包含舍受——正如《分别论注》所说:‘然而舍受,因其寂静,故亦说为乐’——此即受蕴;而「心」即识蕴。既已宣说此四蕴,依诸蕴以相为同一相之理,当知从相状的角度,想蕴亦已被涵盖。如此,在所说五蕴中,非色法舍色法而转起,但由业等所生的色法并非不转起,而是与同一心相应——这便是明示了以非色法为主导的道理。何以故?于无想有情中,色法亦依此处所累积的业力,不舍离地转起;证入灭尽定者的色法,亦依先前证入初禅的定力,不舍离地转起。如是,即使于自身不转起之处,色法仍如属己者般持续转起;而对于具有‘在自己转起之处即能转起’之性质的非色法来说,它正是色法得以转起的主要原因,故称为「与同一心相应」——当知,这便是阐明了以心为主导的道理。显示巴利原文
Jīvitaṃattabhāvo ca sukhadukkhā cāti ayaṃ gāthā pañcavokārabhavaṃ amuñcitvā labbhamānāya dukkhāya vedanāya gahitattā pañcavokārabhavameva sandhāya vuttāti veditabbā. Kathaṃ? Jīvitanti jīvitasīsena saṅkhārakkhandho. Attabhāvoti rūpakkhandho. ‘‘Upekkhā pana santattā, sukhamicceva bhāsitā’’ti (vibha. aṭṭha. 232) vuttattā upekkhāvedanā antokaritvā sukhadukkhā cāti vedanākkhandho, cittaṃ iti viññāṇakkhandho vutto. Imesaṃ catunnaṃ khandhānaṃ kathitattāyeva khandhalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇabhāvena lakkhaṇākāravasena saññākkhandhopi kathitoti veditabbo. Evaṃ vuttesu pañcasu khandhesu arūpadhammaṃ muñcitvā kammasamuṭṭhānādirūpassa appavattanabhāvena ekacittasamāyuttāti arūpapadhānabhāvo kathito hoti. Kathaṃ? Asaññasatte rūpampi idhupacitakammabalaṃ amuñcitvāva pavattati, nirodhasamāpannānaṃ rūpampi paṭhamasamāpannasamāpattibalaṃ amuñcitvāva pavattati. Evaṃ attano appavattiṭṭhānepi rūpapavattiṃ attano santakameva katvā pavattanasabhāvassa arūpadhammassa attano pavattiṭṭhāne rūpapavattiyā padhānakāraṇabhāvena ekacittasamāyuttāti cittapadhānabhāvo kathitoti veditabbo.
如此,在五蕴有中,当主导色法转起的心灭去时,即便色法仍在持续,那些转起之法亦名为“灭”——因此,是依非色法而说“刹那轻快地流转”。或者,应知这是针对五蕴有中的死心而说。在这样解说时,“苦与乐”指身与心的乐受及苦受;虽然它们在死心的那一刹那并非直接存在,但依于同一相续,与死心一同坏灭,故也被宣说。或者,也应知这是就四蕴有而说。何以故?因为在其他处,“躯体”一词被用作想蕴的异名,所以这里的“躯体”特指想蕴。而在梵天界,虽然没有身乐、身苦和忧受,但凡能以受的通称总摄的,都称为受蕴,并以“苦与乐”来表示,应作如是理解。其余解释方法与前面类似。在这三种解释中,“唯”:指没有恒常、乐、净、我,纯粹不被这些所杂入的意思。“刹那轻快地流转”:依照前面所说的道理,生命等现象的存在时间仅只一个心识刹那那般短暂,因此这个刹那被说为“轻快”、“极为短暂”,就这样流转着。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ pañcavokārabhave pavattiyaṃ rūpapavattiyā padhānabhūtacittanirodhena rūpe dharamāneyeva pavattānaṃ nirodho nāma hotīti arūpadhammavasena eva ‘‘lahuso vattate khaṇo’’ti vuttaṃ. Atha vā pañcavokārabhave cuticittaṃ sandhāya kathitāti veditabbā. Evaṃ kathiyamāne sukhadukkhā cāti kāyikacetasikasukhavedanā ca kāyikacetasikadukkhavedanā ca cuticittakkhaṇe ahontīpi ekasantativasena cuticittena saddhiṃ nirujjhatīti kathitā. Catuvokārabhavaṃ vā sandhāya kathitātipi veditabbā. Kathaṃ ? Aññasmiṃ ṭhāne attabhāvoti saññākkhandhassa vuttabhāvena attabhāvoti saññākkhandhova gahito. Brahmaloke kāyikasukhadukkhadomanassaṃ ahontampi sukhadukkhā cāti vedanāsāmaññato labbhamāno vedanākkhandho gahitoti veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttasadisameva. Imesu ca tīsu vikappesu kevalāti dhuvasukhasubhaattā natthi, kevalaṃ tehi avomissā. Lahuso vattati khaṇoti vuttanayena ekacittakkhaṇikatāya lahuko atiparitto jīvitādīnaṃ khaṇo vattati.
为了显示两种心不会同时生起,而说此偈:“八万四千劫……”。“八万四千劫,那些天众安住”:是指那些天众,获得了八万四千劫的寿命,安住于非想非非想处。也有版本作“那些人”。然而,“他们也不以两种心同时活命”:指那些天众也并非以两心融成一体、如同双头并行之心那样活命,而是以心相续不断而活命,这就是它的意思。显示巴利原文
Ekato dvinnaṃ cittānaṃ appavattiṃ dassento ‘‘cullāsītisahassānī’’ti gāthamāha. Cullāsītisahassāni, kappā tiṭṭhanti ye marūti ye devagaṇā caturāsīti kappasahassāni āyuṃ gahetvā nevasaññānāsaññāyatane tiṭṭhanti. ‘‘Ye narā’’tipi pāḷi. Na tveva tepi jīvanti, dvīhi cittasamohitāti tepi devā dvīhi cittehi samohitā ekato hutvā yuganaddhena cittena na tu eva jīvanti, ekenekena cittena jīvantīti attho.
现在,为说明临终之时,而说此偈:“已灭……”。其中,“已灭”:指那些已坏灭、已消逝的诸蕴。“临死者”:即死去的人。“或住者”:或还活着的人。“一切蕴皆相似”:无论是死后的已灭蕴,还是生命流转中坏灭的已灭蕴,由于都不能再重新组合,从这个意义上说,一切已灭的蕴都是“相似”的。“已去而无结生”:那些已灭的蕴不能再回来结生,因此称为“已去而无结生”。显示巴利原文
Idāni maraṇakālaṃ dassento ‘‘ye niruddhā’’ti gāthamāha. Tattha ye niruddhāti ye khandhā niruddhā atthaṅgatā. Marantassāti matassa. Tiṭṭhamānassa vāti dharamānassa vā. Sabbepi sadisā khandhāti cutito uddhaṃ niruddhakkhandhā vā pavatte niruddhakkhandhā vā puna ghaṭetuṃ asakkuṇeyyaṭṭhena sabbepi khandhā sadisā. Gatā appaṭisandhikāti niruddhakkhandhānaṃ puna āgantvā paṭisandhānābhāvena gatā appaṭisandhikāti vuccanti.
现在,为了说明三时中已灭的诸蕴并无差别,而说此偈:「无间……」。其中,「无间已坏者,与未来当坏者」:指那些作为无间过去而坏灭的蕴,以及未来将坏灭的蕴。「其间」:指在它们中间、已灭的现在诸蕴。「于相无不平」:不平的状态即是‘不平’,这里说没有那种不平,意思是它们之间没有差别。「相」:指能被认知的特征,在特征上并无不平。显示巴利原文
Idāni tīsu kālesu niruddhakkhandhānaṃ nānattaṃ natthīti dassetuṃ ‘‘anantarā’’ti gāthamāha. Tattha anantarā ca ye bhaggā, ye ca bhaggā anāgatāti ye khandhā anantarātītā hutvā bhinnā niruddhā, ye ca anāgatā khandhā bhijjissanti. Tadantareti tesaṃ antare niruddhānaṃ paccuppannakhandhānaṃ. Vesamaṃ natthi lakkhaṇeti visamassa bhāvo vesamaṃ, taṃ vesamaṃ natthi, tehi nānattaṃ natthīti attho. Lakkhīyatīti lakkhaṇaṃ, tasmiṃ lakkhaṇe.
现在,为了说明未来蕴与现在蕴不混杂的情况,而说了此偈:「未生者不成……」。 「未生者不成」:是指依靠那未生成、未显现的未来蕴,不能成为‘已生’、不能成为‘已产生’。通过这句话,说明了未来蕴与现在蕴不混杂的道理。「以现在者活命」:是依靠那属于刹那现在的、正在流转的蕴来活命。通过这句话,说明了并不是在一刹那中以两个心来活命。「由心坏灭而死」:由于不是在一刹那中以两个心活命,所以死是由心的坏灭导致的。也有版本作「由心坏灭以上」,其含义非常直接。「施设,究竟义」:正如「凡人的色身会衰老,但姓名不会衰老」(《相应部》1.76)这类说法的次第,那仅仅是施设,并不会真正衰老;而以不会衰老的真实自性,具有最上安住之义的,就是「究竟义」,意思是依于自性而安住。因为像‘戴特死了、弥陀死了’这样的说法,确实只是施设性地存续着。或者也可以解释为,「究竟义」即指胜义。拥有最上意义的,就是胜义。「譬如未生的虚空」:这就是说,如同依于不存在的事物来谈论一样,说「死」并非基于「人」这种不存在的施设,而是基于名为‘命根坏灭’的真实法来谈论的。显示巴利原文
Idāni anāgatakkhandhānaṃ vattamānakkhandhehi asammissabhāvaṃ kathento ‘‘anibbattena na jāto’’ti gāthamāha. Anibbattena na jātoti ajātena apātubhūtena anāgatakkhandhena na jāto na nibbatto. Etena anāgatakkhandhassa vattamānakkhandhena asammissabhāvaṃ kathesi. Paccuppannena jīvatīti khaṇapaccuppannena vattamānakkhandhena jīvati. Etena ekakkhaṇe dvīhi cittehi na jīvatīti kathitaṃ. Cittabhaggā matoti dvīhi cittehi ekakkhaṇe ajīvanabhāvena cittabhaṅgena mato. ‘‘Uparito cittabhaṅgā’’tipi pāḷi, taṃ ujukameva. Paññatti paramatthiyāti ‘‘rūpaṃ jīrati maccānaṃ, nāmagottaṃ na jīratī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.76) vacanakkamena paṇṇattimattaṃ na jīraṇasabhāvena paramā ṭhiti etissāti paramatthiyā, sabhāvaṭṭhitikāti attho. ‘‘Datto mato, mitto mato’’ti paṇṇattimattameva hi tiṭṭhati. Atha vā paramatthiyāti paramatthikā. Paramo attho etissāti paramatthikā. Ajaṭākāsoti paññattiyā natthidhammaṃ paṭicca kathanaṃ viya matoti paññatti natthidhammaṃ paṭicca na kathiyati, jīvitindriyabhaṅgasaṅkhātaṃ dhammaṃ paṭicca kathiyati.
「不往藏处已坏」:是指那些已经破灭的诸蕴,它们不会去到任何的贮藏处、安置处或积聚处,所以称为「不往藏处」。「未来无有堆」:在未来,它们也没有堆状、积聚的状态。「唯已生者住」:依现在而言,已经生起的,在住立的刹那,仅仅是作为具有坏灭性质的法而住立着。譬喻为什么?「如锥端芥子」:就像放置在针尖上的芥菜籽一样。显示巴利原文
Anidhānagatābhaggāti ye khandhā bhinnā, te nidhānaṃ nihitaṃ nicayaṃ na gacchantīti anidhānagatā. Puñjo natthi anāgateti anāgatepi nesaṃ puñjabhāvo rāsibhāvo natthi. Nibbattāyeva tiṭṭhantīti paccuppannavasena uppannā ṭhitikkhaṇe vayadhammāva hutvā tiṭṭhanti. Kimiva? Āragge sāsapūpamāti sūcimukhe sāsapo viya.
现在,为了说明诸蕴可见的状态,而说此偈:「已生……」等等。在这里,「已生之法」:指现在的诸蕴。「它们坏灭在前」:将它们的坏灭置于前,即以坏灭为前导。「衰坏法」:指其本性即是坏灭。「不为先者摄」:不被过去已生的诸蕴所混合,不相掺杂。显示巴利原文
Idāni khandhānaṃ dassanabhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘nibbattāna’’nti gāthamāha. Tattha nibbattānaṃ dhammānanti paccuppannānaṃ khandhānaṃ. Bhaṅgo nesaṃ purakkhatoti etesaṃ bhedo purato katvā ṭhapito. Palokadhammāti nassanasabhāvā. Purāṇehi adhissitāti pure uppannehi khandhehi na missitā na saṃsaggā.
现在,为了说明诸蕴不可见的状态,而说此偈:「从不见来……」等等。在这里,「从不见来」:它们来时,正是在不被看见的情况下来到,也就是生起。「坏灭去无见」:坏灭之后,便归于不可见的状态。「如空中电闪」:犹如在开阔的天空中,闪电的闪现与消逝。「生起复还灭」:从过去际以来,诸蕴既生起又坏灭。如同「月生、圆满、亏蚀」(《本生》1.5.3)等文句中的用法那样。显示巴利原文
Idāni khandhānaṃ adassanabhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘adassanato āyantī’’ti gāthamāha. Tattha adassanato āyantīti adissamānāyeva āgacchanti uppajjanti. Bhaṅgā gacchantidassananti bhedā bhaṅgato uddhaṃ adassanabhāvaṃ gacchanti. Vijjuppādova ākāseti vivaṭākāse vijjulatāniccharaṇaṃ viya. Uppajjanti vayanti cāti pubbantato uddhaṃ uppajjanti ca bhijjanti ca, nassantīti attho. ‘‘Udeti āpūrati veti cando’’ti (jā. 1.5.3) evamādīsu viya.
这样说明了寿的「住立」极其微细之后,现在接着说明其「自性」的微细,所以说:「如何以自性之微细性……」等等。在这里,「依入息而系缚的命」:指系缚于入内之鼻风的命根。「出息」:指向外散出的鼻风。「入出息」:指此二者的合称。「依大种而系缚的命」:指系缚于地、水、火、风四大种的命,这些大种由四因所造。「依抟食而系缚的命」:指系缚于所食、所饮等抟食的命。「依暖而系缚的命」:指系缚于业所生火界的命。「依识而系缚的命」:指系缚于有分识的命。关于此,曾有这样说:「寿、暖与识,当它们舍弃身体时」(《相应部》3.95)。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ ṭhitiparittataṃ dassetvā idāni sarasaparittataṃ dassento ‘‘kathaṃ sarasaparittatāyā’’tiādimāha. Tattha assāsūpanibandhaṃ jīvitanti abbhantarapavisananāsikavātapaṭibaddhaṃ jīvitindriyaṃ. Passāsoti bahinikkhamananāsikavāto. Assāsapassāsoti tadubhayaṃ. Mahābhūtūpanibandhanti catusamuṭṭhānikānaṃ pathavīāpatejavāyānaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ paṭibaddhaṃ jīvitaṃ. Kabaḷīkārāhārūpanibandhanti asitapītādikabaḷīkāraāhārena upanibandhaṃ. Usmūpanibandhanti kammajatejodhātūpanibandhaṃ. Viññāṇūpanibandhanti bhavaṅgaviññāṇūpanibandhaṃ. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘āyu usmā ca viññāṇaṃ, yadā kāyaṃ jahantima’’nti (saṃ. ni. 3.95).
现在,为了显示这些命虚弱的原因,而说:「这些的根也是虚弱的……」等等。在这里,「根也是」:指在建立的意义上作为根本的,亦是如此。因为对于入出息,业生身是根本;对于大种等,无明、业、渴爱和食是根本。「这些的」:指前述入息等,它们是依命根转起的原因而说。因为在它们当中,只要缺少任何一项,命根便无法安立。「虚弱的」:指力量微薄。「前因也是」:在过去生中,成为此异熟轮转之因的、被称作因缘的无明、行、渴爱、取、有,这些也是。「这些命是虚弱的,那些缘也是虚弱的」:指所缘等共同的缘,也是虚弱的。「能生的」:即作为主导而生起诸法者,即渴爱。「共地的」:指同时生起的色法与非色法。「相应的」:指合为一体的非色法。「俱生的」:指在同一心中生起的那些法。「能令结合的也是」:指在死与结生的方式上能令结合者,被称为「能令结合者」,也就是轮转之根的渴爱。关于这一点,确实有说:「以渴爱为第二者的那个人」。「恒常虚弱的」:指无间断地虚弱。「不住立的」:即不安住,掉落之后便不停留。显示巴利原文
Idāni nesaṃ dubbalakāraṇaṃ dassento ‘‘mūlampi imesaṃ dubbala’’ntiādimāha. Tattha mūlampīti patiṭṭhaṭṭhena mūlabhūtampi. Assāsapassāsānañhi karajakāyo mūlaṃ. Mahābhūtādīnaṃ avijjākammataṇhāhārā. Imesanti vuttappakārānaṃ assāsādīnaṃ jīvitindriyapavattikāraṇavasena vuttānaṃ. Etesu hi ekekasmiṃ asati jīvitindriyaṃ na tiṭṭhati. Dubbalanti appathāmaṃ. Pubbahetūpīti atītajātiyaṃ imassa vipākavaṭṭassa hetubhūtā kāraṇasaṅkhātā avijjāsaṅkhārataṇhupādānabhavāpi. Imesaṃ dubbalā ye paccayā tepi dubbalāti ye ārammaṇādisādhāraṇapaccayā. Pabhāvikāti padhānaṃ hutvā uppādikā bhavataṇhā. Sahabhūmīti sahabhavikāpi rūpārūpadhammā. Sampayogāpīti ekato yuttāpi arūpadhammā. Sahajāpīti saddhiṃ ekacitte uppannāpi. Yāpi payojikāti cutipaṭisandhivasena yojetuṃ niyuttāti payojikā, vaṭṭamūlakā taṇhā. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘taṇhādutiyo puriso’’ti (itivu. 15, 105). Niccadubbalāti nirantarena dubbalā. Anavaṭṭhitāti na avaṭṭhitā, otaritvā na ṭhitā. Paripātayanti imeti ime aññamaññaṃ pātayanti khepayanti. Aññamaññassāti añño aññassa, eko ekassāti attho. Hi-iti kāraṇatthe nipāto. Natthi tāyitāti tāyano rakkhako natthi. Na cāpi ṭhapenti aññamaññanti aññe aññaṃ ṭhapetuṃ na sakkonti. Yopinibbattako so na vijjatīti yopi imesaṃ uppādako dhammo, so idāni natthi.
「任何一者不会因任何一者而减损」:没有任何一者,会依赖于另一者而减损。「这些如乾闼婆城般的,一切皆」:因为所有这一切诸蕴,在一切方面都必定趋于坏灭。「这些被前者所生的」:指这些正在转起的诸法,是由过去的因缘所生的。「那些能生的也是」:那些能令这些转起诸法生起的过去因缘,「它们先前已死灭」:那些所说的因缘,在现在的转起还未来到之前,自己首先已达到了死亡。「前面的以及后面的也是」:指作为前因缘的,以及后面由缘所生的诸法,「彼此于何时也不曾得见」:在任何时候,它们彼此之间都从未被见到过。这里的“ma”是为了词句的连结而说的。显示巴利原文
Na ca kenaci koci hāyatīti koci ekopi kassaci vasena na parihāyati. Gandhabbā ca ime hi sabbasoti sabbe hi ime khandhā sabbākārena bhaṅgaṃ pāpuṇituṃ yuttā. Purimehi pabhāvitā imeti pubbahetupaccayehi ime vattamānakā uppādikā. Yepi pabhāvikāti yepi ime vattamānakā uppādakā pubbahetupaccayā. Te pure matāti te vuttappakārapaccayā vattamānaṃ apāpuṇitvā paṭhamameva maraṇaṃ pattā. Purimāpi ca pacchimāpi cāti purimā pubbahetupaccayāpi ca pacchimā vattamāne paccayasamuppannā ca. Aññamaññaṃ na kadāci maddasaṃsūti aññamaññaṃ kismiñci kāle na diṭṭhapubbā. Ma-kāro padasandhivasena vutto.
「于四天王众的天神们」:名为持国天王、增长天王、广目天王、俱毘罗的四大王,是这些天众的主宰,因此被称为「四天王众」。以色等五欲而游戏嬉乐者,即是「天」。他们住在须弥山的中部。他们当中,有的居住在山坪处,有的居住在虚空中。他们的相续,一直延续到轮围山。嬉戏放逸者、意忿放逸者、寒云者、热云者、月天子、日天子——所有这些,都只是住在四天王众天界里的那些天神,其生命便是如此。「依止」:即缘于。「少许」:这是对多、久的否定。「短暂的」:指时间很短,这是对长日延续的否定。「刹那的」:指极短的时间,这是对时间间隔的否定。「轻快的」:指极为轻快,这是对缓慢的否定。「其他的」:这是对强力迅速的否定。「不能经久的」:从时间上说,不能耐受久远。「不长久住立的」:因为不能持续许多天而长久安住,故称不长久住立,这是对日数的否定。显示巴利原文
Cātumahārājikānaṃ devānanti dhataraṭṭhavirūḷhakavirūpakkhakuverasaṅkhātā catumahārājā issarā etesanti cātumahārājikā. Rūpādīhi dibbanti kīḷantīti devā. Te sinerupabbatassa vemajjhe honti. Tesu atthi pabbataṭṭhakāpi, atthi ākāsaṭṭhakāpi. Tesaṃ paramparā cakkavāḷapabbataṃ pattā. Khiḍḍāpadosikā manopadosikā sītavalāhakā uṇhavalāhakā candimā devaputto sūriyo devaputtoti ete sabbepi cātumahārājikadevalokaṭṭhā eva tesaṃ cātumahārājikānaṃ jīvitaṃ. Upādāyāti paṭicca. Parittakanti vuddhipaṭisedho. Thokanti mandakālaṃ, dīghadivasapaṭisedho. Khaṇikanti mandakālaṃ, kālantarapaṭisedho. Lahukanti sallahukaṃ, alasapaṭisedho. Itaranti sīghabalavapaṭisedho . Anaddhanīyanti kālavasena na addhānakkhamaṃ. Naciraṭṭhitikanti divasena ciraṃ na tiṭṭhatīti naciraṭṭhitikaṃ, divasapaṭisedho.
「三十三天」:因有三十三人化生于此,故名三十三天。也有别解:三十三天仅是那些天神的名号。他们有住于山坪者,有住于虚空者,其相续连延至轮围山。夜摩天等诸天亦然:任一天界诸天的相续无不至于轮围山。‘已行、已往、已达天乐者’名为夜摩天。‘满意、喜悦者’名为兜率天。‘对自然所缘格外希求殊妙变化时,随欲化现诸欲乐而欢喜者’名为化乐天。‘了知他人心意迁流,于他所化欲乐中令自在转者’名为他化自在天。‘于梵身中被指派为梵众者’名为梵身天,一切五蕴有的梵天皆为此词所摄。显示巴利原文
Tāvatiṃsānanti tettiṃsajanā tattha upapannāti tāvatiṃsā. Api ca tāvatiṃsāti tesaṃ devānaṃ nāmamevātipi vuttaṃ. Tepi atthi pabbataṭṭhakā, atthi ākāsaṭṭhakā, tesaṃ paramparā cakkavāḷapabbataṃ pattā. Tathā yāmādīnaṃ. Ekadevalokepi hi devānaṃ paramparā cakkavāḷapabbataṃ appattā nāma natthi. Dibbasukhaṃ yātā payātā sampattāti yāmā. Tuṭṭhā pahaṭṭhāti tusitā. Pakatipaṭiyattārammaṇato atirekena nimmitukāmakāle yathārucite bhoge nimminitvā ramantīti nimmānaratī. Cittācāraṃ ñatvā parehi nimmitesu bhogesu vasaṃ vattentīti paranimmitavasavattī. Brahmakāye brahmaghaṭāya niyuttāti brahmakāyikā. Sabbepi pañcavokārabrahmāno gahitā.
「将去者」:即乾闼婆。「他世」:即另一个世界。「比丘们,那个长久存活者」:那个长久住立的人,他住立的时间仅仅百岁左右。「或者极少更增上」:在百岁以上,不存在能住立两百岁的人。「他应轻蔑它」:他应当轻视那个生命,视为低劣。也有人读作「他应轻蔑它」的另一种形式。「度过」:指超越过去。「日夜」:指一日一夜的区分。「被灭绝」:命根灭去,归于无有。「诸有情的寿被耗尽」:有情的寿行走向坏尽。「犹如少河之水那样」:就像一条水已断绝的小河之水,同样地,有情的寿也是如此耗尽。因为从究竟义上来说,有情的寿刹那极其微细,仅仅只是一个心识刹那而已。正如车轮转动时,只以一个轮辐的部分在转动,停住时也只以一个部分停住;同样地,有情的生命只有一个心识刹那。当那个心识刚刚灭去时,有情就被称为「灭去」。显示巴利原文
Gamaniyoti gandhabbo. Samparāyoti paraloko. Yo bhikkhave ciraṃ jīvati, so vassasatanti yo ciraṃ tiṭṭhamāno, so vassasatamattaṃ tiṭṭhati. Appaṃ vā bhiyyoti vassasatato upari tiṭṭhamāno dve vassasatāni tiṭṭhamāno nāma natthi. Hīḷeyya nanti naṃ jīvitaṃ avaññātaṃ kareyya, lāmakato cinteyya. ‘‘Hīḷeyyāna’’nti ca paṭhanti. Accayantīti atikkamanti. Ahorattāti rattindivaparicchedā. Uparujjhatīti jīvitindriyaṃ nirujjhati, abhāvaṃ upagacchati. Āyu khiyyati maccānanti sattānaṃ āyusaṅkhāro khayaṃ yāti. Kunnadīnaṃva odakanti yathā udakacchinnāya kunnadiyā udakaṃ, evaṃ maccānaṃ āyu khiyyati. Paramatthato hi atiparitto sattānaṃ jīvitakkhaṇo ekacittakkhaṇikamattoyeva. Yathā nāma rathacakkaṃ pavattamānampi ekeneva nemipadesena pavattati, tiṭṭhamānampi ekeneva tiṭṭhati, evameva ekacittakkhaṇikaṃ sattānaṃ jīvitaṃ tasmiṃ citte niruddhamatte satto niruddhoti vuccati.
「dhīrā」即「dhīrā」一词。再次说「dhīrā」是指贤者(paṇḍitā)。「dhitimā」:因为他有慧(dhiti),所以称为具慧者。「dhitisampannā」:指具足慧,即成就了贤智。「dhīkatapāpā」:指被呵责的恶、已摒弃的恶。为了显示这个同义说法,接着说:“dhī,被称为慧”等等。其中,“它了知(pajānāti)”,所以称为慧(paññā)。了知什么?以“这是苦”等方式,了知四圣谛。不过,在义注里则说:“以令了知(paññāpana)为义,称为慧”。它令了知什么?它令了知“无常、苦、无我”。这个慧,因为能制伏无明,以增上的意义而成为根(indriya);或者以见为相,而做自在者的作用,因此也是根。慧本身就是根,所以叫做「慧根」(paññindriya)。另外,这个慧以照明为相,也以了知为相。好比四面有墙的屋子,夜晚燃起灯,黑暗就消失,光明显现;同样,慧以照明为相。没有能与慧的光照相比的光明。因为有慧者结跏趺坐的时候,十千世界界就会一片光明。因此,那先长老说——显示巴利原文
Dhīrāti dhīrā iti. Puna dhīrāti paṇḍitā. Dhitimāti dhiti assa atthīti dhitimā. Dhitisampannāti paṇḍiccena samannāgatā. Dhīkatapāpāti garahitapāpā. Taṃyeva pariyāyaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘dhī vuccati paññā’’tiādimāha. Tattha pajānātīti paññā. Kiṃ pajānāti? ‘‘Idaṃ dukkha’’ntiādinā nayena ariyasaccāni. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘paññāpanavasena paññā’’ti vuttā. Kinti paññāpeti? ‘‘Aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattā’’ti paññāpeti. Sāva avijjāya abhibhavanato adhipatiyaṭṭhena indriyaṃ, dassanalakkhaṇe vā indaṭṭhaṃ kāretītipi indriyaṃ, paññāva indriyaṃ paññindriyaṃ. Sā panesā obhāsanalakkhaṇā, pajānanalakkhaṇā ca; yathā hi catubhittike gehe rattibhāge dīpe jalite andhakāraṃ nirujjhati, āloko pātubhavati, evameva obhāsanalakkhaṇā paññā. Paññobhāsasamo obhāso nāma natthi. Paññavato hi ekapallaṅkena nisinnassa dasasahassilokadhātu ekālokā hoti. Tenāha thero –
大王,犹如有人将油灯带入暗室,那盏灯进入后便驱散了黑暗,带来光亮,显发光明,使种种色清晰可见;同样地,大王,慧生起时,驱散无明的黑暗,产生明照,显发智光,并使诸圣谛清晰可见。大王,慧正是以这般照明为相。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yathā, mahārāja, puriso andhakāre gehe telappadīpaṃ paveseyya, paviṭṭho padīpo andhakāraṃ viddhaṃseti, obhāsaṃ janeti, ālokaṃ vidaṃseti, pākaṭāni ca rūpāni karoti; evameva kho, mahārāja, paññā uppajjamānā avijjandhakāraṃ viddhaṃseti, vijjobhāsaṃ janeti, ñāṇālokaṃ vidaṃseti, pākaṭāni ariyasaccāni karoti. Evaṃ kho, mahārāja, obhāsanalakkhaṇā paññā’’ti (mi. pa. 2.1.15).
又如善巧的医生了知病人适宜与不适宜的食物等;同样,慧生起时,能了知善与不善、应修与不应修、低劣与殊胜、黑与白、有对应与无对应的诸法。关于这一点,法将舍利弗也曾说过:‘贤友,因“它了知、它了知”,故称为有慧者。了知什么呢?了知“这是苦”……’(《中部》1.449)应当广说。如此,应知慧以了知为相。显示巴利原文
Yathā pana cheko bhisakko āturānaṃ sappāyāsappāyāni bhojanādīni jānāti, evaṃ paññā uppajjamānā kusalākusale sevitabbāsevitabbe hīnappaṇītakaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgaappaṭibhāge dhamme pajānāti. Vuttampi cetaṃ dhammasenāpatinā ‘‘pajānāti pajānātīti kho, āvuso, tasmā paññavāti vuccati. Kiñca pajānāti? Idaṃ dukkhanti pajānātī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.449) vitthāretabbaṃ. Evamassā pajānanalakkhaṇatā veditabbā.
又有一种说法:慧以通达诸法的如实自性为相,或以无碍通达为相,犹如善巧射手射出的箭贯穿靶子;其作用是照亮对象,如同灯;其现起是不迷乱,犹如森林中的善巧向导。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo – yathāsabhāvapaṭivedhalakkhaṇā paññā, akkhalitapaṭivedhalakkhaṇā vā, kusalissāsakhittausupaṭivedho viya. Visayobhāsarasā, padīpo viya. Asammohapaccupaṭṭhānā, araññagatasudesako viya.
“Khandhadhīrā(蕴慧者)”指在五蕴中运转智慧者。“dhātudhīrā(界慧者)”指在十八界中运转智慧者。其余的词也应依此方式理解。“Te dhīrā evamāhaṃsu”意为这些智者这样说:“少许、微小。”又说:“一点点、刹那。”又宣说:“轻、短暂。”并以种种方式说:“不长久、不持久。”显示巴利原文
Khandhadhīrāti pañcasu khandhesuñāṇaṃ pavattentīti khandhadhīrā. Aṭṭhārasasu dhātūsu ñāṇaṃ pavattentīti dhātudhīrā. Sesesupi iminā nayena attho netabbo. Te dhīrā evamāhaṃsūti ete paṇḍitā evaṃ kathayiṃsu. Kathentīti ‘‘appakaṃ parittaka’’nti kathayanti. Bhaṇantīti ‘‘thokaṃ khaṇika’’nti bhāsanti. Dīpayantīti ‘‘lahukaṃ ittara’’nti patiṭṭhapenti. Voharantīti ‘‘anaddhanikaṃ naciraṭṭhitika’’nti nānāvidhena byavaharanti.
11 现在,为了显示那些不如此而行者所遭遇的不幸,说了“passāmi(我看见)”这首偈颂。其中,“passāmi”意为用肉眼等看见。“loke(世间)”指地狱等处。“pariphandamānaṃ(颤抖)”指到处颤抖。“pajaṃ imaṃ(这些众生)”指这些有情的集合。“taṇhāgataṃ(被渴爱所制)”意指被渴爱征服、击倒。“bhavesu(有中)”指欲有等生存状态。“hīnā narā(卑劣的人)”指行为下劣之人。“maccumukhe lapanti(在死门口悲叹)”指临死时在死亡面前悲泣。“avītataṇhāse(未离渴爱者)”指未离渴爱者。“bhavā(有)”指欲有等。“bhavābhavesu”即于种种有,也就是一再、反复的生存。显示巴利原文
11. Idāni ye tathā na karonti, tesaṃ byasanuppattiṃ dassento ‘‘passāmī’’ti gāthamāha. Tattha passāmīti maṃsacakkhuādīhi pekkhāmi. Loketi apāyādimhi. Pariphandamānanti ito cito ca phandamānaṃ. Pajaṃ imanti imaṃ sattakāyaṃ. Taṇhāgatanti taṇhāya gataṃ abhibhūtaṃ nipātitanti adhippāyo. Bhavesūti kāmabhavādīsu. Hīnā narāti hīnakammantā narā. Maccumukhe lapantīti antakāle sampatte maraṇamukhe paridevanti. Avītataṇhāseti avigatataṇhā. Bhavāti kāmabhavādikā. Bhavesūti kāmabhavādikesu. Atha vā bhavābhavesūti bhavabhavesu, punappunabhavesūti vuttaṃ hoti.
“Passāmi”解释为:我也用肉眼看。肉眼有两种:带资具眼和净色眼。其中,位于眼眶内,下方依眼眶骨、上方依眉骨、两侧依眼窝、外部以睫毛为界,由贯穿眼眶中央的腱索与脑相连,带有黑白圈斑点的肉团,称为“带资具眼”。在这肉团之中,依止于彼处、系属于彼处,由四大所造的净色,称为“净色眼”。这里指的是后者。这个净色眼,位于带资具眼之中,坐落在白圈环绕的黑圈中央,正对面前站立者身形所处的视野位置。它存在于七层眼膜之内,犹如油渗透七层棉花一般,遍满七层眼膜,大小如虱子的头。它恰如其分地为眼识等作为事(所依)与门而安住。显示巴利原文
Passāmīti maṃsacakkhunāpi passāmīti duvidhaṃ maṃsacakkhu – sasambhāracakkhu pasādacakkhūti. Tattha yoyaṃ akkhikūpake patiṭṭhito heṭṭhā akkhikūpakaṭṭhikena upari bhamukaṭṭhikena ubhato akkhikūṭehi bahiddhā akkhilomehi paricchinno akkhikūpakamajjhā nikkhantena nhārusuttakena matthaluṅge ābaddho setakaṇhamaṇḍalavicitto maṃsapiṇḍo, idaṃ sasambhāracakkhu nāma. Yo pana ettha sito ettha paṭibaddho catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ upādāya pasādo, idaṃ pasādacakkhu nāma. Idamadhippetaṃ. Tadetaṃ tassa sasambhāracakkhuno setamaṇḍalaparikkhittassa kaṇhamaṇḍalassa majjhe abhimukhe ṭhitānaṃ sarīrasaṇṭhānuppattipadese diṭṭhamaṇḍale sattasu picupaṭalesu āsittatelaṃ picupaṭalāni viya sattakkhipaṭalāni byāpetvā pamāṇato ūkāsiramattaṃ cakkhuviññāṇādīnaṃ yathārahaṃ vatthudvārabhāvaṃ sādhayamānaṃ tiṭṭhati.
因为能看,故称为眼,我用肉眼看。天眼:即如“诸比丘,我以清净超人的天眼,见到……”(《中部》1.284)这样所说的天眼。慧眼:即如“远离尘垢的法眼生起”(《中部》2.395;《大品》16)这样所说的慧眼。佛眼:即如“诸比丘,我以佛眼观察世间,见到……”(《中部》1.283)这样所说的佛眼。一切眼:即如“一切眼就是所谓的一切知智”(《小部注》,陶他咖童子问解说32;摩伽罗阇童子问解说85)这样所说的一切眼。“Passāmi(我看见)”:即用肉眼看色,如同观看放在掌中的余甘子果;“Dakkhāmi(我了知)”:即用天眼了知众生的死与生;“Olokemi(我观察)”:即用慧眼观察四圣谛;“Nijjhāyāmi(我审虑)”:即用佛眼审察信等五根;“Upaparikkhāmi(我遍察)”:即用一切眼遍察五种可被引导的众生。显示巴利原文
Taṃ cakkhatīti cakkhu, tena maṃsacakkhunā passāmi. Dibbacakkhunāti ‘‘addasaṃ kho ahaṃ, bhikkhave, dibbena cakkhunā visuddhenā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.284) evaṃvidhena dibbacakkhunā. Paññācakkhunāti ‘‘virajaṃ vītamalaṃ dhammacakkhuṃ udapādī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.395; mahāva. 16) evaṃ āgatena paññācakkhunā. Buddhacakkhunāti ‘‘addasaṃ kho ahaṃ, bhikkhave, buddhacakkhunā lokaṃ volokento’’ti (ma. ni. 1.283) evamāgatena buddhacakkhunā. Samantacakkhunāti ‘‘samantacakkhu vuccati sabbaññutaññāṇa’’nti (cūḷani. dhotakamāṇavapucchāiddesa 32; mogharājamāṇavapucchāniddesa 85) evamāgatena samantacakkhunā. Passāmīti maṃsacakkhunā hatthatale ṭhapitāmalakaṃ viya rūpagataṃ maṃsacakkhunā. Dakkhāmīti sañjānāmi dibbena cakkhunā cutūpapātaṃ. Olokemīti avalokemi paññācakkhunā catusaccaṃ. Nijjhāyāmīti cintemi buddhacakkhunā saddhāpañcamakāni indriyāni. Upaparikkhāmīti samantato ikkhāmi pariyesāmi samantacakkhunā pañca neyyapathe.
所言“因渴爱的颤动而颤动”(taṇhāphandanāya phandamānaṃ),是指由渴爱的躁动而躁动。此后,从邪见的颤动等,直至因邪见的灾患之苦而颤动的终点,如前文所明,故容易了知。“Samphandamānaṃ”是反复地颤动。“Vipphandamānaṃ”是以种种不同的方式颤动。“Vedhamānaṃ”是震动。“Pavedhamānaṃ”是剧烈震动。“Sampavedhamānaṃ”是一再地、反复地震动。又或者,这是经由前缀来扩展词义。显示巴利原文
Taṇhāphandanāya phandamānanti taṇhācalanāya calamānaṃ. Ito paraṃ diṭṭhiphandanādidiṭṭhibyasanena dukkhena phandamānapariyosānaṃ vuttanayattā uttānameva. Samphandamānanti punappunaṃ phandamānaṃ. Vipphandamānanti nānāvidhena calamānaṃ. Vedhamānanti kampamānaṃ. Pavedhamānanti padhānena kampamānaṃ. Sampavedhamānanti punappunaṃ kampamānaṃ. Upasaggena vā padaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ.
所言“Taṇhānugataṃ”,指被渴爱渗入者;“taṇhāyānusaṭaṃ”,指被渴爱遍满者;“taṇhāyāsannaṃ”,指沉没于渴爱者;“taṇhāya pātitaṃ”,指被渴爱抛掷者,或也有读作“paripātitaṃ”(被彻底抛掷)的;“abhibhūtaṃ”,指被渴爱征服、覆盖者;“pariyādinnacittaṃ”,指被渴爱耗尽而取走其心者。换个角度来说:就像被洪流冲走的人,是为渴爱所带走者;如同堕入执取的色等缘中的人,是为渴爱所跟随者;如同覆盖水面并蔓延开来的蓝绿藻,是为渴爱所遍覆者;如同掉入粪坑的人,是沉入渴爱者;如同从树顶坠下而堕入地狱的人,是被渴爱抛掷者;如同被执取的色所结成的系缚,是为渴爱所征服者;如同那个执取所执取色的人,在观智生起之后的状态,即是渴爱耗尽心的状态。又或者说:被欲贪所带走的,称为渴爱所行;被欲贪与渴爱所跟随的,称为渴爱跟随;被欲漏所遍满的,称为渴爱遍覆;被欲的热恼所沉没的,称为沉入渴爱;被欲的联结所抛掷的,称为被渴爱抛掷;被欲的暴流所显示巴利原文
Taṇhānugatanti taṇhāya anupaviṭṭhaṃ. Taṇhāyānusaṭanti taṇhāya anupatthaṭaṃ. Taṇhāyāsannanti taṇhāya nimuggaṃ. Taṇhāya pātitanti taṇhāya khittaṃ. ‘‘Paripātita’’nti vā pāṭho. Abhibhūtanti taṇhāya madditaṃ ajjhotthaṭaṃ. Pariyādinnacittanti khepetvā gahitacittaṃ. Atha vā oghena gataṃ viya taṇhāgataṃ. Upādiṇṇakarūpapaccayehi patitvā gataṃ viya taṇhānugataṃ. Udakapiṭṭhiṃ chādetvā patthaṭanīlikā udakapiṭṭhi viya taṇhānusaṭaṃ. Vaccakūpe nimuggaṃ viya taṇhāyāsannaṃ. Rukkhaggato patitvā narake patitaṃ viya taṇhāpātitaṃ. Upādiṇṇakarūpaṃ saṃyogaṃ viya taṇhāya abhibhūtaṃ. Upādiṇṇakarūpapariggāhakassa uppannavipassanaṃ viya taṇhāya pariyādinnacittaṃ. Atha vā kāmacchandena taṇhāgataṃ. Kāmapipāsāya taṇhānugataṃ. Kāmāsavena taṇhānusaṭaṃ. Kāmapariḷāhena taṇhāyāsannaṃ. Kāmajjhosānena taṇhāya pātitaṃ. Kāmoghena taṇhāya abhibhūtaṃ. Kāmupādānena taṇhāya pariyādinnacittanti evameke vaṇṇayanti. Kāmabhaveti kāmāvacare. Rūpabhaveti rūpāvacare. Arūpabhaveti arūpāvacare. Tesaṃ nānattaṃ heṭṭhā pakāsitaṃyeva.
「Bhavābhavesu」:有与非有。此中,“有”指欲界,“非有”指色界与无色界。或者,“有”指欲界与色界,“非有”指无色界。即于这些有与非有中。「Kammabhave」指业轮,即业有。「Punabbhave」指再有,即导向再生的果报轮。「Kāmabhave」指于欲界。「Kammabhave」亦指业轮。其中,业有因令有存在,故称为“有”。在欲有中,再有即是于欲界的再生有、果报轮。果报有因其存在,故称为“有”。于色有等,理亦如是。此处,“于欲有、色有、无色有”是就处所有而言;此三者中,“业有”是就业有而言,“再有”是就再生有而言。「Punappunabbhave」指再三再生。「Gatiyā」指于五趣中任何一趣。「Attabhāvābhinibbattiyā」指种种有身的再生。「Avītataṇhā」为根本句,即未离渴爱,意为渴爱尚未远离。因缺少刹那断除,故称“未离”(avigata)。显示巴利原文
Bhavābhavesūti bhavābhaveti bhavoti kāmadhātu. Abhavoti rūpārūpadhātu. Atha vā bhavoti kāmadhātu rūpadhātu. Abhavoti arūpadhātu. Tesu bhavābhavesu. Kammabhaveti kammavaṭṭe. Punabbhaveti ponobhavike vipākavaṭṭe. Kāmabhaveti kāmadhātuyā. Kammabhaveti kammavaṭṭe. Tattha kammabhavo bhāvayatīti bhavo. Kāmabhave punabbhaveti kāmadhātuyā upapattibhave vipākavaṭṭe. Vipākabhavo bhavatīti bhavo. Rūpabhavādīsupi eseva nayo. Ettha ca ‘‘kāmabhave rūpabhave arūpabhave’’ti okāsabhavaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tīsupi ‘‘kammabhave’’ti kammabhavaṃ , tathā ‘‘punabbhave’’ti upapattibhavaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Punappunabbhaveti aparāparaṃ uppattiyaṃ. Gatiyāti pañcagatiyā aññatarāya. Attabhāvābhinibbattiyāti attabhāvānaṃ abhinibbattiyā. Avītataṇhāti mūlapadaṃ. Avigatataṇhāti khaṇikasamādhi viya khaṇikappahānābhāvena na vigatā taṇhā etesanti avigatataṇhā. Acattataṇhāti tadaṅgappahānābhāvena apariccattataṇhā. Avantataṇhāti vikkhambhanappahānābhāvena na vantataṇhāti avantataṇhā. Amuttataṇhāti accantasamucchedappahānābhāvena na muttataṇhā. Appahīnataṇhāti paṭippassaddhippahānābhāvena na pahīnataṇhā. Appaṭinissaṭṭhataṇhāti nissaraṇappahānābhāvena bhave patiṭṭhitaṃ anusayakilesaṃ appaṭinissajjitvā ṭhitattā appaṭinissaṭṭhataṇhā.
12 12. 正因为那些未离渴爱者如此颤动、悲啼,佛陀为劝导他们调伏渴爱,而宣说了“mamāyite”这首偈颂。其中,“mamāyite”指被渴爱与邪见执为“我的”之事物。“passatha”是佛陀对听众的呼唤。“etampi”意为“这亦是过患”。其余内容容易了知。显示巴利原文
12. Idāni yasmā avigatataṇhā evaṃ phandanti ca lapanti ca, tasmā taṇhāvinaye samādapento ‘‘mamāyite’’ti gāthamāha. Tattha mamāyiteti taṇhādiṭṭhimamattehi ‘‘mama’’nti pariggahite vatthusmiṃ. Passathāti sotāre ālapanto āha. Etampīti etampi ādīnavaṃ. Sesaṃ pākaṭameva.
「Dve mamattā」指两种执取,即两种爱著。「Yāvatā」是表示分界、确定的虚词,用以限定。「taṇhāsaṅkhātena」即渴爱类别之意,此中的“类”(saṅkhā)与“被称为”(saṅkhāta)同义,正如“想因缘而戏论类”等经文中的用法。「sīmakatanti」指无有分割过失的划定界限,如“可认定三由旬为最大界”等情形。「odhikata」指无有言词分割过失的限定,如同界标树。「pariyantakata」指已经划定边界。界标树为双方共有,但此如同整块盐巴,全然切定,故称“尽边划定”。「pariggahita」指在未来亦属自己、不属他人,以一切方式执取。「mamāyita」指成了爱著的对象,犹如结夏安居时固定使用的坐卧处。「idaṃ mama」(这是我的)用于近处指说;「etaṃ mama」(那是我的)用于远处指说。「ettaka」是对资具数量的限定。显示巴利原文
Dve mamattāti dve ālayā. Yāvatāti paricchedaniyamatthe nipāto. Taṇhāsaṅkhātenāti taṇhākoṭṭhāsena, saṅkhā saṅkhātanti atthato ekaṃ ‘‘saññānidānā hi papañcasaṅkhā’’tiādīsu (su. ni. 880) viya. Sīmakatanti aparicchedadosavirahitaṃ mariyādakataṃ ‘‘tiyojanaparamaṃ sīmaṃ sammannitu’’nti ādīsu (mahāva. 140) viya. Odhikatanti vacanaparicchedadosavirahitaṃ paricchedakataṃ sīmantarikarukkho viya. Pariyantakatanti paricchedakataṃ. Sīmantarikarukkho pana dvinnaṃ sādhāraṇaṃ, ayaṃ pana ekābaddhatālapanti viya katanti pariyantakataṃ. Pariggahitanti kālantarepi parāyattaṃ muñcitvā sabbākārena gahitaṃ. Mamāyitanti ālayakataṃ vassūpagataṃ senāsanaṃ viya. Idaṃ mamanti samīpe ṭhitaṃ. Etaṃ mamanti dūre ṭhitaṃ. Ettakanti parikkhāraniyamanaṃ ‘‘ettakampi nappaṭibhāseyyā’’ti viya. Ettāvatāti paricchedatthepi nipātaniyamanaṃ ‘‘ettāvatā kho mahānāmā’’ti viya. Kevalampi mahāpathavinti sakalampi mahāpathaviṃ.
“Aṭṭhasataṃ taṇhāvicarita”是指一百零八种渴爱活动的方式。为什么是一百零八种呢?对色爱……乃至对法爱,这些在眼门等速行心路中生起的渴爱,就像根据父亲而被称为“富商之子”“婆罗门之子”一样,也是依与自身相似的所缘而得名的。此处,以色为所缘而对色的爱便是色爱。当它以色欲贪的形态,乐著于色而转起时,称为欲爱;当它以常见相应的贪的形态,乐著于“色是恒常、坚固、永远存在”而转起时,称为有爱;当它以断见相应的贪的形态,乐著于“色将坏灭、消失、完全断绝”而转起时,称为无有爱。如此,一种色爱便成三种。正如对色爱这样,对声爱等也是如此,因此有了十八种渴爱活动的方式。这十八种再各别分为缘内色等的十八种,以及缘外色等的十八种,合为三十六种。再进一步,过去的三十六种、未来的三十六种、现在的三十六种,总共便是一百零八种。或者,依内(所缘)的方式,由“我是”“我如此”等,依内色等而生起的见有十八种;依外(所缘)的方式,由此而生起“我是”、由此而生起“我如此”等,也有十八种见。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhasataṃ taṇhāvicaritanti aṭṭhuttarasataṃ taṇhāgamanavitthāraṃ. Aṭṭhuttarasataṃ kathaṃ hotīti ce? Rūpataṇhā…pe… dhammataṇhāti evaṃ cakkhudvārādīsu javanavīthiyā pavattā taṇhā ‘‘seṭṭhiputto, brāhmaṇaputto’’ti evamādīsu pitito laddhanāmā viya pitusadisārammaṇe bhūtā. Ettha ca rūpārammaṇā rūpe taṇhāti rūpataṇhā. Sā kāmarāgabhāvena rūpaṃ assādentī pavattamānā kāmataṇhā. Sassatadiṭṭhisahagatarāgabhāvena ‘‘rūpaṃ niccaṃ dhuvaṃ sassata’’nti evaṃ assādentī pavattamānā bhavataṇhā. Ucchedadiṭṭhisahagatarāgabhāvena ‘‘rūpaṃ ucchijjati vinassati pacchedaṃ bhavissatī’’ti evaṃ assādentī pavattamānā vibhavataṇhāti evaṃ tividhā hoti. Yathā ca rūpataṇhā, tathā saddataṇhādayopīti etāni aṭṭhārasa taṇhāvicaritāni honti. Tāni ajjhattarūpādīsu aṭṭhārasa, bahiddhārūpādīsu aṭṭhārasāti chattiṃsa, iti atītāni chattiṃsa, anāgatāni chattiṃsa, paccuppannāni chattiṃsāti aṭṭhasataṃ. Ajjhattikassa upādāya ‘‘asmī’’ti hoti, ‘‘itthasmī’’ti hotīti vā evamādīni ajjhattikarūpādinissitāni aṭṭhārasa, bāhirassupādāya iminā ‘‘asmī’’ti hoti, iminā ‘‘itthasmī’’ti hotīti bāhirarūpādinissitāni aṭṭhārasāti chattiṃsa. Iti atītāni chattiṃsa, anāgatāni chattiṃsa, paccuppannāni chattiṃsāti evampi aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritāni honti.
有二十种事的身见:「有二十种事的身见」是指,对于色等五蕴,每一个都以“观色是我”等(《无碍解道》1.130-131)的方式,依四种执取而转起,以这些事为立足点而生起的见,在有(存在)的意义上,因为在叫作五蕴的身中有这样的见,所以称为「身见」。有十种事的邪见:「有十种事的邪见」是指,以“没有布施,没有供养”等方式转起的邪见,它是不真实的见,或者是脱离了真实而执取的邪见,因此是邪见;也因为它会带来无义、无利益,被智者们所呵斥,所以被称为邪见。它应该被看作是以不如理倾向为特相,以执摸为味,以邪倾向为现起,以不见圣者、耽著于欲等为足处的,是最极罪恶的。有十种事的边执见:「有十种事的边执见」是指,以“世间是常的,世间是无常的,世间是有边的”等方式转起,每一种都执取其中的一部分为立足点,如此转起的见,就是有十种事的边执见。凡是这样种类的见:「凡是这样种类的见」就是无论什么样子的这类见。「恶见」:是指堕入到诸见当中去了。这种见被含摄在六十二种见当中,所以叫恶见;这种见本身就是见,因为难以超越,所以叫「见稠林」,如同草稠林、林稠林、山稠林一样。因为充满危险与恐惧,所以叫「见荒漠」,如同贼荒漠、猛兽荒漠、无水荒漠、饥荒荒漠一样。因为会违害和颠倒正见,所以叫「见歪曲」。因为邪见生起的时候,一定会违害和颠倒正见。由于它一会儿执取常,一会儿执取断,这种见的怪异动摇,所以叫「见动」。具有恶见的人无法安住在某一个确定的立场上,他一会儿随念常,一会儿随念断。这种见本身以结缚的意义成为结,所以叫「见结」。如同鳄鱼等死死咬住猎物那样,它紧紧地抓着所缘的人,所以叫「执」。因为安立之后而执取,所以叫「执取」。这种执就是以很强的活动状态,安立之后牢牢地抓住。它欲以常等见去倾向,所以叫「倾向」。它超越了法的真实面目,从外部以常等见去摸取,所以叫「执摸」。因为它会带来无义,所以是低劣的道,或者是通往低劣之处的道,所以叫「邪道」。因为它不是真实的正路,所以叫「邪路」。就像迷失方向的人,虽然认定“这是去某村的路”,却走不到那个村子一样,具有恶见的人即使认定自己的见解是“通往善趣的道”,也无法到达善趣,因此,因为不是真实的路,所以称为邪路。因为它本身就是邪的,所以叫「邪性」。因为愚人就在这里面流转,或者说他们在这里面渡过,所以叫「渡场」,而这个渡场又是灾祸的处所,所以叫「外道处」;或者,因为这是外道们出生和安住的地方,所以也称为外道处。是颠倒的取著,或者由颠倒而取著,所以叫「颠倒执」。取著非真实的自性,所以叫「颠倒执」。以“无常是常”等模式,翻转过来而执取,所以叫「颠倒执」。这不是正确方法的执取,所以叫「邪执」。在不真实的事物上,而不是在真实自性的事物上,却认为是那样、是真实的、是自性,这样的执取,就是“于不真实中,认为它是真实”的执取。「凡是」:不管有多少。「六十二恶见」:就像《梵网经》里所说的六十二种恶见。显示巴利原文
Vīsativatthukāsakkāyadiṭṭhīti rūpādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ ekekampi ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī’’tiādinā (paṭi. ma. 1.130-131) nayena catudhā gāhavasena pavattāni vatthūni katvā uppannā vijjamānaṭṭhena sati khandhapañcakasaṅkhāte kāye diṭṭhīti sakkāyadiṭṭhi. Dasavatthukā micchādiṭṭhīti ‘‘natthi dinnaṃ, natthi yiṭṭha’’ntiādinayappavattā micchādiṭṭhi, ayāthāvadiṭṭhi virajjhitvā gahaṇato vā vitathā diṭṭhi micchādiṭṭhi, anatthāvahattā paṇḍitehi kucchitā diṭṭhītipi micchādiṭṭhi. Sā ayoniso abhinivesalakkhaṇā, parāmāsarasā, micchābhinivesapaccupaṭṭhānā, ariyānamadassanakāmatādipadaṭṭhānā, paramavajjāti daṭṭhabbā. Dasavatthukā antaggāhikā diṭṭhīti sassato loko, asassato loko, antavā loko’’ti ādinayappavattā ekekaṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ patiṭṭhaṃ katvā gahaṇavasena evaṃ pavattā diṭṭhi dasavatthukā antaggāhikā diṭṭhi. Yā evarūpā diṭṭhīti yā evaṃjātikā diṭṭhi. Diṭṭhigatanti diṭṭhīsu gataṃ. Idaṃ dassanaṃ dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhiantogadhattāti diṭṭhigataṃ, diṭṭhiyeva duratikkamanaṭṭhena gahanaṃ diṭṭhigahanaṃ tiṇagahanavanagahanapabbatagahanāni viya. Sāsaṅkasappaṭibhayaṭṭhena diṭṭhikantāraṃ corakantāravāḷakantāranirudakakantāradubbhikkhakantārā viya. Sammādiṭṭhiyā vinivijjhanaṭṭhena vilomanaṭṭhena ca diṭṭhivisūkāyikaṃ. Micchādassanañhi uppajjamānaṃ sammādassanaṃ vinivijjhati ceva vilometi ca. Kadāci sassatassa, kadāci ucchedassa gahaṇato diṭṭhiyā virūpaṃ phanditanti diṭṭhivipphanditaṃ. Diṭṭhigatiko hi ekasmiṃ patiṭṭhātuṃ na sakkoti. Kadāci sassataṃ anussarati, kadāci ucchedaṃ. Diṭṭhiyeva bandhanaṭṭhena saṃyojananti diṭṭhisaṃyojanaṃ. Susumārādayo viya purisaṃ ārammaṇaṃ daḷhaṃ gaṇhātīti gāho. Patiṭṭhahanato patiṭṭhāho. Ayañhi balavapavattibhāvena patiṭṭhahitvā gaṇhāti. Niccādivasena abhinivisatīti abhiniveso. Dhammasabhāvaṃ atikkamitvā niccādivasena parato āmasatīti parāmāso. Anatthāvahattā kucchito maggo, kucchitānaṃ vā apāyānaṃ maggoti kummaggo. Ayāthāvapathato micchāpatho. Yathā hi disāmūḷhena ‘‘ayaṃ asukagāmassa nāma patho’’ti gahitopi taṃ gāmaṃ na sampāpeti, evaṃ diṭṭhigatikena ‘‘sugatipatho’’ti gahitāpi diṭṭhi sugatiṃ na pāpetīti ayāthāvapathato micchāpatho. Micchāsabhāvato micchattaṃ. Tattheva paribbhamanato taranti ettha bālāti titthaṃ, titthañca taṃ anatthānañca āyatananti titthāyatanaṃ, titthiyānaṃ vā sañjātidesaṭṭhena nivāsaṭṭhānaṭṭhena ca āyatanantipi titthāyatanaṃ. Vipariyesabhūto gāho, vipariyesato vā gāhoti vipariyesaggāho. Asabhāvagāhoti viparītaggāho. ‘‘Anicce nicca’’nti ādinayappavattavasena parivattetvā gāho vipallāsaggāho. Anupāyagāho micchāgāho. Ayāthāvakasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ na sabhāvasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ tathaṃ yāthāvakaṃ sabhāvanti gāho ‘‘ayāthāvakasmiṃ yāthāvaka’’nti gāho. Yāvatāti yattakā. Dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhigatānīti brahmajāle (dī. ni. 1.29 ādayo) āgatāni dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhigatāni.
即使害怕被抢断而动摇:是指心中生起“他们会抢走、强力强行地抓去”这样的疑虑时,也就心慌意乱了。正在被抢断时:按照前面说的方式,指正在被抢夺走的那个时候。已被抢断时:按照前面说的方式,指已经被抢走、被夺去了的时候。即使害怕变易而动摇:是指对于用转变的方式变成别的状态而心存疑虑时,也就动摇了。正在变易时:指正在转变的那个时候。已变易时:指已经转变了的时候。动摇:就是心慌颤动。遍动:是以一切方式慌张。纷动:是以种种不同的方式摇动。颤抖:是看见危险而发抖。遍颤:是因为惊恐畏惧而特别地浑身发抖。全颤:是因为恐惧到汗毛竖立,用一切方式剧烈地发抖。这些是动词的被动语态复数受格形式。少水:指水很少的时候。寡水:指水被搅乱的时候。水耗尽时:指水干涸了的时候。或被苍鹭等:指被其余种类的鸟啄食。被啄食:指被恼害、被撞击。被抛起:指从泥里被拖出来,或者被吞食。被啄食:指被吃掉。被乌鸦所动摇。被鹰所遍动。被苍鹭所纷动。当被这些鸟用喙抓住的时候,因为面临死亡而颤抖。在身体被刺穿的时候而遍颤。在死亡邻近的时候而全颤。显示巴利原文
Acchedasaṃkinopi phandantīti acchinditvā pasayha balakkārena gaṇhissantīti uppannasaṃkinopi calanti. Acchindantepīti vuttanayena acchijjantepi. Acchinnepīti vuttanayena acchinditvā gahitepi. Vipariṇāmasaṃkinopīti parivattetvā aññathābhāvena āsaṃkinopi . Vipariṇāmantepīti viparivattanakālepi. Vipariṇatepīti viparivattitepi. Phandantīti calanti. Samphandantīti sabbākārena calanti. Vipphandantīti vividhākārena phandanti. Vedhantīti bhayaṃ disvā kampanti. Pavedhantīti chambhitattā bhayena visesena kampanti. Sampavedhantīti lomahaṃsanabhayena sabbākārena kampanti. Phandamāneti upayogabahuvacanaṃ. Appodaketi mandodake. Parittodaketi luḷitodake. Udakapariyādāneti khīṇodake. Balākāhi vāti vuttāvasesāhi pakkhijātīhi. Paripātiyamānāti vihiṃsiyamānā ghaṭṭiyamānā. Ukkhipiyamānāti kaddamantarato nīhariyamānā giliyamānā vā. Khajjamānāti khādiyamānā. Phandanti kākehi. Samphandanti kulalehi. Vipphandanti balākāhi. Vedhanti tuṇḍena gahitakāle maraṇavasena. Pavedhanti vijjhanakāle. Sampavedhanti maraṇasamīpe.
“观察”:即观其过失。“衡量”:即衡量功德与过失。“审察”:即详尽地展开功德与过失。“明辨”:即舍弃应断除的事物,而远离之。“令明确”:即令其成就,成为不共。或者,通过除去混杂的过失,以区分事物的方式而观察;通过除去无决定的过失,以定量化的方式而衡量;通过除去事物本身的过失,以分别的方式而审察;通过除去迷乱的过失,以最胜分别的方式而明辨;通过除去密集的过失,以自然区分的方式而令明确。“舍断”:即完全舍断。“遍舍”:即舍弃。“不执为我所有”:即不以渴爱与邪见作为执著之处。“不执取”:即在邪见生起之前,以智慧而不执取。“不执捉”:即不以寻思而生起。“不执著”:即不以决意投入邪见的方式而进入。显示巴利原文
Passitvāti aguṇaṃ passitvā. Tulayitvāti guṇāguṇaṃ tulayitvā. Tīrayitvāti guṇāguṇaṃ vitthāretvā. Vibhāvayitvāti vatthuhānabhāgiṃ muñcitvā vajjetvā. Vibhūtaṃ katvāti nipphattiṃ pāpetvā āveṇikaṃ katvā. Atha vā saṃkiṇṇadosaṃ mocetvā vatthuvibhāgakaraṇena passitvā. Aparicchedadosaṃ mocetvā pamāṇakaraṇavasena tulayitvā. Vatthudosaṃ mocetvā vibhāgakaraṇavasena tīrayitvā. Sammohadosaṃ mocayitvā aggavibhāgakaraṇavasena vibhāvayitvā. Ghanadosaṃ mocetvā pakativibhāgakaraṇena vibhūtaṃ katvā. Pahāyāti pajahitvā. Paṭinissajjitvāti nissajjitvā. Amamāyantoti taṇhādiṭṭhīhi ālayaṃ akaronto. Agaṇhantoti diṭṭhiyā pubbabhāge paññāya taṃ na gaṇhanto. Aparāmasantoti vitakkena ūhanaṃ akaronto. Anabhinivesantoti niyāmokkantidiṭṭhivasena nappavisanto.
“不造作”:即不以执取的渴爱而造作。“不生起”:即不以导致再有的渴爱而生起。“不全生起”:即不以特别的方式而非全生起。“不令生”:即不以欲求的渴爱而不令生。“不全令生”:即不以一切方式而非全令生。或者,这些词是依前缀而扩展的。如是,此处第一偈是在说乐味。显示巴利原文
Akubbamānoti pariggāhataṇhāvasena akaronto. Ajanayamānoti ponobhavikataṇhāvasena ajanayamāno. Asañjanayamānoti visesena asañjanayamāno. Anibbattayamānoti patthanātaṇhāvasena na nibbattayamāno. Anabhinibbattayamānoti sabbākārena na abhinibbattayamāno. Upasaggavasena vā etāni padāni vaḍḍhitāni. Evamettha paṭhamagāthāya assādaṃ.
13 之后,以随后四偈开示了过患。现在,为了开示具方便的出离以及出离的功德,遂说“于两端”等二偈。又或者,由所有诸偈开示了欲的过患、鄙秽与染污之后,现在为了开示出离的功德,而说“于两端”等二偈。其中,“于两端”:即于触与触之集等诸二法之分际。“调伏了欲”:即调伏欲贪。“遍知触”:即遍知眼触等触,或随触而遍知与之相应的一切非色法,以及以他们之依处、门、所缘而说的色法——也就是整个名色——以三种遍知而遍知。“不贪求”:即于色等一切法而不贪求。“凡自所呵责者则不造作”:即凡是自己所呵责的,便不造作。“智者不染著于所见所闻”:即如是具有坚固慧的智者,于所见与所闻之法,不染著于两种染著中的任何一种,犹如虚空,无所染著,达至极致清净。显示巴利原文
13. Tato parāhi catūhi gāthāhi ādīnavañca dassetvā idāni saupāyaṃ nissaraṇaṃ nissaraṇānisaṃsañca dassetuṃ, sabbāhi vā etāhi kāmānaṃ ādīnavaṃ okāraṃ saṃkilesañca dassetvā idāni nekkhamme ānisaṃsaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ubhosu antesū’’ti gāthādvayamāha. Tattha ubhosu antesūti phassaphassasamudayādīsu dvīsu, dvīsu paricchedesu. Vineyya chandanti chandarāgaṃ vinetvā. Phassaṃ pariññāyāti cakkhusamphassādiphassaṃ, phassānusārena vā taṃsampayutte sabbepi arūpadhamme, tesaṃ vatthudvārārammaṇavasena rūpadhamme cāti sakalampi nāmarūpaṃ tīhi pariññāhi parijānitvā. Anānugiddhoti rūpādīsu sabbadhammesu agiddho. Yadattagarahī tadakubbamānoti yaṃ attanā garahati, taṃ akurumāno. Na limpatī diṭṭhasutesu dhīroti so evarūpo dhitisampanno dhīro diṭṭhesu ca sutesu ca dhammesu dvinnaṃ lepānaṃ ekenāpi lepena na limpati, ākāsamiva nirupalitto accantavodānappatto hoti.
“触是一端”:意为触是一种分际。“能接触,故为触”:此触以接触为特相,以撞击为作用,以会和为现起,以所缘现前为足处。此触虽是非色法,却唯以接触的方式于所缘中转起,故具有接触的特相。虽仅于一处而不黏着,却如色对眼、声对耳那般,令心与所缘相撞击,故有撞击的作用;或因其乃由依处与所缘的撞击而生起,依成就之义,亦可将它的作用理解为“撞击的作用”。此在注释书中有说:显示巴利原文
Phasso eko antoti phasso ekaparicchedo. Phusatīti phasso. Svāyaṃ phusanalakkhaṇo, saṅghaṭṭanaraso, sannipātapaccupaṭṭhāno, āpāthagatavisayapadaṭṭhāno. Ayañhi arūpadhammopi samāno ārammaṇe phusanākāreneva pavattatīti phusanalakkhaṇo. Ekadeseneva anallīyamānopi rūpaṃ viya cakkhuṃ, saddo viya ca sotaṃ cittaṃ ārammaṇañca saṅghaṭṭetīti saṅghaṭṭanaraso, vatthārammaṇasaṅghaṭṭanato vā uppannattā sampattiatthenapi rasena ‘‘saṅghaṭṭanaraso’’ti veditabbo. Vuttañhetaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ –
“四地所摄的触,没有不具有接触特相的,但撞击的作用唯五门转起者方有。五门转起的触,既有接触的特相,也有撞击的作用。意门转起的触,唯有接触的特相,并无撞击的作用。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Catubhūmakaphasso no phusanalakkhaṇo nāma natthi, saṅghaṭṭanaraso pana pañcadvārikova hoti. Pañcadvārikassa hi phusanalakkhaṇotipi saṅghaṭṭanarasotipi nāmaṃ. Manodvārikassa phusanalakkhaṇotveva nāmaṃ, na saṅghaṭṭanaraso’’ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 1, kāmāvacarakusala, dhammuddesakathā).
如此说完,便引用了此经(《弥兰陀问经》):显示巴利原文
Idañca vatvā idaṃ suttaṃ (mi. pa. 2.3.8) ābhataṃ –
大王,譬如两只公羊相斗:其中一只羊应视为眼,另一只羊应视为色,它们的会合应视为触。如此,触以触为其特相,以撞击为其作用。大王,又譬如两手相拍:其中一只手应视为眼,另一只手应视为色,它们的会合应视为触。如此,触以触为其特相,以撞击为其作用。此为详细解释。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yathā, mahārāja, dve meṇḍā yujjheyyuṃ, yathā eko meṇḍo, evaṃ cakkhu daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yathā dutiyo meṇḍo, evaṃ rūpaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yathā tesaṃ sannipāto, evaṃ phasso daṭṭhabbo. Evaṃ phusanalakkhaṇo ca phasso saṅghaṭṭanaraso ca. Yathā, mahārāja, dve sammā vajjeyyuṃ, dve pāṇī vajjeyyuṃ. Yathā eko pāṇi, evaṃ cakkhu daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yathā dutiyo pāṇi, evaṃ rūpaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yathā tesaṃ sannipāto, evaṃ phasso daṭṭhabbo. Evaṃ phusanalakkhaṇo ca phasso saṅghaṭṭanaraso cā’’ti vitthāro.
或者,如‘以眼见色’等句中,眼识等是以眼等名称而说;同样,在此处,它们也是以眼等名称而说,应当这样理解。因此,在‘应被看作眼’等表述中,依此理趣,其义应解为‘应被看作眼识’。如此一来,由于心与所缘的撞击,在此经中,也以作用之义成就了‘撞击的作用’。然而,因为它是依‘三者的会和’这一自因来阐述的,所以以会和为现起。如于各处所说,‘三者的和合是触’,这纯粹是依于因来阐述的。而且,此经句的意思是‘三者的和合即是触’,并非仅仅是和合就是触。显示巴利原文
Yathā vā ‘‘cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 1352, 1354) cakkhuviññāṇādīni cakkhuādināmena vuttāni, evamidhāpi tāni cakkhuādināmeneva vuttānīti veditabbāni. Tasmā ‘‘evaṃ cakkhu daṭṭhabba’’ntiādīsu evaṃ cakkhuviññāṇaṃ daṭṭhabbanti iminā nayena attho veditabbo. Evaṃ sante cittārammaṇasaṅghaṭṭanato imasmimpi sutte kiccaṭṭheneva rasena ‘‘saṅghaṭṭanaraso’’ti siddho hoti. Tiṇṇaṃ sannipātasaṅkhātassa pana attano kāraṇassa vasena paveditattā sannipātapaccupaṭṭhāno. Ayañhi tattha tattha ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ saṅgati phasso’’ti evaṃ kāraṇasseva vasena paveditoti. Imassa ca suttapadassa tiṇṇaṃ saṅgatiyā phassoti ayamattho, na saṅgatimattameva phasso.
然而,由如此说明,它便以彼方式显现,故说为‘会合的现起’。但若以果报义之现起而言,则称为‘受的现起’。因为它令受现起,即令受生起之义。而当它令受生起时,应如下理解:譬如外在的热虽亦是缘,但依止于称为虫胶的物质而生起的温热,只会令其所依附者变软,却不能令作为外缘的‘无焰热炭’之外在热本身变软。同样,此受虽有称为色基、所缘等他缘,但因依止于心,故只在自己所依存的心中令受生起,而不在作为其缘的色基或所缘中生起。又因为它是‘以适当的作意,依根防护诸境,毫无障碍地’生起的,故又说为‘以现前之境为足处’。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ paveditattā pana tenevākārena paccupaṭṭhātīti ‘‘sannipātapaccupaṭṭhāno’’ti vutto. Phalaṭṭhena pana paccupaṭṭhānenesa vedanāpaccupaṭṭhāno nāma hoti. Vedanaṃ hesa paccupaṭṭhāpeti, uppādetīti attho. Uppādayamāno ca yathā bahiddhā uṇhapaccayāpi samānā lākhāsaṅkhātadhātunissitā usmā attano nissaye mudubhāvakārī hoti, na attano paccayabhūtepi bahiddhā vītaccitaṅgārasaṅkhāte uṇhabhāve. Evaṃ vatthārammaṇasaṅkhātaaññapaccayopi samāno cittanissitattā attano nissayabhūte citte eva esa vedanuppādako hoti, na attano paccayabhūtepi vatthumhi ārammaṇevāti veditabbo. Tajjena samannāhārena pana indriyena ca parikkhate visaye anantarāyena uppajjanato esa ‘‘āpāthagatavisayapadaṭṭhāno’’ti vuccati.
「触」由何因缘而生、而集起,此缘即名为「触的集起」。如经中所说:「以六处为缘,有触。」「过去二法」是从时间角度而说的。「受二法」者,如注疏所说「舍受由于寂静之性,故说为乐」,因此将舍受摄入乐受,从苦与乐两方面而说。「名色二法」是从无色与色两方面而说的。「处二法」是从轮回流转的角度而说的。「己身二法」则是从五蕴的角度而说,当知如此。于此,能令乐生起者,即是「乐」;能令受生起者,即是「受」;能令苦生起者,即是「苦」。具有倾向、弯曲之相者,是「名」;具有变异、破坏之相者,是「色」。眼处等六处是「内」的;色处等六处是「外」的。色蕴等五蕴,因其存在,故称为「己身」。无明、业、爱、食、触、名色,这些是「己身的集起」。显示巴利原文
Phasso yato samudeti uppajjati, so ‘‘phassasamudayo’’ti vuccati. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘saḷāyatanapaccayā phasso’’ti (mahāva. 1; vibha. 225). Atītaduko kālavasena vutto. Vedanāduko ‘‘upekkhā pana santattā, sukhamicceva bhāsitā’’ti (vibha. aṭṭha. 232) vuttattā upekkhāvedanaṃ sukhameva katvā sukhadukkhavasena, nāmarūpaduko rūpārūpavasena, āyatanaduko saṃsārapavattivasena, sakkāyaduko pañcakkhandhavasena vuttoti veditabbo. Tattha sukhayatīti sukhā. Vedayatīti vedanā. Dukkhayatīti dukkhā. Namanalakkhaṇaṃ nāmaṃ. Ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ rūpaṃ. Cakkhāyatanādīni cha ajjhattikāni. Rūpāyatanādīni cha bāhirāni. Rūpakkhandhādayo pañcakkhandhā vijjamānaṭṭhena sakkāyo. Avijjākammataṇhāāhāraphassanāmarūpā sakkāyasamudayo.
「眼触」:「眼」的意思是能染着于色、并清晰地识别色。从眼根生起的触,即是「眼触」。此触对其相应的受,以俱生、相互、依止、果报、食、相应、有、不离去这八种方式成为缘。「耳」是能听的意思。它生长在带有附件的耳腔内部,覆以纤细的茶色毛,形状如指套,在那里适当地发挥着耳识等色基与门的作用。从耳根生起的触,即是「耳触」。对于「鼻触」等,也是同样的道理。「鼻」是能嗅的意思。它生长在带有附件的鼻腔内部,形状如羊足,在那里适当地发挥着鼻识等色基与门的作用。「舌」能让人渴求维持生命所需的滋味,或从品尝味道的角度得名。它生长在带有附件的舌部,避开舌尖、舌根和舌的两侧,于舌面上方中央如破裂的莲花瓣聚合之处,适当地发挥着舌识等色基与门的作用。「身」是不善法、有漏法的生起之处。所谓「生处」,即是产生之处。于此身体中,凡有业力所生生命活动之处,普遍皆有身净色,适当地发挥着身识等色基与门的作用。「意」能认知,即是了别之义。「意」是指与转向心及有分心一起显示巴利原文
Cakkhusamphassoti cakkhatīti cakkhu, rūpaṃ assādeti vibhāveti cāti attho. Cakkhuto pavatto samphasso cakkhusamphasso. So pana attanā sampayuttāya vedanāya sahajātaaññamaññanissayavipākaāhārasampayuttaatthiavigatavasena aṭṭhadhā paccayo hoti. Suṇātīti sotaṃ. Taṃ sasambhārasotabilassa anto tanutambalomācite aṅguliveṭhakasaṇṭhāne padese sotaviññāṇādīnaṃ yathārahaṃ vatthudvārabhāvaṃ sādhayamānaṃ tiṭṭhati. Sotato pavatto samphasso sotasamphasso. Ghānasamphassādīsupi eseva nayo. Ghāyatīti ghānaṃ . Taṃ sasambhārabilassa anto ajapadasaṇṭhāne padese ghānaviññāṇādīnaṃ yathārahaṃ vatthudvārabhāvaṃ sādhayamānaṃ tiṭṭhati. Jīvitamavhāyatīti jivhā, sāyanaṭṭhena vā jivhā. Sā sasambhārajivhāya atiaggamūlapassāni vajjetvā uparimatalamajjhe bhinnauppaladalaggasaṇṭhāne padese jivhāviññāṇādīnaṃ yathārahaṃ vatthudvārabhāvaṃ sādhayamānā tiṭṭhati. Kucchitānaṃ sāsavadhammānaṃ āyoti kāyo. Āyoti uppattideso. Yāvatā imasmiṃ kāye upādiṇṇapavatti nāma atthi, tattha yebhuyyena kāyappasādo kāyaviññāṇādīnaṃ yathārahaṃ vatthudvārabhāvaṃ sādhayamāno tiṭṭhati. Munātīti mano, vijānātīti attho. Manoti sahāvajjanabhavaṅgaṃ; manato pavatto samphasso manosamphasso.
为说明六种触实则仅为两种,故说「增语触」与「有对触」。于意门生起的触是「增语触」。于五门生起的触,因依处、所缘等有对碍而生起,故称为「有对触」。显示巴利原文
Chabbidhampi phassaṃ duvidhameva hotīti dassetuṃ ‘‘adhivacanasamphasso paṭighasamphasso’’ti āha . Manodvāriko adhivacanasamphasso. Pañcadvāriko vatthārammaṇādipaṭighena uppajjanato paṭighasamphasso.
于乐受所缘,应以乐受领受;于苦受所缘,应以苦受领受;于不苦不乐受所缘,应以不苦不乐受领受。其中,“乐”的意思是带来快乐,即令生起者感到快乐。或者,因为它善能掘除、摧毁身心的疾病,所以叫作“乐”。“苦”的意思是带来痛苦,即令生起者感到痛苦。“不苦不乐”既不是苦也不是乐,此处的“不”(ma)字是依词语连接而说的。显示巴利原文
Sukhavedanāya ārammaṇe sukhavedanīyo. Dukkhavedanāya ārammaṇe dukkhavedanīyo. Adukkhamasukhavedanāya ārammaṇe adukkhamasukhavedanīyo. Tattha sukhayatīti sukhaṃ, yassuppajjati, taṃ sukhitaṃ karotīti attho. Suṭṭhu vā khanati, khādati ca kāyacittābādhanti sukhaṃ. Dukkhayatīti dukkhaṃ, yassuppajjati, taṃ dukkhitaṃ karotīti attho. Na dukkhaṃ na sukhanti adukkhamasukhaṃ, ma-kāro padasandhivasena vutto.
此处所说的“善”(kusala)等,是就种类而说的。其中,“善”与二十一种善心相应;“不善”(akusala)与十二种不善心相应;“无记”(abyākata)与其余果报心、唯作心等无记心相应。显示巴利原文
Kusalotiādayo jātivasena vuttā. Tattha kusaloti ekavīsatikusalacittasampayutto. Akusaloti dvādasākusalacittasampayutto. Abyākatoti avasesavipākakiriyābyākatacittasampayutto.
其次,再依“有”的分类来说明,故说“欲界”(kāmāvacaro)等。与五十四种欲界心相应的,即欲界。由于弃舍欲而活动于色界,故名“色界”(rūpāvacaro);从善与无记来说,它与十五种色界心相应。由于弃舍欲与色而活动于无色界,故名“无色界”(arūpāvacaro);从善与无记来说,它与十二种无色界心相应。显示巴利原文
Puna bhavappabhedavasena niddisanto ‘‘kāmāvacaro’’tiādimāha. Catupaññāsakāmāvacaracittasampayutto kāmāvacaro. Kāmaṃ pahāya rūpe avacaratīti rūpāvacaro, kusalābyākatavasena pañcadasarūpāvacaracittasampayutto. Kāmañca rūpañca pahāya arūpe avacaratīti arūpāvacaro, kusalābyākatavasena dvādasārūpāvacaracittasampayutto.
现在从倾向的角度加以说明,说“空”等。其中,“空”者:因远离贪、嗔、痴而称为“空”。“无相”者:因没有贪、嗔、痴的相而称为“无相”。“无愿”者:因没有贪、嗔、痴的愿求而称为“无愿”。显示巴利原文
Idāni abhinivesavasena dassento ‘‘suññato’’tiādimāha. Tattha suññatoti rāgadosamohehi suññattā suññato. Rāgadosamohanimittehi animittattā animitto. Rāgadosamohapaṇidhīnaṃ abhāvato appaṇihitoti vuccati.
现在,从属于轮回与不属于轮回的角度显示,说“世间”等。其中,“世间”指破坏、崩坏的意义,即轮回;由于属于此轮回,系着于世间,便称为“世间”。出离者为“超胜”;因不属于世间,故超胜世间,称为“出世间”。“触”是指触的行相;“触”与“已触的状态”是通过前缀扩展而来的词语。显示巴利原文
Idāni vaṭṭapariyāpannaapariyāpannavasena dassento ‘‘lokiyo’’tiādimāha. Loko vuccati lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena vaṭṭaṃ , tasmiṃ pariyāpannabhāvena loke niyuttoti lokiyo. Uttiṇṇoti uttaro, loke apariyāpannabhāvena lokato uttaroti lokuttaro. Phusanāti phusanākāro. Samphusanā samphusitattanti upasaggena padaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ.
所谓「作了这样的了知」(evaṃ ñātaṃ katvā),意思是:这样地使之明显后,了知者进行决断、分别,并且以接下来要说明的方式进行思惟。由于它的无常性和有始有终性,决断为「无常」(aniccato)。由于不断生灭所产生的压迫性,以及它是苦的所依,决断为「苦」(dukkhato)。由于靠缘维持的性质和作为疾病的根源,决断为「病」(rogato)。由于与苦尖锐结合的性质、流出烦恼不净的性质,以及由生、老、坏灭而有红肿、成熟、破裂的性质,决断为「疮」(gaṇḍato)。由于产生压迫、内部刺入、难以拔出的性质,决断为「箭」(sallato)。由于应受呵责、带来衰损、是罪恶之事的性质,决断为「恶」(aghato)。由于产生不自在、是疾病之因的性质,决断为「病」(ābādhato)。由于不受控制和不顺从的性质,决断为「敌」(parato)。由于被病、老、死所坏灭崩解,决断为「坏」(palokato)。由于带来各种灾难,决断为「灾」(ītito)。由于带来众多未曾见的祸患,以及是一切灾祸的所依,决断为「难」(upaddavato)。由于是一切恐怖的来源,并且与称为苦灭的至上安稳相对立,决断为「恐怖」(bhayato)。由于被各种不利所追随、为过失所附着,并且像邪灵一样不可容忍,决断为「祸」(upasaggato)。由于被病、老、死以及利、衰等世间法所动摇,决断为「动」(calato)。由于通过加行和自性而有坏灭的性质,决断为「坏」(pabhaṅguto)。由于一切状态都会毁坏,并且没有坚固性,决断为「不坚」(adhuvato)。由于没有救护性、不能获得安稳,决断为「无护」(atāṇato)。由于不值得依附,即使依附了也不起庇护作用,决断为「无依」(aleṇato)。由于对那些依止它的人,并没有真实的无畏,决断为「无皈依」(asaraṇato)。由于缺少如所计度的常、乐、我、净等实体,所以是空虚的,决断为「虚」(rittato)。正是由于空虚,而称为「空无」(tucchato),或者因为它微少。因为在世间中,微少也被说为‘空无’。由于缺少主人、居住者、感受者、作者、支配者,决断为「空」(suññato)。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ ñātaṃ katvāti evaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā jānanto tīreti tīrayati, upari vattabbākārena cinteti. Aniccantikatāya ādiantavantatāya ca aniccato tīreti. Uppādavayapaṭipīḷanatāya dukkhavatthutāya ca dukkhato. Paccayayāpanīyatāya rogamūlatāya ca rogato. Dukkhatāsūlayogitāya kilesāsucipaggharatāya uppādajarābhaṅgehi uddhumātaparipakkapabhinnatāya ca gaṇḍato. Pīḷājanakatāya antotudanatāya dunnīharaṇīyatāya ca sallato. Vigarahaṇīyatāya avaḍḍhiāvahanatāya aghavatthutāya ca aghato. Aseribhāvajanakatāya ābādhapadaṭṭhānatāya ca ābādhato. Avasatāya avidheyyatāya ca parato. Byādhijarāmaraṇehi lujjanapalujjanatāya palokato. Anekabyasanāvahanatāya ītito. Aviditānaṃyeva vipulānaṃ anatthānaṃ āvahanato sabbūpaddavavatthutāya ca upaddavato. Sabbabhayānaṃ ākaratāya ca dukkhavūpasamasaṅkhātassa paramassāsassa paṭipakkhabhūtatāya ca bhayato. Anekehi anatthehi anubaddhatāya dosūpasaṭṭhatāya, upasaggo viya anadhivāsanārahatāya ca upasaggato. Byādhijarāmaraṇehi ceva lābhādīhi ca lokadhammehi pacalitatāya calato. Upakkamena ceva sarasena ca pabhaṅgupagamanasīlatāya pabhaṅguto. Sabbāvatthāvinipātitāya, thirabhāvassa ca abhāvatāya adhuvato. Atāyanatāya ceva alabbhaneyyakhematāya ca atāṇato. Allīyituṃ anarahatāya, allīnānampi ca leṇakiccākāritāya aleṇato. Nissitānaṃ bhayasārakattābhāvena asaraṇato. Yathāparikappitehi dhuvasubhasukhattabhāvehi rittatāya rittato. Rittatāyeva tucchato, appakattā vā. Appakampi hi loke ‘‘tuccha’’nti vuccati. Sāminivāsivedaka kārakādhiṭṭhāyakavirahitatāya suññato.
又因无有主宰等性质,故以“无我”而观。因流转的苦性、苦有过患的性质,故以“过患”而观。或者,“过患”即“他走向、流转于不幸”,这是可怜人的代名词。诸蕴也确实可怜,由于类似过患,故以“过患”而观。因具有老与死这两种变异性质,故以“变易法”而观。因羸弱,乐受如泡沫般容易坏灭,故以“非坚实”而观。因是苦的因,故以“苦根”而观。因像表面为友、实则为敌那样破坏信赖,故以“杀手”而观。因灭尽“有”的性质、由无有性而产生,故以“无有”而观。因是诸漏的立足处,故以“有漏”而观。因由因缘所造作,故以“有为”而观。因由死魔、烦恼魔的饵食所组成,故以“魔饵”而观。因有生、老、病、死的性质,故以“生老病死法”而观。因是愁、悲叹、忧恼的因,故以“愁悲叹忧恼法”而观。因是渴爱、邪见、恶行、染污诸法所行的境界,故以“染污法”而观。因依无明、业、渴爱、六处而现起,故以“集”而观。因这些不存在了便止灭,故以“灭”而观。显示巴利原文
Sayañca asāmikabhāvāditāya anattato. Pavattidukkhatāya, dukkhassa ca ādīnavatāya ādīnavato. Atha vā ādīnaṃ vāti gacchati pavattatīti ādīnavo, kapaṇamanussassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Khandhāpi ca kapaṇāyevāti ādīnavasadisatāya ādīnavato. Jarāya ceva maraṇena cāti dvedhā pariṇāmapakatitāya vipariṇāmadhammato. Dubbalatāya, pheggu viya sukhabhañjanīyatāya ca asārakato. Aghahetutāya aghamūlato. Mittamukhasapatto viya vissāsaghātitāya vadhakato. Vigatabhavatāya vibhavasambhūtatāya ca vibhavato. Āsavapadaṭṭhānatāya sāsavato. Hetupaccayehi abhisaṅkhatatāya saṅkhatato. Maccumārakilesamārānaṃ āmisabhūtatāya mārāmisato. Jātijarābyādhimaraṇapakatitāya jātijarābyādhimaraṇadhammato. Sokaparidevaupāyāsahetutāya sokaparidevaupāyāsadhammato. Taṇhādiṭṭhiduccaritasaṃkilesānaṃ visayadhammatāya saṃkilesadhammato. Avijjākammataṇhāsaḷāyatanavasena uppattito samudayato. Tesaṃ abhāvena atthaṅgamato. Phasse chandarāgavasena madhurassādena assādato. Phassassa vipariṇāmena ādīnavato. Ubhinnaṃ nissaraṇena nissaraṇato tīretīti sabbesu ca imesu ‘‘tīretī’’ti pāṭhaseso daṭṭhabbo.
“断除”:即从自己的相续中移除。“驱散”:即刺戳。“使成边际无”:即令其边际灭尽。“令归于无”:即令其渐次归于无。因为有这些人以圣道之剑,斩断了由渴爱与无明所组成的根,故为“根已断”。因为如同多罗树那样,他们的根基已被作成,故为“作多罗树桩者”。正如将多罗树连根拔起后,其处唯余树桩,彼树便不再生长;同样地,以圣道之剑将色等味之根连根拔除后,在这些先前曾生起他们的心相续中,只留下根基的状态,因此它们全都称为“作多罗树桩者”。“那位的”:即那个人的这种贪。“彻底断”:即被断除。“寂止”:即以果而寂止。“安息”:即以安息断而安息;或由前缀增强词义。“不能再生”:即不能再生起。“被智火烧尽”:即被道智之火焚毁。或者,如同连容器一道丢弃,这是连同根基一起舍断的。如同根被切断了毒藤,故为“连根断除的”。如同在灶上浇水而息灭的炭火,故为“寂止的”。如同滴在已息灭炭火上的水滴,故为“安息的”。如同断了生芽之因的种子,故为“不能再生起的”。如同被雷劈的枯树,故为“被智火烧尽的”——有论师这样说。显示巴利原文
Pajahatīti sakasantānato nīharati. Vinodetīti tudati. Byantiṃ karotīti vigatantaṃ karoti. Anabhāvaṃ gametīti anu anu abhāvaṃ gameti. Ariyamaggasatthena ucchinnaṃ taṇhāavijjāmayaṃ mūlametesanti ucchinnamūlā. Tālavatthu viya nesaṃ vatthu katanti tālāvatthukatā. Yathā hi tālarukkhaṃ samūlaṃ uddharitvā tassa vatthumatte tasmiṃ padese kate na puna tassa tālassa uppatti paññāyati, evaṃ ariyamaggasatthena samūle rūpādirase uddharitvā tesaṃ pubbe uppannapubbabhāvena vatthumatte cittasantāne kate sabbepi te ‘‘tālāvatthukatā’’ti vuccanti. Yassesoti yassa puggalassa eso gedho. Samucchinnoti ucchinno. Vūpasantoti phalena vūpasanto. Paṭipassaddhoti paṭipassaddhippahānena paṭipassambhito. Upasaggena vā padaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ. Abhabbuppattikoti puna uppajjituṃ abhabbo. Ñāṇagginā daḍḍhoti maggañāṇagginā jhāpito. Atha vā visanikkhittaṃ bhājanena saha chaḍḍitaṃ viya vatthunā saha pahīno. Mūlacchinnavisavalli viya samūlacchinnoti samucchinno. Uddhane udakaṃ siñcitvā nibbāpitaaṅgāraṃ viya vūpasanto. Nibbāpitaaṅgāre patitaudakaphusitaṃ viya paṭipassaddho. Aṅkuruppattiyā hetucchinnabījaṃ viya abhabbuppattiko. Asanipātavisarukkho viya ñāṇagginā daḍḍhoti evameke vaṇṇayanti.
“离贪”:这是就舍离自身贪求而说。“灭贪”:这是就于所缘舍弃爱着性而说。“弃贪”:这是为显示不再执取的状态而说。“脱贪”:这是就于相续中解脱而说。“断贪”:这是为显示虽已从贪解脱,却亦无一处住着而说。“弃舍贪”:这是为显示舍弃先前所执取之物而说。“离染者”、“灭染者”、“弃染者”,应依前述之理结合。其中,因抓取之义而为贪求,因染着之义而为染着。“无渴爱者”:即无有渴爱。也读作“无遮障者”,意为离去了渴爱的覆盖。“寂灭者”:即寂灭自性者。“清凉者”:即清凉自性者。“感受安乐者”:即领受身乐与心乐的自性者。“以成梵体者”:即以最上自性。“以自心”:即以心。显示巴利原文
Vītagedhoti idaṃ sakabhāvapariccajanavasena vuttaṃ. Vigatagedhoti idaṃ ārammaṇe sālayabhāvapariccajanavasena. Cattagedhoti idaṃ puna anādiyanabhāvadassanavasena. Muttagedhoti idaṃ santatito vinimocanavasena. Pahīnagedhoti idaṃ muttassāpi kvaci anavaṭṭhānadassanavasena. Paṭinissaṭṭhagedhoti idaṃ ādinnapubbassa nissaggadassanavasena vuttaṃ. Vītarāgo vigatarāgo cattarāgoti vuttanayena yojetabbaṃ. Tattha gijjhanavasena gedho. Rañjanavasena rāgo. Nicchātoti nittaṇho. ‘‘Nicchado’’tipi pāṭho, taṇhāchadanavirahitoti attho. Nibbutoti nibbutasabhāvo. Sītibhūtoti sītasabhāvo. Sukhapaṭisaṃvedīti kāyikacetasikasukhaṃ anubhavanasabhāvo. Brahmabhūtenāti uttamasabhāvena. Attanāti cittena.
「因已作故」:即因已造作了种种恶业。「因未作故」:即因未造作种种善业。「我造作了身恶行,未造作身善行」等,分别是从根门、从不律仪与律仪、从十善业道与十不善业道的角度所说。「在戒律上我不是圆满行持者」等,则是从四遍净戒的角度所说。「不精勤于警寤者」,是从五警寤的角度所说。「以念与正知者」,是从义正知等角度所说。至于「四念处」等菩提分法,则是从世间与出世间的角度所说。「我不曾遍知苦」等,应知其义是从四圣谛的角度所说。这些义理,因在各相关处已经解说过,此处便十分明了。显示巴利原文
Katattā cāti pāpakammānaṃ katabhāvena ca. Akatattā cāti kusalānaṃ akatabhāvena ca. Kataṃ me kāyaduccaritaṃ, akataṃ me kāyasucaritantiādayo dvāravasena avirativirativasena kammapathavasena ca vuttā. Sīlesumhi na paripūrakārītiādayo catupārisuddhisīlavasena. Jāgariyamananuyuttoti pañcajāgaraṇavasena. Satisampajaññenāti sātthakādisampajaññavasena . Cattāro satipaṭṭhānātiādayo bodhipakkhiyadhammā lokiyalokuttaravasena. Dukkhaṃ me apariññātantiādayo cattāro ariyasaccavasena vuttāti veditabbaṃ. Te atthato tattha tattha vuttanayattā pākaṭāyeva.
「坚毅者、智者」等七个词,义理如前所述。进一步说,「坚毅者」:于苦中不可动摇,故名坚毅者。「智者」:于乐中不浮荡飘举,故名智者。「有慧者」:于现法利益与后世利益已善加修习,故名有慧者。「具觉慧者」:于自他诸利安住不动,故名具觉慧者。「有智人」:于深奥与浅显之义皆不退转,故名有智人。「照了者」:能照亮隐秘与覆藏之义,故名照了者。「具聪慧者」:因无烦恼而清净,如天平般公正不倚,故名具聪慧者。「不沾着」:即不依同类而沾着,犹如虚空中划过的痕迹。「不遍沾」:即尤为不沾着。「不附沾」:即虽与物结合亦不沾着,犹如掌中划过的痕迹。「不沾」:即虽与物结合亦不为所染,犹如置于迦尸布上的摩尼宝珠。「不遍沾」:即尤为不染着,犹如包裹摩尼宝珠的迦尸布。「不附沾」:即虽贴近亦不附着,犹如莲叶上的水珠。「出离者」:即已向外走出,如同从牢狱中逃出之人。「弃舍者」:即已舍弃恶法,如同丢弃仇敌所藏的垢衣。「解脱者」:即善巧地解脱,于应执取之境灭除喜爱,不再回转。「离系者」:即不与烦恼结合,如同病已痊愈之人。「以无界限之心」:即以已破除界限之心,意为于一切……显示巴利原文
Dhīropaṇḍitoti satta padā vuttatthāyeva. Api ca dukkhe akampiyaṭṭhena dhīro. Sukhe anuppilavaṭṭhena paṇḍito. Diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikatthe kataparicayaṭṭhena paññavā. Attatthaparatthe niccalaṭṭhena buddhimā. Gambhīrauttānatthe apaccosakkanaṭṭhena ñāṇī. Guḷhapaṭicchannatthe obhāsanaṭṭhena vibhāvī. Nikkilesabyavadānaṭṭhena tulāsadisoti medhāvī. Na limpatīti sajātiyā na limpati ākāse lekhā viya. Na palimpatīti visesena na limpati. Na upalimpatīti saññogo hutvāpi na limpati hatthatale lekhā viya. Alittoti saññogo hutvāpi na kilissati kāsikavatthe ṭhapitamaṇiratanaṃ viya. Apalittoti visesena na kilissati maṇiratane paliveṭhitakāsikavatthaṃ viya. Anupalittoti upagantvāpi na allīyati pokkharapatte udakabindu viya. Nikkhantoti bahi nikkhanto bandhanāgārato palāto viya. Nissaṭoti pāpapahīno amittassa paṭicchāpitakiliṭṭhavatthu viya. Vippamuttoti suṭṭhu mutto gayhūpage vatthumhi ratiṃ nāsetvā puna nāgamanaṃ viya. Visaññuttoti kilesehi ekato na yutto byādhinā muttagilāno viya. Vimariyādikatena cetasāti vigatamariyādakatena cittena, sabbabhavena sabbārammaṇena sabbakilesehi muttacittenāti attho.
14 在「遍知想」这一偈中,其要义略述如下:并非仅仅遍知触,而是对于欲想等种种想,或依随于想,依前面所说的方法,用三种遍知遍知名色之后,依此行道,也同样能度越四种瀑流。由此,那位度脱瀑流者,在渴爱与邪见的执取之中,因断除了渴爱、邪见与烦恼而不被染着。他作为诸漏尽者、牟尼,因拔除了贪等箭矢而成为「已拔箭者」,因达到了念力的增盛而「不放逸」而行,又或者在预备阶段便精勤不放逸,由不放逸的行持而成为已拔箭者后,不再顾恋自己与他人的身体等种种,不再留恋此世与他世。他彻底地只在最后的心灭去之时,无所执取,犹如薪尽之火一般般涅槃。如此,以阿拉汉果为顶峰,结束了这次说法,仅是安立了教法而已;然而,并非通过这次说法而生起道或果,这是因为此次说法是针对诸漏尽者而宣说的缘故。显示巴利原文
14.Saññaṃ pariññāti gāthāya pana ayaṃ saṅkhepattho – na kevalañca phassameva, api ca kho pana kāmasaññādibhedaṃ saññaṃ, saññānusārena vā pubbe vuttanayeneva nāmarūpaṃ tīhi pariññāhi parijānitvā imāya paṭipadāya catubbidhampi vitareyya oghaṃ, tato so tiṇṇogho taṇhādiṭṭhipariggahesu taṇhādiṭṭhikilesappahānena anupalitto khīṇāsavamuni rāgādisallānaṃ abbūḷhattā abbūḷhasallo, sativepullappattiyā appamatto caraṃ, pubbabhāge vā appamatto caranto tena appamādacārena abbūḷhasallo hutvā sakaparattabhāvādibhedaṃ nāsīsati lokamimaṃ parañca, aññadatthu carimacittanirodhā nirupādānova jātavedo parinibbātīti arahattanikūṭena desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi, dhammanettiṭhapanameva karonto; na tu imāya desanāya maggaṃ vā phalaṃ vā uppādesi, khīṇāsavassa desitattāti.
能认知青、黄等种种所缘的差别,因此称为“想”。它以“了知”为相,以“再认”为作用。因为所有属于四地的想,无不以了知为相,一切想皆以了知为相。其中,那种凭借先前所作标记而认知的想,便具有“再认的作用”。应当如此理解它的运作:如同木匠先在木材上刻下记号,随后凭藉那记认再次认出那块木材;又如有人观察了他人身上的痣相等特征后,便依循那特征再次认出“这就是某人”;亦如掌管国王宝饰之人在各件宝饰上系上名牌,当有人吩咐“请取某件宝饰来”,他便点灯进入宝库,辨明名牌后将那件特定的宝饰取出——想正是如此生起的。显示巴利原文
Nīlādibhedaṃ ārammaṇaṃ sañjānātīti saññā. Sā sañjānanalakkhaṇā paccābhiññāṇarasā. Catubhūmikasaññā hi nosañjānanalakkhaṇā nāma natthi, sabbā sañjānanalakkhaṇāva. Yā panettha abhiññāṇena sañjānāti, sā paccābhiññāṇarasā nāma hoti. Tassā vaḍḍhakissa dārumhi abhiññāṇaṃ katvā puna tena abhiññāṇena taṃ paccābhijānanakāle, purisassa kāḷatilakādiabhiññāṇaṃ sallakkhetvā puna tena abhiññāṇena ‘‘asuko nāma eso’’ti tassa paccābhijānanakāle, rañño piḷandhanagopakabhaṇḍāgārikassa tasmiṃ tasmiṃ piḷandhane nāmapaṇṇakaṃ bandhitvā ‘‘asukaṃ piḷandhanaṃ nāma āharā’’ti vutte dīpaṃ jāletvā sāragabbhaṃ pavisitvā paṇṇaṃ vācetvā tassa tasseva piḷandhanassa āharaṇakāle ca pavatti veditabbā.
另有解说:从遍揽一切的角度而言,“想”以“了知”为相,以制造能引生再认之缘的标记为作用,犹如木匠等在木材等物上做记号;以依循所执取的标记而起执著为现起,正如曾见过大象的盲人一味执取局部;或者,因其不深入所缘、不能持久安住,而以“短暂不住”为现起,犹如闪电;以现前所及的境为近因,如同小鹿望见稻草人而生起“这是人”的想。其中,当想与智相应时,便完全随顺智而行,这应理解为如同地等元素由与其俱生的相应法伴随而行一般。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo – sabbasaṅgāhikavasena hi sañjānanalakkhaṇā saññā, punasañjānanapaccayanimittakaraṇarasā dāruādīsu tacchakādayo viya, yathāgahitanimittavasena abhinivesakaraṇapaccupaṭṭhānā hatthidassakaandho viya, ārammaṇe anogāḷhavuttitāya aciraṭṭhānapaccupaṭṭhānā vā vijju viya, yathāupaṭṭhitavisayapadaṭṭhānā tiṇapurisakesu migapotakānaṃ purisāti uppannasaññā viya. Yā panettha ñāṇasampayuttā hoti, sā ñāṇameva anuvattati, sasambhārapathavīādīsu sesadhammā pathavīādīni viyāti veditabbā.
与欲相应的想,是“欲想”。与嗔相应的想,是“嗔想”。与害相应的想,是“害想”。其中,前两种想(欲想、嗔想)既可以对有情生起,也可以对诸行生起。因为,当针对可爱、可意的有情或诸行而起寻思时,欲想便生起。当面对不可爱、不可意的有情或诸行,从内心生起愤恨而作观待,乃至意欲将其毁灭,在此期间所生起的便是嗔想。害想则不会对诸行生起,因为诸行中并无可被加害的对象。唯独当欲加害有情,思惟“愿这些有情被杀掉、被灭绝、被彻底灭尽,乃至不复存在”时,害想才会对有情生起。
与出离相应的想,是“出离想”。在不净观的前分阶段,它属于欲界;在不净禅那中,属于色界;以彼禅那为基础而生起道与果的阶段,则属于出世间。
与无嗔相应的想,是“无嗔想”。在慈心观的前分阶段,它属于欲界;在慈心禅那中,属于色界;以彼禅那为基础而生起道与果的阶段,则属于出世间。
与无害相应的想,是“无害想”。在悲心观的前分阶段,它属于欲界;在悲心禅那中,属于色界;以彼禅那为基础而生起道与果的阶段,则属于出世间。
以无贪为始,其余二者亦如是了知。显示巴利原文
Kāmapaṭisaññuttā saññā kāmasaññā. Byāpādapaṭisaññuttā saññā byāpādasaññā. Vihiṃsāpaṭisaññuttā saññā vihiṃsāsaññā. Tesu dve sattesupi saṅkhāresupi uppajjanti. Kāmasaññā hi piye manāpe satte vā saṅkhāre vā vitakkentassa uppajjati. Byāpādasaññā appiye amanāpe satte vā saṅkhāre vā kujjhitvā olokanakālato paṭṭhāya yāva vināsanā uppajjati. Vihiṃsāsaññā saṅkhāresu na uppajjati. Saṅkhāro hi dukkhāpetabbo nāma natthi. ‘‘Ime sattā haññantu vā, ucchijjantu vā, vinassantu vā, mā vā ahesu’’nti cintanakāle pana sattesu uppajjati. Nekkhammapaṭisaññuttā saññā nekkhammasaññā, sā asubhapubbabhāge kāmāvacarā hoti, asubhajhāne rūpāvacarā, taṃ jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā uppannamaggaphalakāle lokuttarā. Abyāpādapaṭisaññuttā saññā abyāpādasaññā, sā mettāpubbabhāge kāmāvacarā hoti, mettājhāne rūpāvacarā, taṃ jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā uppannamaggaphalakāle lokuttarā. Avihiṃsāpaṭisaññuttā saññā avihiṃsāsaññā, sā karuṇāpubbabhāge kāmāvacarā, karuṇājhāne rūpāvacarā, taṃ jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā uppannamaggaphalakāle lokuttarā. Yadā alobho sīsaṃ hoti, tadā itare dve tadanvāyikā bhavanti. Yadā mettā sīsaṃ hoti, tadā itare dve tadanvāyikā bhavanti. Yadā karuṇā sīsaṃ hoti, tadā itare dve tadanvāyikā bhavanti. Rūpārammaṇaṃ ārabbha uppannā saññā rūpasaññā. Saddasaññādīsupi eseva nayo. Idaṃ tassāyeva ārammaṇato nāmaṃ. Ārammaṇānaṃ vuttattā cakkhusamphassajādivatthūnipi vuttāneva honti.
“像这一类的想”:还应知道其他如“有对触所生想”“名言触所生想”等类别。其中,“名言触所生想”依通途而言,即涵盖六门的想。因为三个非色蕴自身犹如背靠背而立,它们为与己同时生起的想安立了“名言触所生想”之名。若依不共的说法,“有对触所生想”指前五门生起的想,“名言触所生想”指意门生起的想。应知这些都是为了涵盖其余更多的想。显示巴利原文
Yā evarūpā saññāti aññāpi ‘‘paṭighasamphassajā saññā adhivacanasamphassajā saññā’’ti evamādikā veditabbā. Tattha adhivacanasamphassajā saññātipi pariyāyena chadvārikāyeva . Tayo hi arūpino khandhā sayaṃ piṭṭhivaṭṭakā hutvā attanā sahajātasaññāya ‘‘adhivacanasamphassajā saññā’’ti nāmaṃ karonti, nippariyāyena pana paṭighasamphassajā saññā nāma pañcadvārikā saññā, adhivacanasamphassajā saññā nāma manodvārikā saññā. Etā atirekasaññā pariggahitāti veditabbā.
“想”:指其自性名称。“能认知”:指认知的活动形态。“能认知的状态”:指具有能认知的体性。显示巴利原文
Saññāti sabhāvanāmaṃ. Sañjānanāti sañjānanākāro. Sañjānitattanti sañjānitabhāvo.
“无明暴流”:由于不应积聚之义,身恶行等名为“不应得”,即不应获得。它获得此不应得者,故为无明。反之,身善行等名为“应得”,它不获此应得者,故为无明。它不知蕴的积聚义、处的范围义、界的空无义、根的主宰义、谛的真实义,故为无明。它不知苦等四谛——即依逼迫等角度所宣说的四种含义,故为无明。它在无始轮回中,令有情奔驰于胎、趣、有、识住、有情居五种存在形态,故为无明。它奔驰于究竟不存在的男女等概念,反而不奔驰于真实存在的蕴等,故为无明。又,它覆盖眼识等的依处与所缘,以及缘起、缘生诸法,故为无明。这就是无明暴流。
应当以欲暴流来度越;以有暴流来渡过;以见暴流来超越;以无明暴流来越过。或者说,以入流道断除而度越;以斯陀含道断除而渡过;以阿那含道断除而超越;以阿拉汉道断除而越过。又有人主张:“度越等五句,应配合彼分断等五种断除来理解。”显示巴利原文
Avijjoghanti pūretuṃ ayuttaṭṭhena kāyaduccaritādi avindiyaṃ nāma, aladdhabbanti attho. Taṃ avindiyaṃ vindatīti avijjā. Tabbiparītato kāyasucaritādi vindiyaṃ nāma, taṃ vindiyaṃ na vindatīti avijjā. Khandhānaṃ rāsaṭṭhaṃ, āyatanānaṃ āyatanaṭṭhaṃ, dhātūnaṃ suññaṭṭhaṃ, indriyānaṃ adhipatiyaṭṭhaṃ, saccānaṃ tathaṭṭhaṃ aviditaṃ karotītipi avijjā. Dukkhādīnaṃ pīḷanādivasena vuttaṃ catubbidhaṃ atthaṃ aviditaṃ karotītipi avijjā. Antavirahite saṃsāre yonigatibhavaviññāṇaṭṭhitisattāvāsesu satte javāpetīti avijjā. Paramatthato avijjamānesu itthipurisādīsu javati, vijjamānesu khandhādīsu na javatīti avijjā. Api ca cakkhuviññāṇādīnaṃ vatthārammaṇānaṃ paṭiccasamuppādapaṭiccasamuppannānañca dhammānaṃ chādanatopi avijjā, taṃ avijjoghaṃ. Kāmoghavasena uttareyya. Bhavoghavasena patareyya. Diṭṭhoghavasena samatikkameyya. Avijjoghavasena vītivatteyya. Atha vā sotāpattimaggena pahānavasena uttareyya. Sakadāgāmimaggena pahānavasena patareyya. Anāgāmimaggena pahānavasena samatikkameyya. Arahattamaggena pahānavasena vītivatteyya. Atha vā ‘‘tareyyādipañcapadaṃ tadaṅgādipañcapahānena yojetabba’’nti keci vadanti.
说道“牟尼即指智”之后,为显示其分类,又接着说“那种慧、了知……”等。除如前所述的方式之外,此处特指明“无痴、择法”这一句。
无痴与善法中的不修习相对,是修习之因。依无痴之力,能无颠倒地执取;有痴者则颠倒执取。依无痴之力,能如实执持真实,随顺事物自性而作。因为有痴者执取“真实为不真实,不真实为真实”;同样地,依无痴之力便不会有求不得苦。无痴者因为能这样审察:“于此,这又能从何处得到呢?”,所以没有死苦。因为有痴的死亡是苦,而这种苦对无痴者来说并不存在。于出家者而言是乐共住,且不生于畜生道。因为有痴而常迷惑者,会生于畜生道。无痴是痴的对治,它依无痴之力摧破了由痴引致的非中道状态。依无痴之力,能有无害想、界想、依中道而行,并能破除后两种执着(即见取与戒禁取)。最后两种念处,也正是依于无痴的威力而成就的。无痴是获得长寿的因。无痴者能了知利益与不利,回避不利、接受利益,因而能长寿,且不会从自身的成就中退堕。因为无痴显示巴利原文
‘‘Monaṃ vuccati ñāṇa’’nti vatvā taṃ pabhedato dassetuṃ ‘‘yā paññā pajānanā’’tiādimāha. Taṃ vuttanayameva ṭhapetvā ‘‘amoho dhammavicayo’’ti padaṃ. Amoho kusalesu dhammesu abhāvanāya paṭipakkho bhāvanāhetu. Amohena aviparītaṃ gaṇhāti mūḷhassa viparītaggahaṇato. Amohena yāthāvaṃ yāthāvato dhārento yathāsabhāve pavattati. Mūḷho hi ‘‘tacchaṃ atacchaṃ, atacchañca taccha’’nti gaṇhāti; tathā icchitālābhadukkhaṃ na hoti. Amūḷhassa ‘‘taṃ kutettha labbhā’’ti evamādipaccavekkhaṇasambhavato maraṇadukkhaṃ na hoti. Sammohamaraṇañhi dukkhaṃ, na ca taṃ amūḷhassa hoti. Pabbajitānaṃ sukhasaṃvāso hoti, tiracchānayoniyaṃ nibbatti na hoti. Mohena hi niccasammūḷhā tiracchānayoniṃ upapajjanti . Mohapaṭipakkho ca amoho mohavasena amajjhattabhāvassa abhāvakaro. Amohena avihiṃsāsaññā dhātusaññā majjhimāya paṭipattiyā paṭipajjanaṃ, pacchimaganthadvayassa pabhedanañca hoti. Pacchimāni dve satipaṭṭhānāni tasseva ānubhāvena ijjhanti. Amoho dīghāyukatāya paccayo hoti. Amūḷho hi hitāhitaṃ ñatvā ahitaṃ parivajjento hitañca paṭisevamāno dīghāyuko hoti, attasampattiyā aparihīno hoti. Amūḷho hi attano hitameva karonto attānaṃ sampādeti. Ariyavihārassa paccayo hoti, udāsinapakkhesu nibbuto hoti amūḷhassa sabbābhisaṅgatāya abhāvato. Amohena anattadassanaṃ hoti. Asammūḷho hi yāthāvagahaṇakusalo apariṇāyakaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ apariṇāyakato bujjhati. Yathā ca etena anattadassanaṃ, evaṃ attadassanaṃ mohena. Ko hi nāma attasuññataṃ bujjhitvā puna sammohaṃ āpajjeyyāti.
“具备那种智”:即具足此处所说之智的人,即有学等圣者,称为牟尼。“得牟尼者”:即获得此智、证得牟尼状态的人。
“三”:这是数量的限定。
“牟尼法”:即能成就牟尼、造就牟尼的修行法。
在身牟尼等法中,身牟尼应依表色身而安立;语牟尼应依表语与声语而安立;意牟尼应依意门心等而安立。
“三种身恶行的断除”:即断除杀生等从身体发起的恶行。
“身善行”:即从身体发起的善行。
“以身为所缘的智”:即以身体为所缘,从无常等角度而生起的智。
“身遍知”:即对身体的知遍知、度遍知、断遍知,以此三种遍知了知的智。
“与遍知俱行的道”:即全面审察自身后生起的、与遍知俱行的道。
“对身上欲贪的断除”:即断除对身体的渴爱与欲贪。
“身行的灭”:即入出息灭、止息,即是入第四禅定。
“语行的灭”:即寻与伺灭、止息,即是入第二禅定。
“心行的灭”:即想与显示巴利原文
Tena ñāṇena samannāgatoti etena vuttappakārena ñāṇena samaṅgībhūto sekkhādayo muni. Monappattoti paṭiladdhañāṇo munibhāvaṃ patto. Tīṇīti gaṇanaparicchedo. Moneyyānīti munibhāvakarā moneyyakarā paṭipadā dhammā. Kāyamoneyyantiādīsu viññattikāyarūpakāyavasena paññāpetabbaṃ kāyamoneyyaṃ. Viññattivācāsaddavācāvasena paññāpetabbaṃ vacīmoneyyaṃ. Manodvārikacittādivasena paññāpetabbaṃ manomoneyyaṃ. Tividhakāyaduccaritānaṃ pahānanti pāṇātipātādividhānaṃ kāyato pavattānaṃ duṭṭhu caritānaṃ pajahanaṃ. Kāyasucaritanti kāyato pavattaṃ suṭṭhu caritaṃ. Kāyārammaṇe ñāṇanti kāyaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā aniccādivasena pavattaṃ kāyārammaṇe ñāṇaṃ. Kāyapariññāti kāyaṃ ñātatīraṇappahānapariññāhi jānanavasena pavattaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Pariññāsahagato maggoti ajjhattikaṃ kāyaṃ sammasitvā uppāditamaggo pariññāsahagato. Kāye chandarāgassa pahānanti kāye taṇhāchandarāgassa pajahanaṃ. Kāyasaṅkhāranirodhoti assāsapassāsānaṃ nirodho āvaraṇo, catutthajjhānasamāpattisamāpajjanaṃ. Vacīsaṅkhāranirodhoti vitakkavicārānaṃ nirodho āvaraṇo, dutiyajjhānasamāpattisamāpajjanaṃ. Cittasaṅkhāranirodhoti saññāvedanānaṃ nirodho āvaraṇo, saññāvedayitanirodhasamāpattisamāpajjanaṃ.
在第一首偈颂中,“身牟尼”:因断除身恶行而称为身牟尼。“语牟尼”:因断除语恶行而称为语牟尼。“意牟尼”:因断除意恶行而称为意牟尼。“漏尽牟尼”:因断除一切不善而称为漏尽牟尼。“成就牟尼法”:即已了知所应了知的,安住于果位,故称成就牟尼法。“说为一切舍断者”:即已舍断一切烦恼而安住者,故说为一切舍断者。显示巴利原文
Paṭhamagāthāya kāyamunintiādīsu kāyaduccaritappahānavasena kāyamuni. Vacīduccaritappahānavasena vācāmuni. Manoduccaritappahānavasena manomuni. Sabbākusalappahānavasena anāsavamuni. Moneyyasampannanti jānitabbaṃ jānitvā phale ṭhitattā moneyyasampannaṃ. Āhu sabbappahāyinanti sabbakilese pajahitvā ṭhitattā sabbappahāyinaṃ kathayanti.
在第二首偈颂中,「已洗净罪恶」(ninhātapāpaka):意指于‘内’与‘外’所摄的一切处,以内外境为所缘而生的所有罪恶,已由道智洗净、涤除而安住者,称为‘已洗净罪恶者’,应如此理解其义。居于家中、行在家生活者,是‘在家牟尼’。出家行非家生活者,是‘非家牟尼’。其中,有学圣者称为‘有学牟尼’。阿拉汉称为‘无学牟尼’。独觉佛称为‘独觉牟尼’。正自觉者称为‘牟尼之牟尼’。显示巴利原文
Dutiyagāthāya ninhātapāpakanti yo ajjhattabahiddhasaṅkhāte sabbasmimpi āyatane ajjhattabahiddhārammaṇavasena uppattirahāni sabbapāpakāni maggañāṇena ninhāya dhovitvā ṭhitattā ninhātapāpakaṃ āhūti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Agāramajjhe vasantā agāramunino. Pabbajjupagatā anagāramunino. Tattha sekkhā sekkhamunino. Arahanto asekkhamunino. Paccekabuddhā paccekamunino. Sammāsambuddhā munimunino.
然后,为更进一步解说而提问:‘哪些是在家牟尼?’‘在家者’:从事耕作、畜牧等在家职业者。‘已见道者’:已见涅槃者。‘已了知教法者’:已了知三学之教法,故称已了知教法者。‘非家者’:无有耕作、畜牧等在家职业,出家者称为‘非家者’。‘七有学’:即入流者等七类圣者。他们尚于三学中学,故为‘有学’。阿拉汉不复为学,故为‘无学’。独觉佛依各自因缘,独自无师而觉悟四圣谛,故称‘独觉牟尼’。显示巴利原文
Puna kathetukamyatāpucchāvasena ‘‘katame agāramunino’’ti āha. Agārikāti kasigorakkhādiagārikakamme niyuttā. Diṭṭhapadāti diṭṭhanibbānā . Viññātasāsanāti viññātaṃ sikkhattayasāsanaṃ etesanti viññātasāsanā. Anagārāti kasigorakkhādiagāriyakammaṃ etesaṃ natthīti pabbajitā ‘‘anagārā’’ti vuccanti. Satta sekkhāti sotāpannādayo satta. Tīsu sikkhāsu sikkhantīti sekkhā. Arahanto na sikkhantīti asekkhā. Taṃ taṃ kāraṇaṃ paṭicca ekakāva anācariyakāva catusaccaṃ bujjhitavantoti paccekabuddhā paccekamunino.
所谓‘牟尼之牟尼是指如来’,此中以八种理由说明世尊为如来:一、如过去诸佛而来,故称如来;二、如过去诸佛而去,故称如来;三、已到达真实相,故称如来;四、已如实觉悟真实法,故称如来;五、由如实见,故称如来;六、由如实说,故称如来;七、由如实作,故称如来;八、以超胜义,故称如来。显示巴利原文
Munimunino vuccanti tathāgatāti ettha aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi bhagavā tathāgato – tathā āgatoti tathāgato, tathā gatoti tathāgato, tathalakkhaṇaṃ āgatoti tathāgato, tathadhamme yāthāvato abhisambuddhoti tathāgato, tathadassitāya tathāgato, tathavāditāya tathāgato, tathākāritāya tathāgato, abhibhavanaṭṭhena tathāgatoti.
世尊如何以“如同到来”而成为如来呢?正如过去的正自觉者,为利益一切世间而精勤到来。这说的是什么意思呢?即过去诸世尊是以那样的誓愿而来,我们的世尊也以同样的誓愿而来。又如,过去诸世尊圆满了布施、持戒、出离、智慧、精进、忍辱、真实、决意、慈、舍这十种波罗蜜、十种近波罗蜜、十种究竟波罗蜜,也就是三十种波罗蜜;圆满了舍弃肢节、眼睛、财富、王国、子女、妻子等五种大舍;圆满了过去世的修行与实践、开示佛法、了知饶益众生等诸行,达到智行的顶点而来,我们的世尊也是如此到来。再者,过去诸世尊修习并圆满了四念处、四正勤、四神足、五根、五力、七觉支、圣八支道而来,我们的世尊也是如此到来。因此,正因“如同到来”,故称如来。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ bhagavā tathā āgatoti tathāgato? Yathā sabbalokahitāya ussukkamāpannā purimakā sammāsambuddhā āgatā. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yenābhinīhārena purimakā bhagavanto āgatā, teneva amhākampi bhagavā āgato. Atha vā yathā purimakā bhagavanto dānasīlanekkhammapaññāvīriyakhantisaccādhiṭṭhānamettupekkhāsaṅkhātā dasa pāramiyo dasa upapāramiyo dasa paramatthapāramiyoti samatiṃsapāramiyo pūretvā aṅgapariccāgaṃ nayanadhanarajjaputtadārapariccāganti ime pañca mahāpariccāge pariccajitvā pubbayogapubbacariyadhammakkhānañātatthacariyādayo pūretvā buddhicariyāya koṭiṃ patvā āgatā, tathā amhākampi bhagavā āgato. Yathā ca purimakā bhagavanto cattāro satipaṭṭhāne, cattāro sammappadhāne, cattāro iddhipāde, pañcindriyāni, pañca balāni, satta bojjhaṅge, ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ bhāvetvā pūretvā āgatā, tathā amhākampi bhagavā āgato. Evaṃ tathā āgatoti tathāgato.
正如燃灯佛等诸牟尼,证得一切知来到此世间;
同样,这位释迦牟尼也已到来,因此,这位具眼者被称为如来。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yathā ca dīpaṅkarabuddhaādayo, sabbaññubhāvaṃ munayo idhāgatā; Tathā ayaṃ sakyamunīpi āgato, tathāgato vuccati tena cakkhumā’’ti.
如来何以称为“如去”?正如过去诸世尊初降生时那样行走。他们如何行走呢?他们刚降生时,双足平稳踏地,面朝北方,以七步威仪而行。正如经文所说——显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ tathā gatoti tathāgato? Yathā sampatijātā purimakā bhagavanto gatā. Kathañca te gatā? Te hi sampatijātā samehi pādehi pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhāya uttarābhimukhā sattapadavītihārena gatā. Yathāha –
阿难,菩萨初降生时,便以双足安稳踏地,面朝北方,以七步之姿行走,有白色伞盖擎持于上,他环顾一切方所,发出狮子般雄浑的声音:“我是世间的最上者、世间的最长者、世间的最胜者,这是我的最后一生,如今不再有后有。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Sampatijāto, ānanda, bodhisatto samehi pādehi pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhahitvā uttarābhimukho sattapadavītihārena gacchati, setamhi chatte anudhāriyamāne sabbā ca disā anuviloketi, āsabhiñca vācaṃ bhāsati – ‘aggohamasmi lokassa, jeṭṭhohamasmi lokassa, seṭṭhohamasmi lokassa, ayamantimā jāti, natthi dāni punabbhavo’’’ti (dī. ni. 2.31; ma. ni. 3.207).
而这行走真实不虚,因为它成为众多殊胜成就的前兆。当他刚诞生时“以双足平立”,这是他获得四神足的前兆;“面朝北方”,则是超越一切世间的前兆;“以七步行走”,是获得七觉支宝的前兆;在“金柄的拂尘挥舞”(经集693)中所说的“拂尘挥动”,则是摧伏一切外道的前兆;“持白色伞盖”,是获得阿拉汉解脱那最胜无垢白伞盖的前兆;“环视一切方向”,是获得一切知智、无碍智的前兆;而“发出狮子吼般的声音”,则是转动不可退转的无上法轮的前兆。同样,这位世尊也如此行走。而这行走对于这些殊胜成就而言,成为了真实不虚的前兆。因此古德们说:显示巴利原文
Tañcassa gamanaṃ tathaṃ ahosi avitathaṃ anekesaṃ visesādhigamānaṃ pubbanimittabhāvena. Yañhi so sampatijāto samehi pādehi patiṭṭhāti, idamassa caturiddhipādapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ. Uttaramukhabhāvo panassa sabbalokuttarabhāvassa pubbanimittaṃ. Sattapadavītihāro sattabojjhaṅgaratanapaṭilābhassa. ‘‘Suvaṇṇadaṇḍā vītipatanti cāmarā’’ti (su. ni. 693) ettha vuttacāmarukkhepo pana sabbatitthiyanimmadanassa. Setacchattadhāraṇaṃ arahattavimuttivaravimalasetacchattapaṭilābhassa. Sabbadisānuvilokanaṃ sabbaññutānāvaraṇañāṇapaṭilābhassa. Āsabhivācābhāsanaṃ pana appaṭivattiyavaradhammacakkapavattanassa pubbanimittaṃ. Tathā ayaṃ bhagavāpi gato. Tañcassa gamanaṃ tathaṃ ahosi avitathaṃ tesaṃyeva visesādhigamānaṃ pubbanimittabhāvena. Tenāhu porāṇā –
犹如牛王方才降生,于须臾间,便以四足平稳触地;
乔达摩迈出七步,众天人执持白伞盖。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Muhuttajātova gavampatī yathā, samehi pādehi phusī vasundharaṃ; So vikkamī satta padāni gotamo, setañca chattaṃ anudhārayuṃ marū. ‘‘Gantvāna so satta padāni gotamo, disā vilokesi samā samantato; Aṭṭhaṅgupetaṃ giramabbhudīrayi, sīho yathā pabbatamuddhaniṭṭhito’’ti. (paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.1.37; itivu. aṭṭha. 38);
如是,因他这样“去”,故称“如来”。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ tathā gatoti tathāgato.
或者,如同过去诸世尊那样,这位世尊也同样如此:以出离舍断欲贪……以初禅舍断诸盖……以无常随观舍断常想……以阿拉汉道断尽一切烦恼而“去”;如是,因这样“去”,故称如来。显示巴利原文
Atha vā yathā purimakā bhagavanto, ayampi bhagavā tatheva nekkhammena kāmacchandaṃ…pe… paṭhamajjhānena nīvaraṇe…pe… aniccānupassanāya niccasaññaṃ…pe… arahattamaggena sabbakilese pahāya gato, evampi tathā gatoti tathāgato.
如来如何依“真实相”而得名?地界有坚硬相,这是真实不虚的;水界有流动相;火界有暖热相;风界有支持相;空界有不接触相;识界有了知相。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ āgatoti tathāgato? Pathavīdhātuyā kakkhaḷattalakkhaṇaṃ tathaṃ avitathaṃ, āpodhātuyā paggharaṇalakkhaṇaṃ, tejodhātuyā uṇhattalakkhaṇaṃ, vāyodhātuyā vitthambhanalakkhaṇaṃ, ākāsadhātuyā asamphuṭṭhalakkhaṇaṃ, viññāṇadhātuyā vijānanalakkhaṇaṃ.
色有变坏相,受有感受相,想有认知相,行有造作相,识有了知相。显示巴利原文
Rūpassa ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ, vedanāya vedayitalakkhaṇaṃ, saññāya sañjānanalakkhaṇaṃ, saṅkhārānaṃ abhisaṅkharaṇalakkhaṇaṃ, viññāṇassa vijānanalakkhaṇaṃ.
寻有投向相,伺有审察相,喜有遍满相,乐有乐味相,心一境性有不散乱相,触有接触相。显示巴利原文
Vitakkassa abhiniropanalakkhaṇaṃ, vicārassa anumajjanalakkhaṇaṃ, pītiyā pharaṇalakkhaṇaṃ, sukhassa sātalakkhaṇaṃ, cittekaggatāya avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ, phassassa phusanalakkhaṇaṃ.
信根以信解为相,精进根以策励为相,念根以安住为相,定根以不散乱为相,慧根以了知为相。显示巴利原文
Saddhindriyassa adhimokkhalakkhaṇaṃ, vīriyindriyassa paggahalakkhaṇaṃ, satindriyassa upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ, samādhindriyassa avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ, paññindriyassa pajānanalakkhaṇaṃ.
信力以于不信中不动摇为相,精进力以于懈怠中不动摇为相,念力以于忘失中不动摇为相,定力以于掉举中不动摇为相,慧力以于无明中不动摇为相。显示巴利原文
Saddhābalassa assaddhiye akampiyalakkhaṇaṃ, vīriyabalassa kosajje, satibalassa muṭṭhassacce, samādhibalassa uddhacce, paññābalassa avijjāya akampiyalakkhaṇaṃ.
念觉支以安住为相,择法觉支以简择为相,精进觉支以策励为相,喜觉支以遍满为相,轻安觉支以寂静为相,定觉支以不散乱为相,舍觉支以省察为相。显示巴利原文
Satisambojjhaṅgassa upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ, dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa pavicayalakkhaṇaṃ, vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa paggahalakkhaṇaṃ, pītisambojjhaṅgassa pharaṇalakkhaṇaṃ, passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa upasamalakkhaṇaṃ, samādhisambojjhaṅgassa avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ, upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa paṭisaṅkhānalakkhaṇaṃ.
正见以照了为相,正思惟以投向为相,正语以摄持为相,正业以发起为相,正命以净化为相,正精进以策励为相,正念以安住为相,正定以不散乱为相。显示巴利原文
Sammādiṭṭhiyā dassanalakkhaṇaṃ, sammāsaṅkappassa abhiniropanalakkhaṇaṃ, sammāvācāya pariggahalakkhaṇaṃ, sammākammantassa samuṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ, sammāājīvassa vodānalakkhaṇaṃ, sammāvāyāmassa paggahalakkhaṇaṃ, sammāsatiyā upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ, sammāsamādhissa avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ.
无明以不知为相,行以思为相,识以了知为相,名以倾向为相,色以变坏为相,六处以处为相,触以接触为相,受以感受为相,爱以因为相,取以执取为相,有以累积为相,生以初生为相,老以衰老为相,死以死没为相。显示巴利原文
Avijjāya aññāṇalakkhaṇaṃ, saṅkhārānaṃ cetanālakkhaṇaṃ, viññāṇassa vijānanalakkhaṇaṃ, nāmassa namanalakkhaṇaṃ, rūpassa ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ, saḷāyatanassa āyatanalakkhaṇaṃ, phassassa phusanalakkhaṇaṃ, vedanāya vedayitalakkhaṇaṃ, taṇhāya hetulakkhaṇaṃ, upādānassa gahaṇalakkhaṇaṃ, bhavassa āyūhanalakkhaṇaṃ, jātiyā nibbattilakkhaṇaṃ, jarāya jīraṇalakkhaṇaṃ, maraṇassa cutilakkhaṇaṃ.
诸界以空为相,诸处以处为相,念处以安住为相,正勤以勤策为相,神足以成就为相,诸根以增上为相,诸力以不动摇为相,觉支以出离为相,道以因为相。显示巴利原文
Dhātūnaṃ suññatalakkhaṇaṃ, āyatanānaṃ āyatanalakkhaṇaṃ, satipaṭṭhānānaṃ upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ, sammappadhānānaṃ padahanalakkhaṇaṃ, iddhipādānaṃ ijjhanalakkhaṇaṃ, indriyānaṃ adhipatilakkhaṇaṃ, balānaṃ akampiyalakkhaṇaṃ, bojjhaṅgānaṃ niyyānalakkhaṇaṃ, maggassa hetulakkhaṇaṃ.
诸谛有真实相,止有不散乱相,观有随观相,止观有一味相,双运有不超越相。显示巴利原文
Saccānaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ, samathassa avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ, vipassanāya anupassanālakkhaṇaṃ, samathavipassanānaṃ ekarasalakkhaṇaṃ, yuganaddhānaṃ anativattanalakkhaṇaṃ.
戒清净有防护相,心清净有不散乱相,见清净有照了相,尽智有断相,无生智有轻安相,欲有根本相。显示巴利原文
Sīlavisuddhiyā saṃvaraṇalakkhaṇaṃ, cittavisuddhiyā avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ, diṭṭhivisuddhiyā dassanalakkhaṇaṃ, khaye ñāṇassa samucchedalakkhaṇaṃ, anuppāde ñāṇassa passaddhilakkhaṇaṃ, chandassa mūlalakkhaṇaṃ.
作意有发起相,触有和合相,受有集起相,定有上首相,念有增上相,慧有殊胜相,解脱有精髓相,以不死为归宿的涅槃有究竟相,这是真实不虚的。此真实相由智慧所通达、无颠倒证得、已证悟者,名为如来。如是,因具足真实相而来,故名如来。显示巴利原文
Manasikārassa samuṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ, phassassa samodhānalakkhaṇaṃ, vedanāya samosaraṇalakkhaṇaṃ, samādhissa pamukhalakkhaṇaṃ, satiyā ādhipateyyalakkhaṇaṃ, paññāya tatuttariyalakkhaṇaṃ, vimuttiyā sāralakkhaṇaṃ, amatogadhassa nibbānassa pariyosānalakkhaṇaṃ tathaṃ avitathaṃ, etaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ ñāṇagatiyā āgato avirajjhitvā patto anuppattoti tathāgato. Evaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ āgatoti tathāgato.
如来如何因对真实法如实已正觉而称为如来?真实法即四圣谛。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ tathadhamme yāthāvato abhisambuddhoti tathāgato? Tathadhammā nāma cattāri ariyasaccāni. Yathāha –
比丘们,有四种真实、不虚、不异。哪四种?‘此是苦’,比丘们,这是真实、不虚、不异;‘此是苦集’是真实、不虚、不异;‘此是苦灭’是真实、不虚、不异;‘此是苦灭之道’是真实、不虚、不异。(广说)(《相应部》5.1090)显示巴利原文
‘‘Cattārimāni, bhikkhave, tathāni avitathāni anaññathāni. Katamāni cattāri? ‘Idaṃ dukkha’nti, bhikkhave, tathametaṃ avitathametaṃ anaññathameta’’nti vitthāro (saṃ. ni. 5.1090).
世尊已正觉这些真实,因已正觉真实,故称如来。此处,‘去’(gata)一词即是已正觉之义。显示巴利原文
Tāni ca bhagavā abhisambuddhoti tathānaṃ abhisambuddhattā tathāgatoti vuccati. Abhisambuddhattho hi ettha gatasaddo.
再者,老死以生为缘而生起、集起,这一意义是真实的、不虚的、不异的……乃至……诸行以无明为缘而生起、集起,这一意义是真实的、不虚的、不异的。同样,无明对于诸行的缘的意义……乃至……生对于老死的缘的意义,是真实的、不虚的、不异的。这一切,世尊都已完全正觉;因完全正觉了这些真实,故称为如来。如是,因如实完全正觉真实法,故为如来。显示巴利原文
Api ca jarāmaraṇassa jātipaccayasambhūtasamudāgataṭṭho tatho avitatho anaññatho…pe… saṅkhārānaṃ avijjāpaccayasambhūtasamudāgataṭṭho tatho avitatho anaññatho. Tathā avijjāya saṅkhārānaṃ paccayaṭṭho…pe… jātiyā jarāmaraṇassa paccayaṭṭho tatho avitatho anaññatho. Taṃ sabbaṃ bhagavā abhisambuddho, tassāpi tathānaṃ abhisambuddhattā tathāgato. Evaṃ tathadhamme yāthāvato abhisambuddhoti tathāgato.
如何因如实见而称为如来?世尊在含天神的世间……乃至含天、人的众生中,于无量世界之间,对无量众生于眼门现前的、名为色所缘之物,以一切方式了知、照见。当他如此了知、照见时,那个色——或依可意、不可意等,或依见、闻、觉、识中所获得的词——例如“什么是那个色,即色处?就是依止于四大种的色彩、光泽,可见、有对,青色、黄色……”等等(《法集论》616),以多种名称、十三种转起、五十二种理则而被分别,这一切唯是真实,无有丝毫虚妄。对于声音等在耳门等处现前的,也是如此。世尊也这样说:显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ tathadassitāya tathāgato? Bhagavā yaṃ sadevake loke…pe… sadevamanussāya pajāya aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu aparimāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ cakkhudvāre āpāthaṃ āgacchantaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ nāma atthi, taṃ sabbākārena jānāti passati. Evaṃ jānatā passatā ca tena taṃ iṭṭhāniṭṭhādivasena vā diṭṭhasutamutaviññātesu labbhamānakapadavasena vā ‘‘katamaṃ taṃ rūpaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ? Yaṃ rūpaṃ catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ upādāya vaṇṇanibhā sanidassanaṃ sappaṭighaṃ nīlaṃ pītaka’’ntiādinā (dha. sa. 616) nayena anekehi nāmehi terasahi vārehi dvipaññāsāya nayehi vibhajjamānaṃ tathameva hoti, vitathaṃ natthi. Esa nayo sotadvārādīsupi āpāthamāgacchantesu saddādīsu. Vuttampi cetaṃ bhagavatā –
“比丘们,于含天神的世间……乃至含天、人的众生中,他们所见的、所闻的、所觉的、所识的、所得的、所求的、心意所伺察的一切,我皆了知……我皆通达。这是如来的所知,而如来不执取它。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Yaṃ, bhikkhave, sadevakassa lokassa…pe… sadevamanussāya pajāya diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ mutaṃ viññātaṃ pattaṃ pariyesitaṃ anuvicaritaṃ manasā, tamahaṃ jānāmi…pe… tamahaṃ abbhaññāsiṃ. Taṃ tathāgatassa viditaṃ, taṃ tathāgato na upaṭṭhāsī’’ti (a. ni. 4.24).
因此,如来因如实见而称如来。当知此处“如来”一词,即依如实见的意义而成立。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ tathadassitāya tathāgato. Tattha tathadassīatthe tathāgatoti padasambhavo veditabbo.
为何如来因如实语而称如来?那一夜,世尊坐于菩提道场不败的金刚座上,摧破四魔,证悟无上正等正觉;另一夜,他在双娑罗树间,于无余涅槃界中般涅槃。在这四十五年间,从最初菩提、中间菩提乃至最后菩提,世尊所宣说的修多罗、祇夜……乃至吠陀罗,一切义理与文句皆无可指责,无缺无余,一切行相圆满,摧伏贪、嗔、痴的骄慢,其中连毫末的过失都不存在。一切所说,犹如同一印章所印,同一量器所量,同一秤所称,唯是真实、不虚、不异。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ tathavāditāya tathāgato? Yaṃ rattiṃ bhagavā bodhimaṇḍe aparājitapallaṅke nisinno catunnaṃ mārānaṃ matthakaṃ madditvā anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho, yañca rattiṃ yamakasālānamantare anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyi, etthantare pañcacattālīsavassaparimāṇe kāle paṭhamabodhiyampi majjhimabodhiyampi pacchimabodhiyampi yaṃ bhagavatā bhāsitaṃ suttaṃ geyyaṃ…pe… vedallaṃ. Sabbaṃ taṃ atthato byañjanato ca anupavajjaṃ anūnamanadhikaṃ sabbākāraparipuṇṇaṃ rāgamadanimmadanaṃ dosamohamadanimmadanaṃ, natthi tattha vālaggamattampi pakkhalitaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ ekamuddikāya lañchitaṃ viya, ekanāḷiyā mitaṃ viya, ekatulāya tulitaṃ viya ca tathameva hoti avitathaṃ anaññathaṃ. Yathāha –
准达,如来证悟无上正等正觉的那一夜,与于无余涅槃界般涅槃的那一夜,于此期间所说、所言、所开示的一切,悉皆如实,无有变异,因此名为“如来”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yañca, cunda, rattiṃ tathāgato anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambujjhati, yañca rattiṃ anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyati, yaṃ etasmiṃ antare bhāsati lapati niddisati, sabbaṃ taṃ tatheva hoti no aññathā, tasmā ‘tathāgato’ti vuccatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.188).
此处“gata”一词有“说”的含义。因此,如来因真实语而称为如来。显示巴利原文
Gadaattho hi ettha gatasaddo. Evaṃ tathavāditāya tathāgato.
又,“āgadana”即“āgada”,意为语言。他有真实、不颠倒的语言,因此将da音转为ta音,即成“tathāgata”。应于此义中,如是了知词语的成立。显示巴利原文
Api ca āgadanaṃ āgado, vacananti attho. Tatho aviparīto āgado assāti dakārassa takāraṃ katvā tathāgatoti evametasmiṃ atthe padasiddhi veditabbā.
如何如来因如实行而称为如来?世尊的语言随顺于身,身亦随顺于语言。因此,他如语而行,如行而语。对成就如是之人,如其语,其身亦如彼而行转起——此即是义。如其身,其语亦如彼而行转起,故称如来。因此,世尊说:“诸比丘,如来是如语而行、如行而语者。如是,如语而行、如行而语,由此故称‘如来’。”如此,如来因如实行而称为如来。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ tathākāritāya tathāgato? Bhagavato hi vācāya kāyo anulometi, kāyassāpi vācā. Tasmā yathāvādī tathākārī, yathākārī tathāvādī ca hoti. Evaṃbhūtassa cassa yathā vācā , kāyopi tathā gato pavattoti attho. Yathā ca kāyo, vācāpi tathā gatā pavattāti tathāgato. Tenevāha – ‘‘yathāvādī, bhikkhave, tathāgato tathākārī, yathākārī tathāvādī. Iti yathāvādī tathākārī, yathākārī tathāvādī. ‘Tasmā tathāgato’ti vuccatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.23). Evaṃ tathākāritāya tathāgato.
如何以“征服”之义而名为如来?上至有顶天,下至无间地狱,横遍无量的世界界,他以戒、定、慧、解脱、解脱知见征服一切众生。他无法被衡量,无可测度,确实是无等、不可量、无上、王中之王、天中之天、帝释中之帝释、梵天中之梵天。因此说:显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ abhibhavanaṭṭhena tathāgato? Upari bhavaggaṃ heṭṭhā avīciṃ pariyantaṃ katvā tiriyaṃ aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu sabbasatte abhibhavati sīlena samādhinā paññāya vimuttiyā vimuttiñāṇadassanena, na tassa tulā vā pamāṇaṃ vā atthi, atha kho atulo appameyyo anuttaro rājātirājā devānaṃ atidevo sakkānaṃ atisakko brahmānaṃ atibrahmā. Tenāha –
“比丘们,于含摄天神的世间……乃至含摄人天的一切众生中,如来是征服者,不为任何所征服,是洞见一切者,是自在者,因此称为‘如来’。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Sadevake , bhikkhave, loke…pe… sadevamanussāya pajāya tathāgato abhibhū anabhibhūto aññadatthudaso vasavattī, tasmā ‘tathāgato’ti vuccatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.23).
于此,应如此理解其词源:agado(药)犹如无病(agado)一般。那么,这药是什么呢?即是教法的庄严与福德的积集。因此,这位有大神力的良医,以天药降伏了一切外道论者以及含摄天神的世间,犹如以药治蛇。像这样,在征服一切世间时,他具有如实不颠倒的、由教法庄严与福德所构成的‘药’(agado)。将字母d转为t,即成tathāgato(如来),应如此理解。因此,以征服之义称为如来。显示巴利原文
Tatthevaṃ padasiddhi veditabbā – agado viya agado. Ko panesa? Desanāvilāso ceva puññussayo ca. Tena hesa mahānubhāvo bhisakko dibbāgadena sappe viya sabbaparappavādino sadevakañca lokaṃ abhibhavati. Iti sabbalokābhibhavane tatho aviparīto desanāvilāsamayo ceva puññamayo ca agado assāti dakārassa takāraṃ katvā tathāgatoti veditabbo. Evaṃ abhibhavanaṭṭhena tathāgato.
再者,‘依如实而往’亦称如来,‘往如实相’亦称如来。‘往’(gato)意指了知、超越、证得、行道。其中,由知遍知(tīraṇapariññā)如实了知全世间故,为如来;由断遍知(pahānapariññā)如实超越世间集故,为如来;由作证(sacchikiriyāya)如实证得世间灭故,为如来;由修习如实趣向世间灭道故,为如来。因此世尊说:显示巴利原文
Api ca tathāya gatotipi tathāgato, tathaṃ gatotipi tathāgato. Gatoti avagato, atīto patto paṭipannoti attho. Tattha sakalaṃ lokaṃ tīraṇapariññāya tathāya gato avagatoti tathāgato, lokasamudayaṃ pahānapariññāya tathāya gato atītoti tathāgato, lokanirodhaṃ sacchikiriyāya tathāya gato pattoti tathāgato, lokanirodhagāminiṃ paṭipadaṃ tathaṃ gato paṭipannoti tathāgato. Tena yaṃ vuttaṃ bhagavatā –
“诸比丘,世间已由如来正自觉知,如来于世间已离系。诸比丘,世间集已由如来正自觉知,如来已断除世间集。诸比丘,世间灭已由如来正自觉知,如来已证得世间灭。诸比丘,通向世间灭道已由如来正自觉知,如来已修习通向世间灭道。诸比丘,包括天、魔在内的世界……乃至心意所思所察的一切,皆由如来正自觉知。因此名为‘如来’。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Loko, bhikkhave, tathāgatena abhisambuddho, lokasmā tathāgato visaṃyutto. Lokasamudayo, bhikkhave, tathāgatena abhisambuddho, lokasamudayo tathāgatassa pahīno. Lokanirodho, bhikkhave, tathāgatena abhisambuddho, lokanirodho tathāgatassa sacchikato. Lokanirodhagāminī paṭipadā, bhikkhave, tathāgatena abhisambuddhā, lokanirodhagāminī paṭipadā tathāgatassa bhāvitā. Yaṃ, bhikkhave, sadevakassa lokassa…pe… anuvicaritaṃ manasā, sabbaṃ taṃ tathāgatena abhisambuddhaṃ. Tasmā ‘tathāgato’ti vuccatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.23).
此义亦应如此了知。然而,这些仅为阐明‘如来性’的纲要。实则唯有如来才能于一切方面详尽解说如来的如来性。又因一切佛陀于如来功德皆平等一如,故就一切如来总称‘如来们’(tathāgatā)。显示巴利原文
Tassa evampi attho veditabbo. Idampi ca tathāgatassa tathāgatabhāvadīpena mukhamattameva. Sabbākārena pana tathāgatova tathāgatassa tathāgatabhāvaṃ vaṇṇeyya. Yasmā pana sabbabuddhā tathāgataguṇenāpi samasamā, tasmā sabbesaṃ vasena ‘‘tathāgatā’’ti āha.
阿拉汉(Arahant):因远离烦恼,因已摧毁敌者及其轮辐(烦恼),因堪受资具等供养,因于造恶时无有隐秘,故如来是阿拉汉。的确,他以道彻底摧毁一切烦恼与习气,故于一切烦恼远远地、极为遥远地安住;由此“远离”(ārakattā)之义,称为阿拉汉。显示巴利原文
Arahantoti kilesehi ārakattā, arīnaṃ arānañca hatattā, paccayādīnaṃ arahattā, pāpakaraṇe rahābhāvā tathāgato arahaṃ. Ārakā hi so sabbakilesehi suvidūravidūre ṭhito maggena savāsanānaṃ kilesānaṃ viddhaṃsitattāti ārakattā arahaṃ.
他由此而得名“远离”,即于诸过失不具足;
导师不具诸过失,故被视为阿拉汉。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘So tato ārakā nāma, yassa yenāsamaṅgitā; Asamaṅgī ca dosehi, nātho tenārahaṃ mato’’.
“阿拉汉”:又因他以道摧毁了这些烦恼敌,故亦由“已摧破诸敌”之义而称为阿拉汉。显示巴利原文
Te cānena kilesārayo maggena hatāti arīnaṃ hatattāpi arahaṃ.
因贪等所摄一切诸敌,皆已摧破;
导师以慧剑摧破他们,故亦被尊为阿拉汉。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yasmā rāgādisaṅkhātā, sabbepi arayo hatā; Paññāsatthena nāthena, tasmāpi arahaṃ mato’’.
「阿拉汉」:再者,那轮回之轮——以无明、有、渴爱为轮毂,以福行等行为辐条,以老死为轮辋,以漏集所成之轴贯穿,联结在三有之车上,无始以来流转不息——他于菩提座处,以精进双足立于戒地,以信手执持能灭尽业之智斧,尽摧此轮一切辐条,故称阿拉汉。显示巴利原文
Yañcetaṃ avijjābhavataṇhāmayanābhiṃ puññādiabhisaṅkhārānaṃ jarāmaraṇanemiṃ āsavasamudayamayena akkhena vijjhitvā tibhavarathe samāyojitaṃ anādikālappavattaṃ saṃsāracakkaṃ, tassānena bodhimaṇḍe vīriyapādehi sīlapathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhāya saddhāhatthena kammakkhayakaraṃ ñāṇapharasuṃ gahetvā sabbe arā hatāti arahaṃ.
轮回之轮诸辐条,既已为智剑摧破;
此世间导师,故被称为阿拉汉。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Arā saṃsāracakkassa, hatā ñāṇāsinā yato; Lokanāthena tenesa, ‘araha’nti pavuccati’’.
「阿拉汉」:又因他是最上的应供者,故堪受衣等资具及殊胜供养。也正因如此,当如来出现于世间时,那些有大威德的天与人,皆不向别处作供养。譬如,娑婆主梵天曾以须弥山量之宝鬘供养如来,其余天人及频婆娑罗王、憍萨罗王等人间诸王,亦各随其力而行供养。乃至世尊般涅槃后,阿育王为纪念世尊,布施了九十六俱胝的财富,于赡部洲建造了八万四千精舍,尚不计其余诸般殊胜供养。是故,亦由「堪受资具等」之义而名为阿拉汉。显示巴利原文
Aggadakkhiṇeyyattā ca cīvarādipaccaye arahati pūjāvisesañca, teneva ca uppanne tathāgate ye keci mahesakkhā devamanussā, na te aññattha pūjaṃ karonti. Tathā hi brahmā sahampati sinerumattena ratanadāmena tathāgataṃ pūjesi, yathābalañca aññe devā ca manussā ca bimbisārakosalarājādayo. Parinibbutampi ca bhagavantaṃ uddissa channavutikoṭidhanaṃ vissajjetvā asokamahārājā sakalajambudīpe caturāsītivihārasahassāni patiṭṭhāpesi. Ko pana vādo aññesaṃ pūjāvisesānanti paccayādīnaṃ arahattāpi arahaṃ.
因为这位世间主,堪受与资具相伴的殊胜供养,
且于世间,他堪受与义相应的供养,因此,胜利者便得此「阿拉汉」之名。」
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Pūjāvisesaṃ saha paccayehi, yasmā ayaṃ arahati lokanātho; Atthānurūpaṃ arahanti loke, tasmā jino arahati nāmametaṃ’’.
如同世间有些自认聪明的愚者,因畏惧恶名而暗中造恶;而如来无论何时皆不造恶,正因造恶时毫无隐秘,故称“阿拉汉”。显示巴利原文
Yathā ca loke ye keci paṇḍitamānino bālā asilokabhayena raho pāpaṃ karonti, evamesa na kadāci pāpaṃ karotīti pāpakaraṇe rahābhāvatopi arahaṃ.
对于如来,在恶行上绝无所谓的秘密;
正因无有隐秘,故他名为“阿拉汉”。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yasmā natthi raho nāma, pāpakammesu tādino; Rahābhāvena tenesa, arahaṃ iti vissuto’’.
如是,于一切方面而言——显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sabbathāpi –
这位牟尼已于烦恼之敌远离,已将烦恼之敌摧毁,
他已摧毁轮回之轮,因此堪受资具等供养;
他不于隐秘处造恶,以此故名为“阿拉汉”。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ārakattā hatattā ca, kilesārīna so muni; Hatasaṃsāracakkāro, paccayādīna cāraho; Na raho karoti pāpāni, arahaṃ tena vuccatī’’ti.
然而,由于一切佛陀在阿拉汉的功德上也是平等的,因此依一切佛陀而言,说“他们是阿拉汉”。“正自觉者”:因为他自己正确地觉悟了一切法,故称正自觉者。正因为他对一切法如此正确地觉悟:对应了知的法,他以应了知的方式觉悟;对应遍知的法,他以应遍知的方式觉悟;对应断除的法,他以应断除的方式觉悟;对应证得的法,他以应证得的方式觉悟;对应修习的法,他以应修习的方式觉悟。因此说道——显示巴利原文
Yasmā pana sabbe buddhā arahattaguṇenāpi samasamā, tasmā sabbesampi vasena ‘‘arahanto’’ti āha. Sammāsambuddhāti sammā sāmañca sabbadhammānaṃ buddhattā sammāsambuddho. Tathā hesa sabbadhamme sammāsambuddho, abhiññeyye dhamme abhiññeyyato, pariññeyye dhamme pariññeyyato, pahātabbe dhamme pahātabbato, sacchikātabbe dhamme sacchikātabbato, bhāvetabbe dhamme bhāvetabbato. Tenevāha –
“应了知者,我已了知;应修习者,我已修习;
应断的,我已断除;因此,我是佛陀,是婆罗门。」(《经集》563;《中部》2.399)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Abhiññeyyaṃ abhiññātaṃ, bhāvetabbañca bhāvitaṃ; Pahātabbaṃ pahīnaṃ me, tasmā buddhosmi brāhmaṇā’’ti. (su. ni. 563; ma. ni. 2.399);
或者可以这样解释:眼即是苦谛,以它为根本生起之因的先前渴爱,即是集谛;两者不再生起,是灭谛;了知灭的修行方法,即是道谛。如此,通过逐项分析,他凭借自己正确地觉悟了一切法。这个道理也同样适用于耳、鼻、舌、身、意。依循同样的方式,对于色等六处、眼识等六识身、眼触等六触、眼触所生受等六受、色想等六想、色思等六思、色渴爱等六渴爱身、色寻等六寻、色伺等六伺、色蕴等五蕴、十遍、十随念、膨胀相等十不净想、发等三十二行相、十二处、十八界、欲有等九有、初禅那等四禅那、慈心修习等四无量、四无色定,以及逆观老死等和顺观无明等缘起支,都可以如此配列。显示巴利原文
Atha vā cakkhu dukkhasaccaṃ, tassa mūlakāraṇabhāvena samuṭṭhāpikā purimataṇhā samudayasaccaṃ, ubhinnaṃ appavatti nirodhasaccaṃ, nirodhapajānanā paṭipadā maggasaccanti evaṃ ekekapaduddhārenāpi sabbadhamme sammā sāmañca buddho. Esa nayo sotaghānajivhākāyamanesu. Eteneva ca nayena rūpādīni cha āyatanāni, cakkhuviññāṇādayo cha viññāṇakāyā, cakkhusamphassādayo cha phassā, cakkhusamphassajā vedanādayo cha vedanā, rūpasaññādayo cha saññā, rūpasañcetanādayo cha cetanā, rūpataṇhādayo cha taṇhākāyā, rūpavitakkādayo cha vitakkā, rūpavicārādayo cha vicārā, rūpakkhandhādayo pañcakkhandhā, dasa kasiṇāni, dasa anussatiyo, uddhumātakasaññādivasena dasa saññā, kesādayo dvattiṃsākārā, dvādasāyatanāni, aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo, kāmabhavādayo nava bhavā, paṭhamādīni cattāri jhānāni, mettābhāvanādayo catasso appamaññāyo, catasso arūpasamāpattiyo, paṭilomato jarāmaraṇādīni, anulomato avijjādīni paṭiccasamuppādaṅgāni ca yojetabbāni.
这里提供一种逐词配对的方式:老死是苦谛,生是集谛,这两者的出离是灭谛,了知灭的修行方法就是道谛。如此,通过逐项分析,他于一切法自己正确地觉悟、随觉、通达。或者,凡有任何应被了知的对象,由于他对这一切法都已正确地完全觉悟,故凭借解脱边际智而成为「正自觉者」。这些类别将在后文详述。又,因为一切佛陀在正自觉的功德上完全平等,所以从一切佛陀都具备这一功德的角度,总结说:「他们是正自觉者。」显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ ekapadayojanā – jarāmaraṇaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ, jāti samudayasaccaṃ, ubhinnaṃ nissaraṇaṃ nirodhasaccaṃ, nirodhapajānanā paṭipadā maggasaccanti evaṃ ekekapaduddhārena sabbadhamme sammā sāmañca buddho anubuddho paṭividdho. Yaṃ vā pana kiñci atthi neyyaṃ nāma, sabbassa sammā sambuddhattā vimokkhantikañāṇavasena sammāsambuddho. Tesaṃ pana vibhāgo upari āvi bhavissati. Yasmā pana sabbabuddhā sammāsambuddhaguṇenāpi samasamā, tasmā sabbesampi vasena ‘‘sammāsambuddhā’’ti āha.
关于“凭默然”:一个人确实可以凭借名为牟尼行道的道智之默然,而成为牟尼,但此处所指的只是单纯的沉默,因此世尊说“不是凭沉默这样”。所谓“愚痴相者”,就是看上去空洞无物的人;“无智者”,则是无知之人。因为这样的人即使沉默不语,也不能叫作牟尼。或者可以说,他既不是真正的默然牟尼,同时又是一个空洞无知的人,这就是此句的涵义。“又如持秤者”:就像有人手持秤杆站着称量,多了就取走一些,少了便添加一些;同样地,他如同取走过剩那般,断除、远离种种恶行;又如同添加不足那般,圆满种种善法。如此修行的人,执取最上等的法——也就是戒、定、慧、解脱、解脱智见——而远离种种不善业,这个人就叫作牟尼。因此,他就是牟尼。为何说他是牟尼?正是由于前面所说的这个原因,所以他叫作牟尼。“他了知二世间者”:是说如果有人能在这蕴等世间中,犹如把物品放到秤上衡量一般,以“这些是内蕴,这些是外蕴”等方法,清晰地了知内外这两类法,他便因此原因而被称为“牟尼”。也就是说,正是由于这个缘故,他被称为牟尼。显示巴利原文
Monenāti kāmañhi moneyyapaṭipadāsaṅkhātena maggañāṇamonena muni nāma hoti, idha pana tuṇhībhāvaṃ sandhāya ‘‘na monenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Mūḷharūpoti tuccharūpo. Aviddasūti aviññū. Evarūpo hi tuṇhībhūtopi muni nāma na hoti. Atha vā moneyyamuni nāma na hoti, tucchabhāvo ca pana aññāṇī ca hotīti attho. Yo ca tulaṃva paggayhāti yathā hi tulaṃ gahetvā ṭhito atirekaṃ ce hoti, harati, ūnaṃ ce hoti, pakkhipati; evameva so atirekaṃ haranto viya pāpaṃ harati parivajjeti, ūnake pakkhipanto viya kusalaṃ paripūreti. Evañca pana karonto sīlasamādhipaññāvimuttivimuttiñāṇadassanasaṅkhātaṃ varaṃ uttamameva ādāya pāpāni akusalakammāni parivajjeti sa muni nāmāti attho. Tena so munīti kasmā pana so munīti ce? Yaṃ heṭṭhā vuttakāraṇaṃ, tena so munīti attho. Yo munāti ubho loketi yo puggalo imasmiṃ khandhādiloke tulaṃ āropetvā minanto viya ‘‘ime ajjhattikā khandhā, ime bāhirā’’tiādinā nayena ime ubho atthe munāti. Muni tena pavuccatīti tena pana kāraṇena ‘‘munī’’ti vuccatiyevāti attho.
关于“非有与有”这首偈颂的简要含义如下:这里所说的“非有”与“有”之法,即是指由不善与善所分类的法。他在涵盖“内与外”的一切世间中,以简择智了知了“非有之法”与“有之法”。正因为已经了知这些,所以他超越了七种结缚(依贪等分别)和两种网(依渴爱与邪见分别),安住于此。由于他具备这种名为“默然”的简择智,所以他叫作牟尼。“为天与人所恭敬”:这是对他的赞叹之语。因为这位诸漏已尽的牟尼,值得天与人的供养,所以才这样说。显示巴利原文
Asatañcāti gāthāya ayaṃ saṅkhepattho – yvāyaṃ akusalakusalappabhedo, asatañca satañca dhammo, taṃ ‘‘ajjhattaṃ bahiddhā’’ti imasmiṃ sabbaloke pavicayañāṇena asatañca satañca ñatvā dhammaṃ. Tassa ñātattā eva, rāgādibhedato sattavidhaṃ saṅgaṃ taṇhādiṭṭhibhedato duvidhaṃ jālañca aticca atikkamitvā ṭhito, so tena monasaṅkhātena pavicayañāṇena samannāgatattā muni. Devamanussehi pūjitoti idaṃ panassa thutivacanaṃ. So hi khīṇāsavamunittā devamanussānaṃ pūjāraho hoti, tasmā evaṃ vuttoti.
“箭”是根本词。“七箭”表示数量范围。“贪箭”:因染着故为贪,又因能造成逼迫、内中刺痛、难以拔出,所以也是箭,故称贪箭。对瞋箭等其他箭,也应如此理解。“已拔出箭者”是根本词。“已抽去箭者”意为已拔除箭的人。“已上举箭者”指箭已向上拔出、已抽离的人。“已完全拔出箭者”是就前缀(sam-)而说的。“已根除箭者”指已彻底斩断箭的人。“已完全根除箭者”同样依前缀而说。显示巴利原文
Sallanti mūlapadaṃ. Satta sallānīti gaṇanaparicchedo. Rāgasallanti rañjanaṭṭhena rāgo ca pīḷājanakatāya antotudanatāya dunnīharaṇatāya sallañcāti rāgasallaṃ. Dosasallādīsupi eseva nayo. Abbūḷhasalloti mūlapadaṃ. Abbahitasalloti nīhaṭasallo. Uddhatasalloti uddhaṃ haṭasallo uddharitasallo. Samuddhatasalloti upasaggavasena vutto. Uppāṭitasalloti luñcitasallo. Samuppāṭitasalloti upasaggavaseneva.
“恭敬作者”:在对布施等善法的修习中,或因对补特伽罗、应施法生起恭敬而作,故称恭敬作者。“常恒作者”:因能恒常不间断地造作,故称常恒作者。“不懈作者”:因能稳固、持续地造作,故称不懈作者。正如有一种名为kakaṇṭako之物,走一点便停一下,不能无间断地前进;同样,若有人某日行布施、作供养、听法或修沙门法后,隔许久方再为之,不能持续不断地转起,便称为“非常恒作者、非坚稳作者”。而此处所说之人并非如此,故称不懈作者。“不懈缩者”:因不间断地造作,其善行功德不会退缩衰减,故称不懈缩者。“不舍欲者”:在修善时不舍弃精进的意欲,故称不舍欲者。“不舍重任者”:不舍弃精进的重担,故称不舍重任者,即心不退转之义。“凡于彼有欲、勤”:在这些善法中,有想要去行的法欲,以及名为策励的精进。“策励”以奋力向前为义;“胜策励”以更增上的奋力为义。其中,“勤”以到达彼岸为义,“策励”以行于前为义,“胜策励”以增上为义。“亦无退”:即不退转。“有念与正知”。显示巴利原文
Sakkaccakārīti dānādīnaṃ kusaladhammānaṃ bhāvanāya puggalassa vā deyyadhammassa vā sakkaccakaraṇavasena sakkaccakārī. Satatabhāvakaraṇena sātaccakārī. Aṭṭhitakaraṇena aṭṭhitakārī. Yathā nāma kakaṇṭako thokaṃ gantvā thokaṃ tiṭṭhati, na nirantaraṃ gacchati; evameva yo puggalo ekadivasaṃ dānaṃ datvā pūjaṃ vā katvā dhammaṃ vā sutvā samaṇadhammaṃ vā katvā puna cirassaṃ karoti, taṃ na nirantaraṃ pavatteti. So ‘‘asātaccakārī, anaṭṭhitakārī’’ti vuccati. Ayaṃ evaṃ na karotīti aṭṭhitakārī. Anolīnavuttikoti nirantarakaraṇasaṅkhātassa vipphārassa bhāvena na līnavuttikoti anolīnavuttiko. Anikkhittacchandoti kusalakaraṇe vīriyacchandassa anikkhittabhāvena anikkhittacchando. Anikkhittadhuroti vīriyadhurassa anoropanena anikkhittadhuro, anosakkitamānasoti attho. Yo tattha chando ca vāyāmo cāti yo tesu kusaladhammesu kattukamyatādhammacchando ca payattasaṅkhāto vāyāmo ca. Ussahanavasena ussāho ca. Adhimattussahanavasena ussoḷhī ca. Vāyāmo ceso pāraṃ gamanaṭṭhena. Ussāho ceso pubbaṅgamanaṭṭhena. Ussoḷhī ceso adhimattaṭṭhena. Appaṭivāni cāti anivattanā ca. Sati ca sampajaññanti saratīti sati. Sampajānātīti sampajaññaṃ, samantato pakārehi jānātīti attho. Sātthakasampajaññaṃ sappāyasampajaññaṃ gocarasampajaññaṃ asammohasampajaññanti imassa sampajānassa vasena bhedo veditabbo. Ātappanti kilesatāpanavīriyaṃ. Padhānanti uttamavīriyaṃ. Adhiṭṭhānanti kusalakaraṇe patiṭṭhābhāvo. Anuyogoti anuyuñjanaṃ. Appamādoti nappamajjanaṃ, satiyā avippavāso.
“不期望此世”是根本句。“自身有”:指自己之身的存在。“他身有”:指他世之身的存在。“自色受等”:指自己的五蕴。“他色受等”:指他世的五蕴。“欲界”:即欲有。“色界”:即色有。“无色界”:即无色有。此外,为依色与无色二法而显示二类,将欲界与色界合为一组,无色界独为一组而说。“或趣”:依住处而说的五趣。“或再生”:依结生而说的四生。“或结生”:依三有的连结而说的结生。“或有”:依业有而说。“或轮回”:依蕴等无间断流转而说。“或转”:即三界内的轮转。不期望这些,即不希求它们。显示巴利原文
Imaṃ lokaṃ nāsīsatīti mūlapadaṃ. Sakattabhāvanti attano attabhāvaṃ. Parattabhāvanti paraloke attabhāvaṃ. Sakarūpavedanādayo attano pañcakkhandhe, pararūpavedanādayo ca paraloke pañcakkhandhe. Kāmadhātunti kāmabhavaṃ. Rūpadhātunti rūpabhavaṃ. Arūpadhātunti arūpabhavaṃ. Puna rūpārūpavasena dukaṃ dassetuṃ kāmadhātuṃ rūpadhātuṃ ekaṃ katvā, arūpadhātuṃ ekaṃ katvā vuttaṃ. Gatiṃ vāti patiṭṭhānavasena pañcagati vuttā. Upapattiṃ vāti nibbattivasena catuyoni vuttā. Paṭisandhiṃ vāti tiṇṇaṃ bhavānaṃ ghaṭanavasena paṭisandhi vuttā. Bhavaṃ vāti kammabhavavasena. Saṃsāraṃ vāti khandhādīnaṃ abbocchinnavasena. Vaṭṭaṃ vāti tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ nāsīsatīti.